Maserati - Quattroporte - Owners Manua - 2019 - 2019

QUATTROPORTE Owner's Manual Dear Customer, thank you for choosing a Maserati. This vehicle represents the result of Maserati's great experience in the design and production of sports, touring and racing vehicles. The purpose of this manual is to provide you with an understanding of the equipment, systems and controls of the vehicle and to explain how they work. Consulting this manual you will acquaint yourself with the equipment and optional properties of your Maserati in order to take best advantage of all its potential. Before driving your vehicle for the first time, we suggest reading the printed Quick Guide carefully in order to quickly acquaint with commands and functions of your vehicle. You can consult this Owner's Manual, the Maserati Touch Control Plus and Rear Seat Entertainment (optional equipement) guide directly from the dashboard touch screen display of your vehicle. The updated version of the on-board documentation can be consulted by accessing the section “Services” on the website www.maserati.com. In a dedicated section of this manual you will also find instructions for basic maintenance procedures, in order to ensure steady levels of performance, quality and safe driving. In addition, keep in mind that proper maintenance is an essential factor to help preserve the value of the vehicle over time and protect the environment. For “Scheduled Maintenance” or any other operations, we recommend to contact the Maserati Service Network: you can trust our trained technical staff, who is constantly updated and provided with the required equipment in order to ensure that all service operations are performed properly and reliably. The Quick guide and other documents contained in on-board documentation Kit are integral part of the vehicle and should always be kept on board. You can purchase a printed copy of the documents visible on dashboard touch screen display at your dealer of the Service Network. Maserati is committed to protect the environment and natural resources; this is why we chose to develop Owner’s documentation in digital format instead of printing paper, thus reducing consumption of materials deriving from wood. 2 Introduction 1 Before Starting 2 Understanding the Vehicle 3 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 Driving 5 In an Emergency 6 Maintenance and Care 7 Features and Specifications 8 Index 9 3 4 1 - Introduction Consulting the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Service and Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Spare Parts Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Warnings when Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Vehicle Identification Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 5 Introduction 1 Consulting the Manual This Manual illustrates maintenance and use information related to gasoline motorization models (3.8 V8, 3.0 V6 and 3.0 V6 AWD version), indicated as “Gasoline”, and diesel motorization model (3.0 V6), indicated as “Diesel”. If not otherwise specified, the information is valid for all models. For an easy identification of the topics, this Manual is divided into sections and chapters: each chapter can have more paragraphs. Within the text, important warnings and notes are also easily identifiable through icons. WARNING! Failure to comply with the instructions could cause HAZARDOUS SITUATIONS involving personal and vehicle safety. ENVIRONMENTAL! This note indicates the correct behavior when using the vehicle to protect the environment. 6 CAUTION! Aimed at preventing any damage to the vehicle and thus hazards involving the safety of persons. NOTE: Additional information regarding the subject and/or the operation described. • In the images the vehicle is represented in the base version. On other versions, some part or equipment may differ from those shown in the images. • "Left" and "right” in this manual, always refer to the driving direction. • All indications and images in this Manual refer to a vehicle with left-hand drive. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are ordered differently than shown in the illustrations. • If not otherwise specified, the instrument cluster shown in the images belongs to the V8 Gasoline motorization model – however the indications given are also valid for all the other motorization models. • If not otherwise specified, the instrument cluster shown in the images is the version with the speedometer in km/h – however the indications given are also valid for the version in mph. Introduction Abbreviations EBD Some descriptions and terms with particular meanings are found in this manual in abbreviated form. A/C Air-Conditioning system. ABA SAB Side Air Bag. ECU Electronic Brake-force Distribution. Electronic Control Unit. SABIC EPB Electric Parking Brake. EPS Electric Power Steering. SBR SRS Advanced Brake Assist. ESC Electronic Stability Control. ABS Anti-Lock Braking System. FCW Forward Collision Warning. TCS Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains. Seat Belt Reminder. Supplemental Restraint System. Traction Control System. ABSA Active Blind Spot Assist. GPF Gasoline Particulate Filter. TFT Thin Film Transistor. ACC Adaptive Cruise Control. HAS Highway Assist. TPMS ADAS HBA HSA Hydraulic Brake Assistance. Hill Start Assist. I.C.E. ALR Advanced Driver Assistance Systems. Advanced Frontlighting System. Automatic Locking Retractor. Tire Pressure Monitoring System. Traffic Sign Assist. LKA Increased Control and Efficiency. Lane Keeping Assist. AQS Air Quality Sensor. MIL Malfunction Indicator Light. ATC MTC+ Maserati Touch Control Plus. AWD Automatic Temperature Control. All-Wheel Drive. BAS Brake Assist System. OBD ORC BSA Blind Spot Assist. BTO Brake Throttle Override. CAN Controller Area Network. RAB On Board Diagnostics. Occupant Restraint Controller. Pedestrian Emergency Braking. Ready Alert Braking. CC Cruise Control. RCP Rear Cross Path. CRS Child Restraint System. RHD Right-Hand Drive. DPF Diesel Particulate Filter. RKE Remote Keyless Entry. DRL Daytime Running Lights. RSE Rear Seat Entertainment. RWD Rear-Wheel Drive. AFS PEB TSA VIN 1 Vehicle Identification Number. 7 Introduction 1 Updating Service and Warranty The vehicle's high quality level is guaranteed by constant improvements. Therefore, there may prove to be differences between this manual and your vehicle. Maserati reserves the right to carry out design and functional changes and to achieve additions or improvements without incurring any obligation to update previously manufactured vehicles. The Owner's Manual illustrates and describes all versions of the current vehicle model. Therefore, some of the equipment and accessories in this publication may not appear on your vehicle; please only consider the information related to your vehicle. All specifications and illustrations contained in this manual refer to the Manual publishing date. The information provided in this manual is limited to instructions and indications that are strictly required for vehicle use and proper maintenance. By following these instructions carefully the vehicle will certainly meet the owner's satisfaction and the best results. We also advise you to have all the maintenance services and inspections carried at the Service Network. Please be advised that Maserati recommends to address to the Official Service Network, which is available in the official Maserati website (www.maserati.com). All features and accessories installed on the vehicle have been designed by Maserati engineers and have successfully passed rigorous tests, submitted in all conditions of use. Installing aftermarket accessories not approved by Maserati may interfere with the vehicle electronics and compromise driving safety. For details and information about the warranty, please refer to the “Warranty Card”. NOTE: Can be consulted by accessing the section "Services" on the website www.maserati.com. 8 The Maserati Service Network is at your complete disposal for any information and suggestions. Introduction Spare Parts Service Symbols With genuine parts you keep the reliability, comfort and performance features of your new car unchanged in time. For service and scheduled maintenance Maserati suggests you to ask for genuine parts since they are the result of constant research and development, reliability test and new technologies, as well as they are specifically designed for this vehicle. There are specific colored plates on or near some of the components on your Maserati designed to attract user’s attention. Important warnings concerning all specific devices that the user must consider, are reported on the internal lid cover central label (see “Vehicle Identification Data” in this section). All symbols reported on the plate and inside the vehicle, as well as the component for which the symbols stand, are summarized in the following list. These symbols are divided into categories according to their meaning. Genuine Accessories The Maserati Genuine Accessories are the perfect combination of design and functionality. Each detail and characteristic of the items are tailor-made with the highest quality represented by the Maserati Trident. Severe Technical and Quality Tests are performed to approve each product. To fully exploit the vehicle's performance and versatility, discover the wide range of approved accessories that can be added to the car. The Maserati Service Network is at your complete disposal for any information about this "Genuine Accessories" product range. Danger Symbols Battery Corrosive liquid. Battery Explosion. Coil - headlights High voltage. 1 Belts and pulleys Moving parts, keep body and clothing clear. Air-conditioning lines High pressure gas, do not open. Symbols of Prohibitions and Compulsory Measures Battery Keep away from flames. Battery Keep out of children’s reach. Heat guards - belts - pulleys fans Do not touch. Battery Wear eye protection. Battery - jack Refer to the owner manual. Blower May start automatically even with engine off. Coolant expansion tank Do not open cap with engine warm. 9 Introduction 1 10 Warning Symbols Engine - Engine Oil Refilling Plug Engine oil. We recommend you use oil with the characteristics indicated in chapter "Refillings" in section "Features and Specifications". Brake fluid tank Brake fluid type DOT 4. Do not exceed max. level. We recommend you use fluid with the characteristics indicated in chapter "Refillings" in section "Features and Specifications". Radiator coolant expansion tank Use antifreeze liquid for radiators with the characteristics indicated in chapter "Refillings" in section "Features and Specifications". Windshield washer tank Windshield washer. We recommend you use liquid with the characteristics indicated in chapter "Refillings" in section "Features and Specifications". Warnings when Driving Your driving skills will improve with experience, but be especially careful at the beginning. Always comply with local traffic regulations wherever you drive. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. Operating this vehicle at excessive speed or in an altered state or while intoxicated may result in loss of control, going off the road, or overturning. In all these situations a collision with other vehicles or objects is more likely to happen with the risk to cause an accident that may lead to serious injury. In case of an accident, failure to use seat belts causes the driver and passengers a greater risk of injury or death. This Owner's Manual contains warnings against operating procedures that could result in a collision or injury or damage to the environment. It also contains cautions against procedures that could damage the vehicle. If you do not entirely read this manual, you may miss important information. Consider carefully all warnings and cautions. WARNING! • It is the driver’s responsibility to • • • • operate the vehicle in a safe way: if you are distracted while driving you can lose control and cause serious accidents. Maserati strongly recommends to use particular care when operating the features and tools that may take the attention off the road. Mobile phones, pc, portable audio device or other features operated improperly while the vehicle is moving can be very dangerous and can cause serious accidents. It is very dangerous to send text messages while driving, do so only when the vehicle is not moving. In some Countries the use of mobile phone when driving is forbidden: it is the driver’s sole responsibility to respect local regulations. CAUTION! If battery charge is too low, proper function of some electric/electronic components may not be guaranteed. It is necessary to recharge the battery in order to allow all vehicle’s components and systems to function correctly. Introduction Vehicle Identification Data 1 Vehicle Identification Number The vehicle's identification number (VIN) is punched on the foot platform, in front of the right-hand front seat. NOTE: When ordering spare parts or making inquiries, always quote the vehicle identification number. To read the number, lift the mat and slide the guard. Passenger Air bag Labels The labels are applied on the external side of passenger's sun visor and below it, on the dome. Warning and Identification Labels Overview Label with Cautions and Warning Notes On this label attached centrally on the internal side of the hood cover, you can identify all cautions, warning notes and symbols that are also reported on some parts/components of the vehicle. For further information refer to "Symbols" in this section. The label indicating the air bag incompatibility with the child seat is applied on the passenger’s side of the dashboard. The VIN Number is also visible from the outside through the windshield on the front left corner of the dashboard. 11 Introduction • Maximum admissible weight. • Maximum admissible weight on first (front) axle. • Maximum admissible weight on second (rear) axle. • Engine type. • Vehicle version code. • Assembly Number. 1 Danger Restart Engine with Hood open Label The label is applied on the lower right side of the hood. Gasoline Paint Identification Plate The plate is applied on the lower left side of the hood. Vehicle Identification Label The label is fitted on the rear right hand door's ledge and it shows the following details. • Manufacturer's name. • Homologation number. • Serial Number (V.I.N.). 12 Fuel Warning Labels - Gasoline Engines The labels are applied inside the fuel filler door. Fuel Warning Labels - Diesel Engine The labels are applied inside the fuel filler door. Diesel On the cars of some markets, inside the fuel filler door, there may be Introduction another label indicating to use only Low Sulphur Premium Diesel. 1 Tire Information Label On vehicles of some markets, this paper label is applied on the driver's side rear door pillar. 13 Introduction 14 2 - Before Starting Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sentry Key® Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requiring and Setting Additional Key fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Start System (for version/markets, where provided) . . . . . . . . . . . Doors Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passive Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Sunshades on Rear Door Windows (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open and Close the Boot Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boot Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open and Close the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Occupants Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Parking Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surround View Camera System (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 18 19 22 25 26 27 29 32 36 38 41 43 48 49 50 56 66 77 78 83 84 87 15 Before Starting Keys 2 The vehicle is equipped with a Remote Keyless Entry transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node, to enter, start and protect the vehicle. The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has three operating setups indicated on the outer ring. Pressing and releasing the middle button, you can switch from one setup to the next without starting the engine, the switched on indication will turn amber. The engine will start by pushing the center button START/STOP with the brake pedal pressed and the device set in any of the three operating setups. In case the ignition switch does not change by pushing a button, the RKE transmitter (key fob) may have a low or discharged battery. If this occurs it is necessary to replace the battery in order to operate the ignition switch (see "Requiring and Setting Additional Key fobs" in this section). It is still possible to operate the ignition device using the key fob RKE transmitter with discharged battery by pressing the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob on the START/STOP button. Key fob Keyless Ignition Device This device allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is inside the vehicle. 16 The vehicle is provided with two programmed key fobs. The key fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an inserted emergency key in the rear. The emergency key allows to open the vehicle by inserting into the lock of the Before Starting opening handle on the driver's door, in case the battery of the vehicle or the key fob are discharged. NOTE: You can insert either side of the emergency key into the lock cylinder. Shift Ignition Device to OFF Alert You can keep the emergency key with you when using valet parking. To remove the emergency key: • hold the mechanical latch on the back of the key fob sideways; • simultaneously remove the emergency key by sliding laterally towards the end of the key fob. Opening the driver's door to exit the vehicle when the ignition device is set in ACC or RUN (engine not running), a beep will remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the acoustic signal a dedicated message is displayed on the instrument cluster. If the ignition device is left in the ACC or RUN position, when vehicle is locked the system will turn off the instrument cluster and automatically set ignition device to OFF. With the MTC+ System, the power window switches, radio, power sunroof (optional), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature, it is possible to set the timing of this feature. NOTE: Refer to "MTC+ Settings" in Section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information. • • • • • WARNING! When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake switch, brake pedal or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition switch in the ACC or RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. 2 17 Before Starting • An unlocked car is an invitation 2 to thieves. Always remove the key fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition switch to OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Sentry Key® Immobilizer System The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. The system uses a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, an ignition switch and a RF (Radio Frequency) receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs expressly programmed can be used to start and operate the vehicle. After placing the ignition in the RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light (see picture) will light up for a three seconds bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics: this condition will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds. If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (engine running for longer than 10 seconds), an electronic fault is detected. Should this occur, ask as soon as possible the Service Network for assistance. CAUTION! The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some remote starting systems that can be installed in after-market. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. All key fobs provided with the new vehicle have been updated with the vehicle electronics and are therefore able to guarantee correct functioning and protection. Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information Information The "Regulatory Information" for all the radio 18 Before Starting frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section "Services" on the website www.maserati.com. Replacement Key fobs NOTE: Only key fobs that are updated with the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. WARNING! • Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. • Always remember to cycle the ignition switch to OFF. Duplication of key fobs may be performed by the Service Network only. This procedure consists of programming a key fob that has never been programmed to the vehicle’s electronics. NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all key fobs provided with the vehicle with you to the Maserati Service Center. When selling the vehicle, it is necessary to provide the new owner with all key fobs. Vehicle Security Alarm The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors and boot lid for unauthorized entry and the START/STOP button for unauthorized operations. The system includes a dual function anti-intrusion sensor and vehicle anti-lift sensor. The anti-intrusion sensor monitors the vehicle interior for motion. The vehicle anti-lift sensor monitors the vehicle for any lifting or tilting actions (tow away, tire removal, ferry transport, etc). A siren with battery backup which senses interruptions of power and communications is also included. While the vehicle security alarm is enabled, interior door locks switches, boot lid and fuel filler door release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: intermittent buzzer, position lights and/or turn signals and the vehicle security light on the dashboard will flash. This light will fast flash for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security alarm is being armed, 2 19 Before Starting and will then flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed. with the driver and/or passenger door open. 2 • Press the lock button on the key fob RKE transmitter. Rearming the System If something triggers the security alarm, and no quick action is taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn off the beeper after 29 seconds, and turn off all of the visual signals after 31 more seconds; the vehicle security alarm will then rearm itself. Arming the System Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm. 1. Make sure the vehicle ignition switch is OFF. 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle: • Press the lock button on the interior power door lock switch located on the driver door trim panel 20 • Press the button on the exterior Passive Entry door handle having a valid key fob RKE transmitter in the same exterior zone (see "Passive Entry System" in this section for further information). 3. If any door is open, close it. In any of these situations, if one or more windows are open, will remain open. To close the windows press again the lock button and hold it until their closure. If vehicle is equipped with Power Boot Lid/Hands Free, when arming the alarm system in any of the described ways, the boot lid will remain open Before Starting if it was left open. In this condition, it will be necessary to first close the boot lid as described under "Open and Close the Boot Lid" in this section, and repeat the arming operation, to be able to arm the alarm system. Vehicles equipped with Power Boot Lid/Hands Free a button - located at the bottom of the boot lid and indicated in the figure - that can be used to completely close and lock the boot lid, lock all the doors and arm the alarm system if all the doors and boot lid are closed. See chapter "Open and Close the Boot Lid" in this section for further information. Each time the vehicle security alarm is armed, the anti-intrusion and anti-lift sensors actively monitor the vehicle. When arming the security alarm, it is possible to disable these sensors by pressing the button on the key fob three times within 5 seconds from the moment the system has been armed (meanwhile the security alarm light flashes rapidly). To disarm the System Use any of the following steps to disarm the vehicle security alarm. • Press the button on key fob RKE transmitter. • Grasp the Passive Entry unlock door handle (see "Passive Entry System" in this section for further information). • Press the START/STOP button so as to release the OFF position. NOTE: • When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switch will not allow to unlock the doors. • The use of the emergency key into the driver door lock and the use of the button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the security alarm of the vehicle. • The vehicle security alarm remains engaged while accessing the Power Boot Lid/Hands free. Pressing the button between the licence plate lights will not disarm the vehicle security alarm. If anyone enters the vehicle through the boot lid and opens a door, the alarm will trigger. The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will activate. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, the buzzer will activate. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. 2 21 Before Starting Illuminated Entry/Exit 2 Lights will turn on and off when you enter/exit the vehicle and operate the buttons on the key fob RKE transmitter and/or on the Passive Entry system as follows: & dimmable internal lighting, night front seats lighting, and approach lighting will stay on for 27 seconds. • If the lock command of the car is enabled by pressing the specific button on the key fob RKE transmitter or by the Passive Entry system, when the key fob RKE transmitter is out of range, all the lights will turn off within 3 seconds, if they were previously on. • If the unlock command is enabled by pressing the specific button on the key fob RKE transmitter or by the Passive Entry system, the "illuminated entry" mode will activate. Courtesy 22 Before Starting 2 NOTE: The lighting of the outside door handle and the puddle light near the front door are only available with the optional rear view mirrors (SVC). • After activating the boot opening command in the possible modes (see "Open and Close the Boot Lid" in this section), the inner boot light will turn on and will stay on for 10 minutes before turning off. The light will immediately turn off if you lock the boot lid before 10 minutes. Vehicle Lighting with Open/Closed Doors If the light button is pressed on the key fob RKE transmitter, the courtesy & dimmable lights and the approach lights will turn on; doors will stay locked. • If one or more doors are open, the central light, front/rear domelights (main and spot light), the instrument cluster, the MTC+ display and the night front seats lighting and the ignition switch backlight will turn on and will lit for 27 seconds. • If the doors are closed, all lights will turn off (within 3 seconds) with the exception of the console display and the ignition switch backlighting, which will turn off after 27 seconds. 23 Before Starting turning the left dimmer upward to the second detent. Light Dimmer Controls The light dimmer controls are part of the light switch and are positioned beside the switcher itself (see "Lights" in section "Understanding the Vehicle" for further information). 2 Use of Light Switch for Vehicle Lighting In addiction of the key fob RKE transmitter and the Passive Entry system vehicle lighting can be operated and from the light switch on the left side of the dashboard. Refer to "Lights" in section "Understanding the Vehicle" where it is indicated which external lights turn on according to light switch positions. 24 Ambient Lights and Backlight Adjustment The ambient light and the backlight of the controls and instruments does not depend on the position of the light switch but on the detection of the ambient brightness made by the RLS solar sensor. In "DAY" mode the backlighting of the instruments will be at 100% intensity while the backlighting of the switches will be at minimum. In "NIGHT" mode backlighting will be adjust via the left dimmer next to the light switch. The ambient light are adjustable in the same condition which it is possible to adjust the backlight (in "NIGHT" mode only) via the left dimmer. In all other conditions, you can activate the ambient lighting only in mode "all turned on" (Parade), Before Starting Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and the fuel filler door, open the boot, turn the approach and courtesy lights on from a distance up to approximately 10 m (33 ft). The key fob RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. See “Illuminated Entry/Exit” in this section for further information. NOTE: Driving at speeds 8 km/h (5 mph) and above disables the system from responding to all key fobs RKE transmitter buttons. Unlock the Doors, Fuel Filler Door and Boot Press and release the unlock button on the key fob RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver's door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors, the fuel filler door and the boot lid. The turn signal lights will flash for the unlock signal recognition. The illuminated entry/exit system will also turn on. See “Passive Entry System” in this section for further information. Unlock Driver Door/All Doors with Remote Key 1st Press This feature allows you to program the system to unlock either the driver's door or all doors and the fuel filler door by the first press of the unlock button on the key fob RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls". Turn Headlights On with Key fob This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the key fob RKE transmitter. The duration can be set as desired. To change the current setting, see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls". 2 Unlatch the Boot Lid Press the button on the key fob RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the manual boot lid. If the vehicle is equipped with Power Boot Lid/Hands Free, besides unlocking the boot lid, the control will fully open it. See chapters "Passive Entry System" and "Open and Close the Boot Lid" in this section for further information. Lock/Unlock Doors Flash Lights This feature will cause the flash of the turn signal lights when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls". 25 Before Starting Requiring and Setting Additional Key fobs 2 In order to purchase additional key fob RKE transmitters you need to bring with you at the Maserati Service Network: • all key fobs RKE transmitters in your possession; • a personal ID; • the identification and registration documents proving ownership of the vehicle. Setting new key fobs RKE transmitters or re-setting the original ones may only be performed at the Maserati Service Network. NOTE: The codes of any key fob RKE transmitter that are not available when the new setting procedure is carried out will be deleted from the memory to prevent any lost or stolen key fob RKE transmitter being used to disarm the electronic alarm system. Key fob Battery Replacement NOTE: A low charge level of the key fob battery will be indicated on the instrument cluster display. 26 The recommended replaced battery type is a: CR2032. To replace the battery proceed as follows: • Remove the emergency key as indicated in "Keys" chapter of the current section. • Loosen the lateral screw that connects the two side covers with a torx T6 screwdriver. • Separate both parts of the key fob case. • Separate the two lateral covers from the key fob case. • Remove the card with PCB (Printed Circuit Board). Before Starting NOTE: Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean with alcohol. • Remove the battery from its seat and replace with a new recommended type of battery. • Match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. • Replace the printed circuit board by using the indicated pin for the sealing of the two covers. • Assemble the key fob case and reassemble the two lateral covers: a click will ensure the succeeded sealing. • Combine the disassembled parts with clamping screw and reassemble the emergency key. Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information ENVIRONMENTAL! Batteries contain dangerous materials that could harm the environment. Please dispose of them according to local regulations or at the Service Network. The “Regulatory Information” for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section "Services" on the website www.maserati.com. Remote Start System (for version/markets, where provided) This system enables the key fob RKE transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 91 m (300 ft). Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may reduce this range. 2 How to use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start: • System not disabled from previous remote start event. • Vehicle theft alarm not active. • Doors closed. • Hood closed. • Boot lid closed. • Hazard lights switched off. • Brake pedal not pressed by any passenger remained in the vehicle. • Battery at an acceptable charge level. • The shift lever is in P (Park) position. • The vehicle transmission is in automatic mode. • The remote start has not been activated yet two consecutive times. 27 Before Starting 2 If EPB (Electric Parking Brake) is not inserted, at key-off in some conditions the remote start system may not allow engine to start. We suggest to set "Auto Apply On" function through the switch on the right-side of the steering wheel (refer to "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instrument and Controls"). WARNING! • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odourless and colourless. • Keep key fobs RKE transmitter away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death. • "Remote Start Cancelled Time Expired". • "Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle to Reset". The message on the instrument cluster stays active as long as the ignition switch is in RUN position. To enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the button on the key fob RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, position lights will flash and the horn will ring twice (if set). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the "Remote Start" mode for a 15-minute cycle. 28 To exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle. NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable the one time press of the button for two seconds after receiving a valid "Remote Start" request. Engine Remote Start Abort Message on Instrument Cluster The following messages will display on the instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely: • "Remote Start Cancelled Door Open". • "Remote Start Cancelled Boot Open". • "Remote Start Cancelled Fuel Low". • The position lights will turn on and remain lit during "Remote Start" mode. • For security reasons, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the "Remote Start" mode. • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15-minute cycles) with the key fob RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. NOTE: • In case of an engine fault or low fuel level, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. To exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the button on the Before Starting key fob RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the vehicle security alarm. Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release the START/STOP button. NOTE: The message "Remote Start Active Push Start Button" will display in the instrument cluster until you push the START/STOP button. Auto-On Comfort with Remote Start The driver's heated and ventilated seat and the heated steering wheel (if foreseen) can be programmed to come on during a remote start. Refer to "Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start" function in chapter "MTC+ Setting", section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls", for further information. Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information The "Regulatory Information" for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section "Services" on the website www.maserati.com. Doors Locking WARNING! • For personal security and safety in • • • • the event of an accident, or robbery lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when parking and leave the vehicle unattended. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob RKE transmitter and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake trigger, brake pedal or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave ignition switch in the ACC or RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or start the engine and the vehicle. Doors Manual Lock To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward. 2 To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward. If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob RKE transmitter is not inside the vehicle before closing the door. 29 Before Starting Power Doors Locking/ Unlocking 2 A power door lock switch and a power door unlock switch are positioned on the front door trim panel. Use this switches to lock or unlock the doors. If the vehicle has been locked from inside with the above figured switches, the fuel filler flap remains unlocked. 30 If Power Boot Lid/Hands Free (option) has been left open, it will stay open when you press lock button , and the locking feature will only occur after the closing of the power boot lid. The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Passive Entry system. For further information, see “Passive Entry System” in this section. If you press the power door lock switch while the ignition switch is in the ACC or RUN position, and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the key fob RKE transmitter in the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks of the doors and fuel filler door to operate. If a door is open with the key fob RKE transmitter inside the cabin and the ignition is in the ACC or RUN position, a beep will draw the driver’s attention. Automatic Locking Doors The auto door lock feature default condition is disabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 24 km/h (15 mph). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by the user through MTC+ setting features (see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). Automatic Door Unlock on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if: • The automatic unlock doors on exit feature is enabled. • The transmission is in gear and the vehicle speed is 0 km/h. • The transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park). • The driver door is open. • The doors were not previously unlocked. • The vehicle speed is 0 km/h. Set Automatic Door Unlock on Exit To change the current setting, see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls". NOTE: Use the automatic unlock doors on exit feature in accordance with local regulations. Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children sitting in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a child-protection door lock system. Before Starting Engage or Disengage the Child-Protection Door Lock • Open the rear door. • Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the lock or unlock position. • Repeat the first two steps on the opposite rear door. WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child-protection locks are engaged (locked). NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the child-protection door lock system is engaged, manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll down the window, and open the door using the outside door handle. Soft Door Close System (if equipped) This system makes doors easier to shut without having to slam if you do not get it closed the first time. It increases the vehicle's safety and comfort, in particular for children in the back seat, it is not necessary to slam the door and it is also possible avoiding the risk of travelling with the door ajar and having to stop and close it. The system uses a sensor to detect the door ajar and an electric actuator to close it. The sensor detects your attempt to close the door and once the latch catches the handle the electric actuator pulls the door firmly bringing the door back in the fully closed position. During the soft closing phase operated by the system, it is possible to intervene manually by opening or closing the door. If you are pushing the door hard enough to close just like a regular one, the system still works, but only to check whether the door is properly closed. WARNING! • The system works properly if the ajar door has a gap , between exterior door panel surface and exterior bodyshell surface in the latch area , of max 6 mm (0.23 in). In the presence of higher gap, the system is not able to close the door with the risk of travelling with the door not completely closed or even open. 2 31 Before Starting Passive Entry System 2 The "Passive Entry" system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to press the key fob RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons. The "Passive Entry" system upon request can also be extended to the external opening handles of the rear doors. NOTE: • "Passive Entry" may be programmed to on/off; see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information. • If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining on the "Passive Entry" door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time. • Access to the vehicle using "Passive Entry" system may not work properly in case of interference caused by external sources such as metal objects, mobile phones, overhead power lines, antennas, etc. In these cases, use the buttons of the key fob RKE transmitter to open and close the vehicle or the emergency key, 32 inserting it into the driver side door lock. • The "Passive Entry" system does not lock and unlock the doors directly and immediately but with a slight delay (about 2 seconds). Unlock Door from the Driver Side With a valid key fob RKE transmitter within 1 m (3.3 ft) of the driver's door handle, grip the driver’s door external handle to unlock the door automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked. NOTE: If "1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks" is programmed all doors will unlock when you grip the front driver’s door handle. To select between "Driver Door" and “All Doors", see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls". Unlock Door from the Passenger Side With a valid key fob RKE transmitter within 1 m (3.3 ft) of the passenger door handle, grip the front passenger or rear (optional) external door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked. Before Starting NOTE: All doors will unlock when you grip the front passenger door handle or rear door handle (optional) regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference setting ("Driver Door" or "All Doors"). Preventing Inadvertent Locking of the Key fob RKE Transmitter inside the Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a key fob RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position. If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have been closed the system checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid key fobs RKE transmitter. If one of the vehicle's key fobs RKE transmitter is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid key fobs RKE transmitter are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry system automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn fourteen times (on the fifteenth attempt ALL doors will lock and the key fob RKE transmitter will be locked in the vehicle). This will happen even on vehicles equipped with Power Boot Lid/Hands Free pressing RH button on its right lower part to close and lock the boot lid. NOTE: The vehicle unlock the doors under any of the following conditions: • the doors are manually locked using the door lock knob positioned on the door panel; • there is a valid key fob RKE transmitter inside the vehicle; • there is a not valid key fob RKE transmitter outside the vehicle. 2 NOTE: The vehicle will not unlock the doors under any of the following conditions: • the doors are locked using the key fob RKE transmitter; • the doors are locked using the button on the “Passive Entry” door handles; • there is a valid key fob RKE transmitter outside the vehicle and within 1 m (3.3 ft) of either “Passive Entry” door handle; • fifteen attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and/or the RH button (on the vehicles equipped with Power Boot (Continued) 33 Before Starting (Continued) Lid/Hands Free) and then close the doors. 2 Optional equipment If the key fob RKE transmitter is inside the passenger compartment and one of the doors locked only to the first detent of lock pawl (hence it is not fully closed), when the vehicle lock function with alarm system for boot lid and doors is being activated by means of RH button at the bottom of the 34 boot lid, said function will be activated all the same. In this condition, any attempt to duly close the door that is partially open will cancel vehicle lock and alarm system arming thus leaving vehicle unlocked. Since when the doors are locked, the "Passive Entry" system waits for about 16 seconds before verifying if a key fob RKE transmitter is present inside the vehicle. • If during this time you press the RH button on right lower part of the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free to close the boot lid and activate the alarm, if a key fob RKE transmitter is left in the boot, the system will close the power boot lid and will activate the alarm system. This option is recommended when you want to leave the other key fob RKE transmitter inside the vehicle. • By pressing the same button after 16 seconds, if a key fob RKE transmitter is left in the boot, the power boot lid will close and will partially reopen. If the "Passive Entry" system detects no key fob RKE transmitter inside the boot, close the power boot lid and will activate the alarm system. Release the Lid and enter the Boot With a valid key fob RKE transmitter within 1 m (3.3 ft) of the manual boot lid, press the button on the lid between the license plate lights to release the lid and open it manually. The light inside the boot will turn on and will lit for 10 minutes. The light will immediately turn off if you lock the boot lid before 10 minutes. Before Starting NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle's key fob RKE transmitter in the boot and try to close the manual lid it will automatically unlatch, unless another one of the vehicle’s key fob RKE transmitters is outside the vehicle and within 1 m (3.3 ft) of the boot lid. For vehicles equipped with Power Boot lid/Hands Free: with the key fob within 1 m (3.3 ft) of the lid, press the button located between the licence plate lights, the power lid will automatically open until fully home; if the same button is not pressed again to stop it (for more information, see chapter “Open and Close the Boot Lid” in this section). If the vehicle had already been unlocked through key fob or "Passive Entry", the presence of the key fob is not required; simply use the button located between the licence plate lights to open the boot lid manually or automatically. NOTE: • After pressing the external door handle button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using this door handle. By pulling the external door handle, you can check if the car remains locked, without "Passive Entry" system reacting and unlocking the doors. • The "Passive Entry" system will not operate if the key fob RKE transmitter battery is dead. • If Power Boot Lid/Hands Free (if equipped) has been left open, it will stay open when you press the button on door external handle, and the locking feature will only occur after the closing of the power boot lid. 2 Optional equipment The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s inner door panel. Manual Door Lock from Outside With one of the vehicle’s key fobs RKE transmitter within 1 m (3.3 ft) of the driver or passenger front door handles, press the external door handle button to lock all four doors. 35 Before Starting Power Windows The window controls on the driver's door panel governs all the door windows. 2 Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information The "Regulatory Information" for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section "Services" on the website www.maserati.com. 36 There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the corresponding window. The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or RUN position. NOTE: • The power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time lapse can be set. See "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information. • Frequent activations of the power windows could result in a temporary lock of their starters. In this case, wait a moment before a new activation. WARNING! Improper use of the power windows and the sunroof (if equipped) can however be dangerous, even with the anti-pinch prevention system. Before and during activation of the power window, always check that the passengers are not exposed to the risk of injury both by the moving window and by personal objects that could be dragged or hit by it. Do not leave unattended children in a vehicle with a key fob RKE transmitter inside. When getting out the vehicle, always remove the key fob RKE transmitter to prevent the windows being Before Starting accidentally activated, posing a risk to passengers remaining onboard. Auto-Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an auto-down feature. Press the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go completely down automatically. To open the window part way, press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop. To stop the window from going all the way down during the auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. Auto-Up Feature with AntiPinch Protection Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go all the way up automatically. To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly. To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop. NOTE: • If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window. • Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually. • Frequent activations of the anti-pinch function could disable the autodown and auto-up function of the windows. In order to re-activate this function proceed with a reset cycle as described in the next paragraph. WARNING! There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the area before closing the window. Reset Auto-Up/Down Should the auto-up/down feature stop working, the window probably needs to be reset. To reset auto-up/down, pull the window switch up to close the window completely and push the window switch down to open the window completely. Open and Close the Windows and Sunroof with RKE Transmitter and Ignition Off 2 When the ignition switch in is OFF position, windows and sunroof (if equipped) can be opened or closed by pressing the buttons on the RKE transmitter. Opening: • press the button and release it; • press a second time the button and keep it pressed until complete opening of the windows and the sunroof, if they were closed. Closing: • press the button and release it; • press a second time the button and keep it pressed until complete closure of the windows and the sunroof, if they were open. Rear Window and Sunshade Lockout Button The window lockout button on the driver's door trim panel allows to disable the window and sunshade control on the rear doors and the rear window sunshade control at the rear of the central console, by pressing the 37 Before Starting window lockout button (setting it in the down position). 2 To enable the controls previously described, press the window lockout button again (setting it in the up position). Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure or a helicopter-type sound. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (for versions/markets, where provided) in open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting. 38 Power Sunshades on Rear Door Windows (if equipped) NOTE: • On vehicles provided with power sunshades on the rear windows, the window switches also operate the sunshades. • The rear windows lock button operates as well the rear power sunshades. • The window and sunshades controls will operate only if the ignition switch is in ACC or RUN position. Operation of the rear windows and related sunshades is done by pressing or pulling the window switch and depends on the position of the windows prior to the command operation. As described for the opening and closing functions of the power windows (see chapter “Power Windows” in this section), the windows switch has two functioning modes: press and release the switch to the first detent to partially move the window; press and release the switch to the second detent to move the window all the way up or down. Operations WARNING! Rear seat passengers must be careful when operating the sunshades, since there is the risk of being pinched between the top of the sunshade and the headlining, during raising, and between the top edge of the Before Starting sunshade and the door panel, during lowering. CAUTION! Before activating the sunshade, make sure that no objects can interfere with its travel. The following images and the subsequent text show the possible starting positions ("A", "B", "C" and "UP", "DOWN") and function of the window and the sunshade, to be independently activated by pressing or lifting the control switch to the first 1 or second 2 detent. 2 A. Sunshade fully unrolled ("UP" position) and Window closed ("UP" position) • Pulling the control up to 1 or 2 detent: no action ("NOP"). 1.1 Pressing the control to 1 detent: the sunshade rolls down completely and the window stays closed. 39 Before Starting 1.2 2 2.1 2.2 40 Pressing the control again to 1 detent: the window opens partially until the control is released and the sunshade stays down (pressing the control to 2 detent: the window opens completely). Pressing the control to 2 detent: the sunshade rolls down completely while the window stays closed. Pressing the control again to 2 detent: the window opens completely. B. Sunshade fully rolled down (“DOWN” position) and Window closed (“UP” position) C. Sunshade fully rolled down (“DOWN” position) and Window completely open (“DOWN” position) • Pulling the control up to 1 or 2 detent: the sunshade unrolls completely and the window stay closed. • Pressing the control to 1 or 2 detent: the window opens partially or completely and the sunshade remains rolled. • Pulling the control to 1 or 2 detent: the window closes partially or completely and the sunshade remains rolled. • Pressing the control to 1 or 2 detent: no action (“NOP”). Before Starting Teach-in Cycle After battery disconnection, the following teach-in cycle is required to store the limit positions the sunshades can reach in operation. Use the controls on the rear doors to move the sunshades. • With glass closed, lift rear sunshade control on driver side for a few seconds. It is not necessary that the sunshade reaches its upper limit. • Reverse the sunshade movement by pressing the control downwards. Once the lower limit is reached, press and hold the control for at least 10 seconds. This action allows setting the control unit in initialisation status. • Release the movement command. • Within maximum 15 seconds: - Press once the control downwards (first or second detent indifferently). In this way the control unit stores the lower limit position. During this operation a slight click of the sunshade motor that switches to mechanical lock condition can be heard. - Lift the control and hold it up until the sunshade completes its upstroke and reaches the car body pillar, fully home. Once the upper limit stop is reached, the sunshade will move downwards for approx. 2-3 millimetres (0.08-0.12 inches) and the control unit will store this height as upper limit. Now the teach-in of the driver side rear sunshade is complete. • Repeat the same operations for the passenger side rear sunshade to complete the teach-in procedure. Rear Window Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel. See "Air Conditioning Controls" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls". 2 Power Sunshade (for versions/markets, where provided) Your vehicle can be equipped with a power sunshade that will reduce the amount of sunlight that will enter through the rear window. The sunshade is rolled in and stored inside the cover behind the rear seats; when activated, it rolls out upwards. The power sunshade can be operated using the MTC+ System. • Touch the "Controls" soft-key. • Within 15 seconds, touch the "Rear Sunshade" soft-key to raise the power sunshade. • Within 15 seconds, touch the "Rear Sunshade" soft-key a second time to lower the sunshade. 41 Before Starting The trigger buttons of the rear sunshade are positioned at the rear of the central console. These buttons can be operated from the rear passengers. • Press the left button to fully raise the sunshade. • Press the right button to fully lower the sunshade. 2 Without ADAS "Comfort Luxury" rear seats NOTE: The rear sunshade controls, power windows switches together with the sunshades on the rear windows, can be locked by pressing the window lockout button on the driver side door panel. With ADAS If the sunshade is in the raised position and the transmission lever is positioned in R (Reverse), the sunshade will automatically fully lower. When the transmission lever is shifted out of R (Reverse) the sunshade will automatically return to the fully raised position after approximately five seconds. 42 On the vehicles equipped with the "Comfort Luxury" rear seats, the single button is located on the rear central console between the two rear seats. • Press the button to fully raise the sunshade. • Press the button a second time to fully lower the sunshade. Before Starting Open and Close the Boot Lid The manual boot lid can be unlocked from inside the vehicle by pressing the button on the front dome console. This command will fully open the Power boot lid/Hands Free (optional). Pressing this button in sequence, if the power boot lid stops in intermediate position, it resumes and reverse the stroke direction. NOTE: The shift lever must be in P (Park) before the button can operate. ledge, between the license plate lights under the following conditions: • When the car is unlocked , to open the boot lid it is not necessary to keep the RKE transmitter within 1 m (3ft) from the boot lid, with “Passive Entry” function enabled or disabled from the MTC+ menu. • When the car is locked , to open the boot lid: - if the "Passive Entry" function has been enabled from the MTC+ menu, it is necessary to keep the RKE transmitter within 1 m (3 ft) from the boot lid; - if the "Passive Entry" function has been disabled from the MTC+ menu, the boot lid does not open even with the RKE within 1 m (3 ft) from the boot lid. 2 When the button on the key fob is pressed twice within five seconds, the direction indicators flash twice to indicate the opening or closing of the boot lid, if the light flashing function at closing is activated on MTC+ (for more information, see the chapter "MTC+ Settings" in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). To close manually the boot lid use the handle as indicated beside the closing device. The boot lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the button on the key fob with RKE transmitter twice within five seconds or by using the external release button located on the lower side of the boot 43 Before Starting See "Passive Entry System" in this section for more information on boot lid operation with the Passive Entry feature. Power Boot Lid/Hands Free (if equipped) 2 With the ignition switch in RUN position, the red symbol will display on the instrument cluster. If the vehicle is in motion, in addition to the symbol will also appear a message indicating that the boot is open. Once the boot lid is closed both symbol and message will disappear from the display. With the ignition device in the OFF position, the boot lid open symbol and message will display until closure. 44 Automatic opening and closing movement of the boot lid is driven by electric actuators and a motorized latch ensuring lid locking upon closing. Boot lid can be opened using button on the key fob RKE transmitter and the button on the front dome console used also for non-power version. The button on key fob and button on front dome console not only allows user to completely open the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free, but also to stop it at any intermediate position by pressing the button again at anytime you wish to stop and resume the opening process. In addition to these commands, it is possible to open and close the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free by simply moving your foot under the rear bumper. In this latter case, the lid will be opened and closed only if the “Passive Entry” system acknowledges the presence of the key fob RKE transmitter within 1 m (3.3 ft) of the boot lid. Power Boot Lid/Hand Free uses the button in between the license plate lights, indicated in figure, to activate the opening once the car has been unlocked by the key fob or by the “Passive Entry” function. By pressing this button when the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free is closed you can open it completely or by pressing the button again stop the opening process, or by pressing the button again invert the movement and close it completely. When the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free is open, to move it there are two buttons positioned on its right lower part as indicated in figure. Before Starting When the power boot lid is completely open if you press and release the LH button , the power boot lid will be completely closed unless it is stopped; • if instead the power boot lid is in an intermediate position and you press and release the LH button during the closing or opening stroke, it will be stopped; • if instead the power boot lid is stopped in an intermediate position and you press and release the LH button , it will reverse its previous movement and it will be completely opened or closed unless it is stopped again. In any case, when you press the LH button , the doors will not be locked and the alarm system will not be armed. When the power boot lid is completely open if you press and release the RH button , the power boot lid will be completely closed unless it is stopped; • if instead the power boot lid is in an intermediate position and you press and release the RH button during the closing or opening stroke, it will be stopped; • if instead the power boot lid is stopped in an intermediate position and you press and release the RH button , it will reverse its previous movement and it will be completely opened or closed unless it is stopped again. In any case, when you press the RH button , the doors will not be locked and the alarm system will not be armed immediately, but only when the power boot lid will have reached the totally closed position as effect of every movement commands received from every other available inputs. NOTE: • The order of the functions shown does not represent the sequence in which they can be performed. • The buttons of the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free do not work if a gear is engaged or if the vehicle speed is higher than 0 km/h (0 mph). • The Power Boot Lid/Hands Free does not work with temperatures lower than −30°C (−22°F) or higher than 65°C (150°F). • If the opening buttons or the handle are operated while the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free is closing, the stroke of lid stops. Pressing another time the same command it reverses movement and fully open. • If the opening buttons or the handle are operated while the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free is opening, the motor of the lid is disabled to allow manual operation. • If the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free finds several obstacles during the same operating cycle, it will stop automatically and must be opened or closed manually. • If the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free is closing and a gear is engaged, the lid will continue closing. In this condition, it is possible that, during the closing stroke, it may find an obstacle and stop. 2 Since when the doors are locked, the "Passive Entry" system waits for about 16 seconds before verifying if a key fob RKE transmitter is present inside the vehicle. 45 Before Starting 2 • If during this time you press the RH button on right lower part of the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free to close the boot lid and activate the alarm, if a key fob RKE transmitter is left in the boot, the system will close the power boot lid and will activate the alarm system. This option is recommended when you want to leave the other key fob RKE transmitter inside the vehicle. • By pressing the same button after 16 seconds, if a key fob RKE transmitter is left in the boot, the power boot lid will close and will partially reopen. If the "Passive Entry" system detects no key fob RKE transmitter inside the boot, close the power boot lid and will activate the alarm system. Set the Position of Maximum Power Boot Lid/Hands Free Opening The maximum opening position of the power boot lid can be modified using the previously described buttons on its right lower side. 1. Activate the power boot lid and stop it in the new maximum opening position to be set, by pressing the LH button. 2. 46 Press the LH and RH buttons at the same time and keep them pressed for 3 seconds. 3. Release both buttons. Upon the following opening controls, the power boot lid will stop in the stored position. If you want to reset the maximum possible opening position of the power boot lid, proceed as described below starting from the previously set opening position. 1. Manually push the power boot lid to the maximum possible opening position. 2. Repeat the previously performed steps 2 and 3. Power Boot Lid/Hands Free Automatic Safe Movement Power Boot Lid/Hands Free safe opening and closing is ensured by a protection system able to stop its movement when an obstacle is detected along the path: when opening or closing, it stops automatically and then slightly moves back. After the closing command, when Power Boot Lid/Hands Free starts closing, all the indicators will blink to warn anyone within range. When Power Boot Lid/Hands Free edge reaches the car body, the motor locking the latch is activated automatically. If necessary, the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free can also be opened or closed manually. This operation could be required when the boot lid remains open for a long period of time. WARNING! • Activate Power Boot Lid/Hands Free only when vehicle is at a standstill. • Always pay utmost attention when opening and closing Power Boot Lid/Hands Free since the protection system might fail to respond and cause injury to anyone within range. • After the closing command, always make sure that Power Boot Lid/Hands Free is completely closed. CAUTION! • Under extreme weather conditions, boot lid seal could freeze and compromise Power Boot Lid/Hands Free automatic opening and closing. • Before opening Power Boot Lid/Hands Free, make sure that no objects or snow are set on boot lid or might jam or prevent its opening. Hands Free Power Boot Release and Closing This mode is controlled by the Passive Entry system (see paragraph “Passive Before Starting Entry System” in this section), which automatically releases and closes the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free when you place your foot in the area under the rear bumper. The system will only operate if the system acknowledges the presence of the key fob RKE transmitter within 1 m (3.3 ft) of the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free. The range of the sensors that detect your foot movement extends along and underneath the central portion of the rear bumper. To activate the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free, stand behind the vehicle, near the boot lid, and move your foot under the bumper as if to kick something. Do not place your foot too close to the bumper or touch the underbody. WARNING! • Pay careful attention to the exhaust tailpipes as they can reach high temperatures and, in case of contact, they can cause severe burns. • When it is not necessary to open the power boot lid with the "Hands free" mode, make sure the key fob results outside the range of use (1 m/3.3 ft). Otherwise, the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free can be opened accidentally by an unintentional movement of the foot. In order for the sensors to detect your foot movement, move your foot towards the vehicle rather than sideways and immediately pull it back: from this moment, the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free will activate within two seconds. If closed, with the foot movement the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free will: • unlock and completely open; • after another kick, will stop; • after another kick, will reverse its movement and completely close unless stopped again. If open, with the foot movement the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free will: • completely close but does not lock; • another kick before the completed closing can stop the movement; • if the movement was stopped another kick operation will invert a complete opening. NOTE: • If your foot movement fails to activate the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free movement, wiggling your foot under the bumper will not help. Repeat the whole kick movement. • In particular situations, external factors affecting the sensor area may trigger the "Hands free" power boot release feature. For example, when washing the vehicle, a water jet aimed at the sensor area may trigger the "Hands free" power boot release feature. Keep the key fob RKE transmitter away from the sensing range of the sensors (3 m/10 ft) or disable the “Hand free” feature from the MTC+ menu (see “MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). A key fob RKE transmitter located in the front seat passenger area is considered out of range of the “Hands free” boot release sensor. • If somebody or something knocks against the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free while it is moving, the safety (Continued) 2 47 Before Starting (Continued) system might stop lid opening or closing movement. Boot Lid Emergency Release 2 48 To access the boot compartment from the rear seats, operate the emergency release lever pulling tab between the seatback and the bolster in order to lower the rear seat backrest (see "Cargo Area" in section “Understanding the Vehicle”). Release the boot lid from inside by pulling on the phosphorescent handle (see the chapter “Boot Safety” in this section). If the power release control operated by the key fob RKE transmitter or by pressing the button on the dome console fails, the vehicle battery could be in a low condition or disconnected. If the doors are still locked, use the emergency mechanical key inserted in the driver’s door lock to enter the vehicle and open the hood. In this condition, it is possible to temporarily power the system by using the battery remote poles located inside the engine compartment (see “Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure” in section “In an Emergency”). Then it is possible to normally open the boot lid by using the key fob RKE transmitter or the button on the dome console. Have the vehicle subsequently serviced by a Service Network centre in order to solve the failure. Boot Safety WARNING! Do not allow children to have access to the boot compartment. Always close the boot lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in the boot compartment, young children may not be able to escape. If trapped in the boot, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke. Boot Lid Emergency Release from inside the Boot Compartment As a security measure, an internal emergency release lever is built onto the boot lid latching mechanism. In the event of a person trapped inside, the boot lid can be simply opened by pulling on the phosphorescent handle shown in figures. Before Starting Open and Close the Hood Opening Two latches must be released to open the lid. • From inside the vehicle, pull the hood release lever located under the left lower side of the dashboard. With Power Boot Lid/Hands Free Option • Move to the outside and stand in front of the vehicle front grille. • Slightly lift the hood and push the safety catch as indicated by the arrow. The safety catch is located in the center of the lid. 2 • Lift the hood completely: this operation is facilitated by two gas struts keeping the fully open position. With the ignition switch in RUN position, the red symbol will display on the instrument cluster with the message indicating that the hood is open. Closing Lower the hood and then drop it. This should secure the inclusion of both latches. 49 Before Starting CAUTION! To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. 2 WARNING! • Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the lid is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death • Gear shifting is always active and may be performed even when one or more doors, the hood or the boot lid are open. Therefore, in these conditions, take great care to avoid moving the gearshift lever and so accidentally engage gears. 50 Occupants Restraint Systems The listed occupants restraint systems are some of the most important safety features in your vehicle: • Three-point seat belts (also called lap shoulder belts) for the driver and all passengers. • Advanced front air bags for driver and passenger. • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a window. • Supplemental seat-mounted side air bags. • An energy-absorbing steering column and steering wheel. • Front and rear outer seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing the energy created during an impact. • Front passenger, for versions/markets where provided, and rear passengers seat belts include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR), which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat. To carry children up to 12 years old or under 1.5 m (5 ft) in height, you must use adequate child restrain system that can be fixed with the three point seat belts or the Isofix anchorages. NOTE: The advanced front air bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision. Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. WARNING! In an accident, all occupants can suffer much greater injuries if not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other occupants or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen far Before Starting away from home or on your own street. WARNING! Statistics report that seat belts save lives and reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. • It is forbidden and dangerous to Three-Point Seat Belts • All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with combination lap shoulder belts. The belt retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions, conforming perfectly to the body of the occupants. However, in an accident, the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out. The driver is responsible for respecting, and ensuring that all the other occupants of the car also observe the local regulations concerning the use of seat belts. Always fasten the seat belts before starting the vehicle. • • • • travel in a cargo area. In an accident, people travelling in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow any person to travel in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure all passengers are in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Wearing a seat belt improperly is dangerous. Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body. These are the strongest parts of your body and can best absorb the impact of an accident. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in an accident much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in an accident, hurting one another severely. Never use a lap/shoulder belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. • Remember that, in the event of an accident, the rear seat passengers not wearing the seat belts are not only subject to personal injuries but also represent a serious danger for the front seat occupants. 2 Three-Point Seat Belts Use Instructions • Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. • The seat belt latch plate is on rear door pillar, above the seat on the external side. • Hold the latch plate and pull the belt across you, make the belt go around your body and when the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click". 51 Before Starting WARNING! • A belt that is buckled up into the 2 wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion of the belt could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle up your belt into the corresponding buckle. • A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt comfortably. • A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can also cause internal injuries. Ribs are not as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the impact of a collision. • The lower part must adhere to the pelvis rather than the abdomen of the occupant. To fasten the lap belt pull slightly up the diagonal portion of the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if too tight, tilt the latch 52 plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident. position. If necessary, guide the seat belt with your hand while it is rewinding, to prevent it from twisting. WARNING! • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in an accident. The belt forces will not impact on the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it comfortable. • A twisted belt will not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to a Service Center immediately. • Do not use devices (clips, fastenings etc.) that prevent the seat belts from laying close to the occupants bodies. • Do not carry children on a passenger’s lap using only one seat belt for protecting both. • Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt. • To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its stowed WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could break in an accident and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt/retractor assemblies must be replaced by the Service Network after an accident if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn belt, etc.). Three-Point Seat Belt Height Adjustment WARNING! The seat belts height must only be adjusted when the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger seating positions. Adjust the guide so the shoulder portion of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it. The belt Before Starting should be close to, but not contacting, the neck. Push the indicated button above the shoulder belt guide to release the anchorage, then move the belt slider up or down to the position that fits you best. WARNING! After the adjustment, always check that the slider to which the oscillating ring is fixed, is locked into one of the positions provided. With the handgrip released, push again downward to allow the anchoring device to click into place, in the event that it has not been released in one of the positions provided. When you release the anchorage try to move the belt slider up and down to make sure that it is locked in position. Three-Point Seat Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted three point belt. • Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. • At about 15 to 30 cm (0.5 to 1 ft) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. • Slide the latch plate upward over the folded belt. The folded belt must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. • Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded belt. Passengers Seat Belts Front passenger, for versions/markets where provided, and rear passengers seat belts are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) and can be used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, see “Installing Child Restraint Systems using the Vehicle Seat Belt equipped with ALR” under "Child Restraint Systems" in this section. If the passenger seat position should not be used to accomodate a child restraint system, only pull the belt out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. In this case, allow the belt to retract completely and then carefully pull out only the amount of belt necessary to comfortably wrap around the seat occupant. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click". 2 WARNING! • Remember that, in the event of a violent impact, the passengers on the rear seats that are not wearing the seat belts are not only subject to personal injury but they also represent a danger for passengers sitting in the front seats. • Always fasten the seat belts. • Travelling without the seat belts fastened significantly increases the risk of serious injury in the event of a collision, even with the air bags. • In the event of a collision, the seat belts help reduce the possibility of the vehicle’s occupants being thrown against the structures of the 53 Before Starting 2 passenger compartment or out of the vehicle. • The air bags are designed to work together with the seat belts, not to substitute them. The front air bags only deploy in the event of certain head-on collisions of sufficient intensity. They may not be activated if the vehicle rolls over, or in the event of rear bumps or minor frontal collisions, or non-frontal collisions. Using Seat Belt in Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) Use the seat belt automatic locking mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature. Children up to 12 years old or under 1.5 m (5 ft) in height, should be properly buckled up in a child restraint system. Automatic Locking Mode Setting • Buckle the lap and shoulder belt. • Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted. • Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode. 54 Automatic Locking Mode Unsetting Unbuckle the three point seat belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle emergency locking mode. WARNING! • The belt and retractor assembly must be checked by the Service Network and must be replaced if the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly. • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Seat Belt Pretensioners The car is equipped with front and rear outer seat belt pretensioners, that reduce slack in the belts in the event of a severe frontal impact. This guarantees the perfect adherence of the seat belts to the occupants bodies before the restraining action begins. This car is also equipped with a second pretensioner in the front kick plate area. Its activation is signalled by the shortening of the metal cable and from its protective sheath curled. Pretensioners work for all size occupant restraint systems, including the child restraint systems. NOTE: To obtain the highest degree of protection from the action of the pretensioning device, wear the seat belt tight to the chest and pelvis. Pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). A pretensioner may be used only once because it is a pyrotechnic device. Pretensioners do not require any maintenance or lubrication: any changes to its original conditions will invalidate its efficiency. If, due to unusual natural events (floods, sea storms, etc.), the device has been affected by water and mud, it must be replaced. Before Starting WARNING! It is strictly forbidden to remove or tamper with the pretensioner components. Any intervention must be carried out only by qualified and authorized personnel. Always contact the Service Network. CAUTION! Operations which lead to impacts, vibrations or localized heating (over 100°C/212°F for a maximum of 6 hours max.) in the area around the pretensioners may damage or deploy them erroneously. These devices are not affected by vibrations caused by uneven road surfaces or low obstacles. Contact the Service Network for any intervention that may be required. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®) BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. The feature activates whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted, the seat belt reminder light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened. The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 8 km/h (5 mph) for more than 19 seconds, by blinking the seat belt reminder light and by sounding an intermittent chime. Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire duration. After the sequence completes, the seat belt reminder light remain illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened. If the opened front door on the driver or passenger side is closed and the occupant presence sensor detects a status change from occupant not present to occupant present the system will repeat the warning sequence. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is unbuckled while travelling at speeds greater than 8 km/h (5 mph), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual notification on the instrument cluster. The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when the front passenger seat is not occupied. BeltAlert® may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat. It is recommended to restrain pets in the rear seat, in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and properly stow cargo. 2 Seat Belts and Pregnant Women Seat belts should also be worn by pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is greatly reduced for them and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. The best way to protect the foetus is to protect the mother. Pregnant women must position the lower part of the belt very low down so that it passes over the pelvis and under the abdomen (see figure). 55 Before Starting Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags 2 When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that baby will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. WARNING! Pregnant women must scrupulously observe the above indications, as well as local regulation concerning the use of seat belts. This vehicle has advanced front air bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver's advanced front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel in the area shown in the picture. On this area is embossed the word "SRS AIRBAG" for easier recognition. The passenger's advanced front air bag is mounted in the dashboard, above the glove compartment in the area shown in the picture. NOTE: These air bags are certified to regulations for advanced air bags. the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle sensor that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle sensor may adjust the inflation rate of the advanced front air bags. This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the heads of front and rear outer occupants. The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled “AIR bag”. This vehicle is also equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) for driver and passenger pelvis-chest-shoulder protection during a side impact. The Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags are mounted on front seats and are located in the outboard side of the front seats. NOTE: After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to the Service Network immediately. The advanced front air bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows 56 Before Starting Air bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components: • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC); • Air bag warning light on the instrument cluster; • Steering wheel and column; • Instrument cluster; • Driver advanced front air bag; • Passenger advanced front air bag; • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB); • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC); • Front and side impact sensors; • Front and rear outer seat belt pretensioners and seat belt buckle switch; • Pyrotechnical charge to cut power from the battery; it is located on the positive battery terminal. Advanced Front Air bags Properties The advanced front air bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors. The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. CAUTION! • The electronic control unit provides for the activation of the pretensioners, front air bags or side air bags (front and rear) based on different criteria, according to the type of impact. Failure of one or more systems to activate is not indicative of a system malfunction. • The front and/or lateral air bags may inflate if the vehicle suffers a violent impact involving the underbody area, for example in case of violent impacts against steps, sidewalks, speed bumps, or when the vehicle falls into potholes, or similar. WARNING! • EXTREME HAZARD! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it! Deployment of the air bag in an accident could cause fatal injuries to the baby regardless of the severity of the collision. Therefore, always release the passenger air bag when a rearward facing child restraint is installed on the passenger front seat. The front passenger seat must also be positioned back as far as possible in order to avoid the child restraint from coming into contact with the dashboard. Immediately reactivate the passenger air bag as soon as the child restraint system has been removed. • Never put objects (e.g. mobile phones, toys, folders, tablets, etc..) on the passenger side of the dashboard since they could interfere with correct inflation of the passenger air bag and also cause serious injury to the occupants. • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. • Always drive with your hands on the steering wheel rim, so that the air bag can inflate freely if required. 2 57 Before Starting 2 During the drive your back must be as upright as comfort allows and be against the seat back with the seat belt properly fastened. • Do not apply stickers or other objects on the steering wheel, on the dashboard in the passenger’s side air bag area, on roof side trims or on the seats. • Do not travel with objects in your lap, in front of your chest or especially with a pipe, pencil or other objects in your mouth. In the event of a collision, the intervention of the air bag could result in serious injury. Passenger seat’s front air bag and child restraint systems Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air bag activated. Deployment of the air bag in an accident could cause fatal injuries to the infant regardless of the severity of the collision. NOTE: ALWAYS refer to the instructions written on the label located on the passenger side sunshade and behind it. 58 Before Starting 2 59 Before Starting Supplemental Air bags 2 Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) protect the pelvis, chest and shoulder area of the occupants in the event of a side impact of medium/high severity. The SAB is marked with an “AIR bag” label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats. in the event of a side impact, thanks to the wide cushion inflation surface. Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side. WARNING! • Side air bags also need room to When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat's trim cover. Each air bag deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) SABIC air bags are designed to protect the head of front and rear occupants 60 inflate. Do not rest your head, arms or elbows on the door, windows or the area in which the window bag is located to avoid possible injury during air bag inflation. Sit upright in the center of the seat. • Do not cover the front seatbacks with clothes or covers. Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could cause serious injury. • Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. Air bag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or side air bags in a frontal or side collision or rollover event is required. Based on the impact sensor's signals, a central electronic ORC deploys the advanced front air bags, SABIC and SAB air bags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on the severity and type of impact. On top of what previously described, the characteristics of the collision registered by the sensors and sent to the control unit of the ORC can also cause a sudden cut of the power from the battery, “blowing” the pyrotechnical charge located on the positive battery terminal. CAUTION! After a collision that has caused the blowing up of the pyrotechnical charge, this must be replaced at a Service Network. Advanced front air bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain Before Starting frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision. Advanced front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The advanced front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including those that may produce substantial vehicle damage, for example, some pole collisions, truck under rides, and corner impacts. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, advanced front air bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage merely are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all accidents, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position, in the ACC position, or not active, the air bag system is not activated and the air bags will not inflate. The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery has low power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. When starting the vehicle, ORC turns on the air bag warning light on the instrument cluster for approximately 4 to 8 seconds for a test. After the test, the air bag warning light will turn off. If the ORC, during the diagnosis phase detects a malfunction that could affect the air bag system, it turns on the air bag warning light and the “Service Airbag System” message either momentarily or continuously. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. A beep will sound if the light illuminates again after initial startup. 2 The air bag warning light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components. WARNING! • The air bags may also be deployed when the car is not moving, if the ignition device is in RUN position and the engine is off, if the car is hit by another moving vehicle. Therefore, even if the car is stationary, when an active passenger air bag is fitted, DO NOT install on the passenger seat child restraint systems to be fitted rearward facing on the front seat. Deployment of the air bag following an impact could cause fatal injuries to the child. Therefore, always deactivate the passenger air bag (see “Passenger’s Air bag 61 Before Starting 2 Deactivation” in this section) when a rearward facing child restraint is installed on the passenger front seat. The front passenger seat must also be positioned back as far as possible in order to avoid the child restraint from coming into contact with the dashboard. Immediately reactivate the passenger air bag as soon as the child restraint system has been removed. Also remember that, if the ignition device is in OFF, ACC position or off, none of the safety devices (air bags or pretensioners) will be deployed in the event of collision. Non-deployment of these devices does not indicate a system malfunction. • Ignoring the air bag warning light and message in your instrument cluster could mean you won't have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the engine, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized Maserati Service Center service the air bag system immediately. Front Air bag Inflator Units When the ORC detects a collision requiring the advanced front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large 62 quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the advanced front air bags. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the dashboard separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The advanced front air bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Inflator Units The ORC unit determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of collision. Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas. The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This especially applies to children. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle. A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the head/s of the occupant/s seating in the outside seats from the edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The air bag inflates with enough force to possibly injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates. This especially applies to children. The SABICs may also help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover events (because equipped with rollover sensing). Before Starting Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events. Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if the communication network and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether the enhanced accident response system will have to perform the following functions: • cut off fuel to the engine; • turn hazard lights and interior lights on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned off; • unlock the doors automatically; • disconnect the battery with a pyrotechnic charge. Air bag Deployment Result The advanced front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment. If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur: • The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately. • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning. Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you. ENVIRONMENTAL! Air bag inflation releases a small amount of powder. This powder is not harmful for the environment. 2 WARNING! • Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by a Maserati Service Center. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well. • Have the air bag checked, serviced and replaced only by the Service Network. Air bag System Maintenance WARNING! • Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it; thus you could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle 63 Before Starting • 2 • • • 64 body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system without the necessary know-how. Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to the Service Network for any air bag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to the Service Network. Only Maserati manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact the Maserati Service Network. If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses. To identify the air bag fuse see “Fuse Replacement” in section “Maintenance and Care”. See a Service Network if the fuse is efficient. Passenger’s Air bag Deactivation (if equipped) If you have to carry a child on the front passenger seat, always deactivate the air bag on the passenger’s side before installing a rearward-facing child seat. To deactivate the air bag, open the menu "Vehicle Settings" and skip to "Passenger Airbag" (see "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). The passenger air bag is normally activated (On). With the switch pressed in the arrow direction select option "Off" and confirm by pressing the switch ( ). Confirm the selection by pressing the switch ( ): a confirmation box will prompt user to select "Yes" or "No". Select "No" to go back to previous selection screen. Select "Yes" to confirm deactivation: the symbol will display for 2 seconds with the corresponding message. The air bag light will illuminate on the instrument cluster display and on the front overhead console. Before Starting WARNING! We recommend you to always fit any child seats on the rear seat, as this is the safest position in the event of a collision. When the passenger side air bag is deactivated the passenger seated on the front seat will not have the additional protection of the air bag in the event of a collision. Only deactivate the air bag when you are carrying a person considered at risk, and always reactivate it at the end of transportation. 2 Transport of persons with disability The display will then return to the "Vehicle Settings" menu. In order to activate the passenger air bag follow the same procedure by selecting "On" option on menu. If it is necessary to modify the advanced air bag system of your vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Maserati Service Network. CAUTION! Should the warning light (passenger’s air bag off) on the air conditioning instrument cluster malfunction, its failure will be shown on the display. Deactivation of the front passenger air bag does not deactivate the other air bags and the seat belt. WARNING! • The advanced air bag system of your vehicle is not designed to protect adults with disabilities that require deactivation of the passenger or driver air bag. • If you or another occupant is an adult with a medical condition that 65 Before Starting 2 requires air bag deactivation, please contact the Service Network. • As long as the air bag is activated, persons with disabilities are advised not to travel in the front seat in order to avoid the risk of serious injuries or death, even in minor crashes. Child Restraint Systems Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time, including babies and children. This prescription is compulsory in all EC countries according to EC Directive 2003/20/EC. Children up to 12 years old or under 1.5 m (5 ft) in height, must be properly buckled up in a child restraint system. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. NOTE: All states have legislation governing how and where children should be carried in a vehicle. Please check the regulations existing in your state. WARNING! • EXTREME HAZARD! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it! Deployment of the air bag in an accident could cause fatal injuries to the baby regardless of the severity of the collision. • If the passenger's air bag is deactivated always check the warning light on the dashboard, near the hazard light switch, to 66 make sure that it has actually been deactivated. • Never carry children on your lap, not even newborns. No one can restrain a child in the event of an accident. • Every child has to use one child restraint system; never carry two children using only one child seat. • In case of accident, replace the child seat with a new one. The choice of the most suitable child restraint system depends on the weight of the child. There are different types of child restraint systems. Always refer to the manual provided with child seat to ensure it is the proper type according the travelling child. In Europe the child restraint systems prescriptions are defined by European Standard ECE-R44. Child restraint systems are classified into five weight groups: • Group 0: up to 10 kg (up to 22 lb) weight; • Group 0 +: up to 13 kg (up to 29 lb) weight; • Group 1: 9 - 18 kg (20 - 40 lb) weight; • Group 2: 15 - 25 kg (33 - 55 lb) weight; • Group 3: 22 - 36 kg (49 - 79 lb) weight. Before Starting NOTE: Regardless of the type of child restraint, always check that the seat belt is well fastened by pulling on it. All restraint devices must bear the approval data, with the control mark on a label firmly secured to the child seat which must never be removed. Over 1.5 m (5 ft) in height, from the point of view of restraint systems, children are considered as adults and wear the seat belts normally. 2 Group 0 and 0+ Child Restraint Systems Babies up to 13 kg (29 lb) must be carried with rearward-facing seats, which, supporting the head, does not induce stress on the neck in the event of sharp decelerations. These child restraint systems are fixed to the car by the three point seat belt or by the Isofix anchorages. Check "Installing Child Restraint Systems using the Vehicle Seat Belt equipped with ALR" or "Isofix Universal Child Restraint System" in this chapter for further information. NOTE: For Group 0/0+ Semi Universal Isofix child restraint system are available, always check the manual to ensure the car seat is approved for your specific vehicle. WARNING! Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air bag activated. An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position. Group 1 Child Restraint Systems Children with weight between 9 kg to 18 kg (20 lb to 40 lb) may use forward facing seats. These child restraint systems are fixed to the car by the three point seat belt or by the Isofix anchorages. Check "Installing Child Restraint Systems using the Vehicle Seat Belt equipped with ALR" or "Isofix Universal Child Restraint System" in this chapter for further information. Group 2 Child Restraint Systems Children from 15 kg to 25 kg (33 lb to 55 lb) may use the car seat belts directly. These child restraint systems are fixed to the car by the by the three point seat belt or by the Isofix anchorages. Refer to "Installing Child Restraint Systems using the Vehicle Seat Belt equipped with ALR" or "Isofix Universal Child Restraint System" in this chapter for further information. This type of child seats is featured to position the child correctly towards the belts so that the diagonal section crosses the child’s chest and not its 67 Before Starting neck, and the lower part is snug on the pelvis not the abdomen. Always check that the seat belts do not restrain the child's throat. 2 Group 3 Child Restraint Systems For children with weight between 22 kg to 36 kg (49 lb to 79 lb) devices are available to position the seat belt correctly. • Make sure that the child is upright in the seat. • The lap portion must adhere to the pelvis and as snug as possible. • Check belt fit periodically. A child's squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. • Always check that the seat belts do not restrain the child's throat. 68 • Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. Over 1.50 m (5 ft) in height children can wear seat belts like adults. WARNING! Improper installation lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing a child restraint system. Some Tips on getting the most out of your Child Restraint • Before buying any child restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. Maserati recommends that you make sure that you can install the child restraint system in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it. • The child restraint systems choice must be appropriate for your child's weight. • Carefully follow the instructions that come with the child restraint system. If you install the child restraint system improperly, it may not work when you need it. • Fit the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer's directions. WARNING! When your child restraint system is not used, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. Before Starting Suitability of the Passenger Seats for using Universal Child Seats The vehicle complies with the new European Directive 2003/20/CE that governs the installation of child seats on the different vehicle seats, according to the following table: Group Weight Groups Front passenger seat Outer rear seats Centre rear seat (°) Up to 13 kg (29 lb) U (*) U U 1 9 – 18 kg (20 – 40 lb) U (*) U U 2 15 – 25 kg (33 – 55 lb) U (*) U U 3 22 – 36 kg (49 – 79 lb) U (*) U U 0, 0+ 2 Table key U = Suitable for "Universal" restraint systems as provided for by the European Regulation EEC-R44 pertaining to the indicated "Groups". (*) = The seat needs to be adjusted. (°) = Not available on vehicles equipped with the “Comfort Luxury” rear seats. 69 Before Starting 2 70 Summary of Children Safety Transporting Regulations: Children up to 12 years old or under 1.5 m (5ft.) may only travel if secured, using adequate child restraint systems. We recommend to always fit any child restraint system on the rear seat, as this is the safest position in the event of a collision. If the vehicle is equipped with active passenger air bags, do not place a rearward-facing infant seats on front seat. When deactivating the passenger-side air bag, always check the illumination of the warning light centrally on the dashboard, indicating the air bag has been deactivated (see “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air bags” in this section). Strictly follow the instructions which the manufacturer is obliged to provide with the child restraint system. Keep the instructions in the vehicle together with the documents and this owner’s manual. Do not use a child restraint system which does not comprehend any instructions for use. Installing Child Restraint Systems using the Vehicle Seat Belt equipped with ALR Front passenger, for versions/markets where provided, and rear passengers seat belts are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to secure child protection through a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint seat avoiding to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if the entire belt is pulled out of the retractor in order to enable the belt retracting subsequently. For additional information on ALR, see “Using Seat Belt in Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR)” in “Occupants Restraint Systems” in this section. To install a Child Restraint System with ALR, pull enough of the belt out of the retractor leading it through the belt path of the protection device. Slide the latch into the buckle until it clicks. Remove then the entire safety belt from the retractor in order to rewound. While rewinding a click will indicate the safety belt is now in Automatic Locking mode. Exert then a traction on the exceeded lap section of the belt in order to tighten it around the child restraint seat. All seat belts will loosen over time, it is therefore necessary to check them periodically and set them properly. Isofix Universal Child Restraint System Your vehicle's rear seats are all equipped with Isofix anchorages. The Isofix Universal system allows the child restraint systems to be fixed without using the vehicle's seat belts, instead fixing the child restraint system to the vehicle structure, using lower anchorages A and upper tether strap B. Before Starting NOTE: Remember that when using a Isofix Universal child seat, you can only use approved child seats with the marking ECE R44 "Isofix Universal" (03 release or post) (see the example in the figure). Isofix Universal child restraint systems are now available. You should never install Isofix Universal child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage. If your child restraints are not Isofix Universal, install the restraints using the vehicle's seat belts. Installing an Isofix Universal Child Restraint System Follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions provided with the child restraint system. The lower Isofix anchorages are "U" metal rings located on the rear seat where the cushion meets the seatback and are located just below the symbol shown in the picture, but are not visible. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces. In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seat. The anchorages are located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window and are under a plastic cover (indicated in the figure) with the anchorage symbol on it. 2 To fix an Isofix Universal Child seat for weight group 1 proceed as follows. • Secure the child seat to the "U" lower metal rings positioned on the rear seat. Proceed to secure the upper belt, also called Top Tether (provided with the child seat), to the attachments located behind the headrest. • Lift the plastic cover fitted behind the seat where you want to install the child restraint system. 71 Before Starting 2 • Tighten upper strap until you reach the tension level recommended by the restraint system manufacturer. For center seating position route the seat belt over the seatback and adjustable headrest (with the headrest in the full up position) then attach the hook to the anchor located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window. 72 and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. • Route the seat belt to provide the most direct path between the anchorage and the child restraint system passing it over the headrest. • Attach the hook of the top tether strap (provided with the child restraint system) to the anchor. NOTE: • The other weight groups are covered by specific Isofix child seats, which can be used only if specifically tested for this car (see list of cars provided with the child seat). • For any further details on installation and/or use, refer to the instructions provided with the child seat. WARNING! • Fit the child seat when the car is stationary. The child seat is correctly fixed to the anchorages when hearing a click. Follow the instructions for assembly, disassembly and positioning that the manufacturer must supply with the child restraint system. • An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion NOTE: • Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. • When using an Isofix child restraint system, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. WARNING! Improper installation of a child restraint system to the Isofix anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint system. Before Starting WARNING! Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. 2 73 Before Starting Vehicle Isofix Positions Chart on Passenger Seats Mass Group 2 Size Class Fixture Outer rear seats 3 seats version Carrycot F ISO/L1 2 seats version X Centre rear seat (°) X G ISO/L2 X X 0 – up to 10 kg (22 lb) E ISO/R1 IL IL 0+ – up to 13 kg (29 lb) E ISO/R1 IL IL D ISO/R2 IL IL 1 – 9 to 18 kg (20 to 40 lb) C ISO/R3 D ISO/R2 C ISO/R3 IL X IL IL IL IL X IL B ISO/F2 IUF IUF B1 ISO/F2X IUF IUF A ISO/F3 IUF IUF Table key IUF = Suitable for Isofix forward child restraint systems of “Universal” category approved for use in the mass group. IL = Suitable for Isofix forward child restraint systems of “Semi Universal” category approved for use in the mass group. X = Isofix position not suitable for Isofix child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class. (°) = Not available on vehicles equipped with the “Comfort Luxury” rear seats. Maserati Recommended Child Restraint Systems for this Vehicle "Maserati Genuine Accessories" make available a complete range of child restraint systems that can be fixed using the vehicle seat belts or through the Isofix anchorages. The Maserati Service Network can provide you with any information about the Maserati approved Child Seats, available in the "Genuine Accessories" range. 74 Before Starting NOTE: Please check the availability of the Child Seats for your Country. 2 Group: 0+ (Up to 13 kg / 29 lb) Maserati Peg Pérego Primo viaggio SL Maserati Peg Pérego Isofix K Base Maserati Peg Pérego Primo viaggio SL Isofix/Semi-Universal child seat. This seat can only be installed in rear-facing position using the related Isofix basement (to be purchased separately) and the Isofix anchorages. Maserati recommends this seat for this weight group. Universal child seat. This seat can only be installed in rear-facing position using the vehicle seat belts (it can also be used together with the “Maserati Peg Pérego Pushchair”). Maserati Peg Pérego Viaggio 1 Duo-Fix Maserati Peg Pérego Viaggio 1 Duo-Fix Group: 1 (9 – 18 kg / 20 – 40 lb) Maserati Peg Pérego Isofix K Base 75 Before Starting Group: 1 (9 – 18 kg / 20 – 40 lb) Isofix child seat. To be installed in forward-facing position using the related basement Isofix K (to be purchased separately) and the Isofix anchorages. Universal child seat. To be installed in forwardfacing position using the vehicle seat belts. 2 Group: 2, 3 (15 – 36 kg / 33 – 79 lb) Maserati Peg Pérego Viaggio 2-3 Surefix This seat can only be installed in forward-facing position using the vehicle seat belts and, optionally, the Isofix anchorages. 76 Before Starting WARNING! Maserati recommends to install the child seat according to the manufacturer's directions that must be supplied with it. Important Safety Notice for Transporting Children • Install the child seat on the rear seat as this is the safest position in case of collisions. • Use the seat in the rear-facing position as long as possible, if possible until the child is 3-4 years old. • When deactivating the front passenger air bag, make sure that the light stays on on the air conditioning controls dashboard to indicate the correct deactivation. • Keep the instructions in the vehicle together with the documents and this owner’s manual. Do not use a child restraint system which does not comprehend any instructions for use. • Every child has to use one child restraint system; never carry two children using only one child seat. • If using the vehicle seat belt, always check that the belt do not restrain the child's throat. • Firmly pull the seat belt to check that it is correclty buckled. • Never allow a child to seat improperly or to unbuckle the seat belt while driving. • Never allow a child to wear the shoulder portion of the belt under the arms or behind the back. • Never carry children on your lap, not even newborns. No one can restrain a child in the event of an accident. • In case of accident, replace the child seat with a new one. Transporting Pets Air bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by vehicle seat belts. 2 77 Before Starting Park Assist 2 78 The Park Assist (also called "ParkSense") system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or front bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking manoeuvre. Besides the use of the sensors available on the bumpers and of the rear parking camera, the vehicle may be equipped with surround view cameras (optional) to assist the driver during manoeuvres on dead-ends/roads and on intersections. For more details on this option, see chapter "Surround View Camera System" in this section. Refer to “Park Assist System Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and recommendations. Park Assist system will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the RUN position. Park Assist system can be active only when the shift lever is in R (Reverse) or D (Drive). If Park Assist is enabled at one of these shift lever positions, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 12 km/h (7.5 mph) or above. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 km/h (6.2 mph). location, type and orientation of the obstacle. Park Assist Sensors The four Park Assist sensors, located in the rear bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensor's field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles up to approximately 200 cm (78 in) from the rear bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. The six Park Assist sensors, located in the front bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensor's field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles up to a distance of approximately 120 cm (50 in) from the front bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the Park Assist Warning Messages Display The Park Assist Warning screen will only be displayed if "Sound + Display" is selected from the MTC+ System. Refer to "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information. The Park Assist Warning screen is located on the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear bumper and/or front bumper and the detected obstacle. The warning display will turn on indicating the system status (ready or off) when the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or in D (Drive) and an obstacle has been detected. Before Starting The detection area in front of the vehicle is divided into two parts with four arcs while the two detection areas behind the car into five arcs. The system will indicate a detected obstacle by displaying arcs with fixed or flashing light and a characteristic sound according to the obstacle distance. The colour indicates the distance and the arc indicates the position of the detected obstacle. The green colour of the outer arc indicates the maximum distance, the amber colour of the middle arcs indicates the medium distance, while the red colour of the nearest arc indicates the minimum distance. 2 As the vehicle moves closer to the object the instrument cluster will display the arc moving towards the vehicle and the sound tone will change from single to slow, to fast and to continuous. The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster displays one flashing red arc only, combined with a continuous sound. 79 Before Starting The following charts show the warning alert visualization when the system is detecting an obstacle. Front Sensors - Warning Alerts 2 Front distance More than 120 cm (50 in) 120-101 cm (50-40 in) 100-61 cm (40-24 in) 60-31 cm (23.6-12.2 in) Less than 30 cm (12 in) Audible Alert None None Slow Fast Continuous Arc in left and right areas None 4th 3rd 2nd 1st (inner most) Type light None Solid Solid Flash Flash Arc colour ‒ Green Amber Amber Red Active Active Mute Mute Mute Radio sound Rear Sensors - Warning Alerts Rear distance More than 200 cm (78 in) 200-151 cm (78-59.4 in) 150-101 cm (60-40 in) 100-61 cm (40-24 in) 60-31 cm (23.6-12.2 in) Less than 30 cm (12 in) Audible Alert None Single Slow Slow Fast Continuous Arc in left and right areas None 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st (inner most) Type light None Solid Solid Solid Flash Flash Arc colour ‒ Green Amber Amber Amber Red Active Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Radio sound 80 Before Starting NOTE: Park Assist will turn off the front park assist audible alert (chime) after approximately 4 seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied. Enabling and Disabling Park Assist By accessing the submenu "Safety & Driving Assistant" from MTC+ System, the "Park Assist" can be disabled (option "Off"). The available options regarding the warning alerts are: "Sound" or "Sound + Display". Refer to "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information. The front sensors can be enabled or disabled at any time by pressing the button on the front dome console. After pressing the button the instrument cluster will display the state of front parking sensors for approximately five seconds. The button LED will be on when the front sensors are disabled. The button LED will be off when the front sensors are enabled. If the button is pressed and the system requires service, the LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on. When the shift lever is moved to R (Reverse) or to D (Drive) at a speed of 11 km/h (7 mph) or below and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster will display the "PARK ASSIST Off" message for 5 seconds until the shift lever remains in R (Reverse) or when the shift lever is moved in D (Drive). Service the Park Assist System In case of malfunction of the Park Assist system, the instrument cluster will actuate a single sound, once per ignition cycle. The instrument cluster will display a message when any of the rear or front sensor(s) are blocked by snow, mud, or ice and the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse) or D (Drive). The instrument cluster will display a message when any of the rear or front sensors are damaged and require service. When the shift lever is moved to R (Reverse) or D (Drive) and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will display the corresponding message for the time lapse the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or D (Drive) at speeds less than 11 km/h (7 mph). Under this condition Park Assist will not operate. See "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information. If the instrument cluster displays a message prompting you to clean the sensors, make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear bumper and/or front bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition switch. If the message continues to appear contact the Service Network. 2 81 Before Starting Park Assist System Usage Precautions 2 If a failure message is displayed on the instrument cluster, contact the Service Network. Cleaning the Park Assist Sensors When cleaning the sensors, take special care not to scratch or damage them; therefore, do not use dry, rough or hard cloths. The sensors must be washed with clean water, possibly adding car shampoo. Should you need to repaint the bumper or in case of paint touch-ups in the sensor area, please contact exclusively the Service Network. Incorrect paint application could affect the parking sensors operation. 82 NOTE: • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of Park Assist. • Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., must not be placed within 30 cm (12 in) from the rear bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the service Park Assist message to be displayed in the instrument cluster. over his/her shoulder when using Park Assist. WARNING! Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. Park Assist Volume CAUTION! • Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognise every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might only be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. When backing up, it is recommended that the driver looks The volume of the acoustic signal emitted by the front and rear parking sensors is set to the medium level. Three different level of volume can be selected the submenu "Safety & Driving Assistant" from the MTC+ System. Low level is useful in certain conditions when the parking sensor acoustic signal keeps coming on although there is no actual collision hazard. This may typically occur when driving in a queue or when the vehicle is overtaken by motorcycles or other vehicles on one or both sides in a queue of traffic. Before Starting When you set the volume, only the parking sensor acoustic signal will be affected. The radio or any other devices connected to the vehicle sound system will not be affected. Refer to chapter "MTC+ Settings" in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further information. Rear Parking Camera Your vehicle is equipped with a rear parking camera that allows you to see an image on the MTC+ screen of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into R (Reverse). When "Parkview Camera Off Delay" mode is enabled, the rear view image shall be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of R (Reverse). To assist the driver during manoeuvres on dead-ends/roads and on intersections, the vehicle may be equipped with an optional surround view camera system. In this case, the rear parking camera is integrated into the surround view camera system. In both configurations (rear parking camera only or surround view camera system), you can always monitor the rear view. For more details on this option, see chapter "Surround View Camera System" in this section. The image will be displayed along with a caution note to "Check Entire Surroundings" across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The rear parking camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear licence plate. 2 When the shift lever is shifted out of R (Reverse), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When displayed, dynamic grid lines (if the function is set to "MTC+ Settings") will illustrate the width of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. The dynamic grid lines will show separate zones in different colour that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone and colour: Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 28 - 30 cm (11 - 12 in) Yellow 30 cm - 2 m (12 - 78 in) Green 2 - 4 m (78 - 157 in) 83 Before Starting • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the rear camera to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver looks frequently over his/her shoulder when using the rear camera. 2 WARNING! Drivers must be careful when reversing even when using the rear view camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before reversing. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to be careful while reversing. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. CAUTION! • To avoid vehicle damage, the rear camera should only be used as a parking aid, as the rear camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path. 84 NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any other substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. Surround View Camera System (optional) System components The system uses four cameras to monitor the area around the vehicle, placed on the front grid, under the side rear-view mirrors and on the boot lid, between the number plate lights. Before Starting Once the "Surround Camera" screen is displayed, it is possible to choose which images to display according to 4 possible settings. Rear view and top view present under the images: the edges of the pressed button will highlight. The button will highlight and the type of selected view will appear on each image. 2 Rear cross path view Front cross path view When the shift lever is shifted to R (Reverse) position, the top view and rear view of the surrounding scenario will be automatically displayed on MTC+ display. Instead, when the shift lever is shifted to P (Park), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) position, it is possible to activate/ deactivate the system by pressing "Surround Camera" soft-key in "Controls" screen of MTC+ display. Front view and top view In any shift lever condition, when "Surround View" screen is displayed, a pop-up message will appear in the upper part for 5 seconds to advise the driver to check the surrounding scenario before any manoeuvre. With transmission in P (Park), N (Neutral) or D (Drive), the upper right corner of the screen will show the "X" key: touch it to go back to the previous screen of MTC+ display, before entering in "Controls". The deactivation of the rear visualization via "X" soft-key is not possible when the transmission is in R (Reverse) position. Choose the most suitable setting for the situation and the manoeuvre you are performing or going to perform, by touching the relevant button In the top view, the vehicle is represented as it is during the manoeuvre (see example in the figure), therefore any open doors will be visible in the image. To display also the dynamic lines of the trajectory you are setting, it is necessary to set this function by accessing the "Settings" menu on MTC+, at "Safety & Driving Assistant" item, by using the dynamic gridlines activation menu. Once this menu is displayed, it is also possible to set the function that delays the exit from this screen in special situations when the transmission lever is in D (Drive), N (Neutral) and P (Park) position by using 85 Before Starting the surround view camera delay menu. For further information, see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls". 2 WARNING! Failure to follow the precautions below might result in serious injury or even death. • Drivers must be careful during maneuvers also when using the camera system with surround view. • Always check carefully the areas around your vehicle, before proceeding forward or backward. • Be sure to always check for any pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots. • The driver must use the utmost caution while using the system 86 to avoid damage to property or personal injury. • The camera system with surround view is designed for use during the day or under good lighting conditions. Do not use and rely on the system under poor lighting conditions. • Distance lines and trajectory lines must be used only as a reference and only when vehicle is on a flat ground. The distance shown on MTC+ display must be interpreted as a reference and might be different from the distance actually present between the vehicle and any displayed objects. • Any obstacles present above the cameras cannot be detected. CAUTION! • To avoid vehicle damage, the camera system with surround view should only be used as a parking aid, as the cameras are unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path. • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the camera system with surround view, to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver looks frequently over his/her shoulder when using this system. NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any other substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. Before Starting Safety Tips Transporting Passengers WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury. • It is extremely dangerous to travel in a cargo area, inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people travelling in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured. • Do not allow people to travel in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Exhaust Gas WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. • If you are required to drive with the boot lid open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blowers switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the passenger compartment is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever detecting a change in the sound of the exhaust system or eventual exhaust fumes inside the vehicle have the Service Network inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. Vehicle Safety Checks Seat Belts • Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. • Do not disassemble or modify the system. • If the belt has been sharply pulled, for example as the result of an accident, the safety belt, together with the anchoring devices, the anchoring device mounting screws and the pretensioner (if available) must be completely replaced. Even if the belt does not present any exterior signs of wear or damage, it may have lost its restraining properties. 2 Air bag Warning Light The light should illuminate and remain lit for a few seconds bulb checking when the ignition switch is pushed in RUN position (see "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air bags" chapter in this section). • If the light does not illuminate while starting, contact the Service Network. • If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by the Service Network. 87 Before Starting 2 Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the fan system on high speed (see "Air Conditioning Controls" chapter in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield and front side windows. Contact the Service Network for service if your defroster is inoperable. Floor Mat Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. NOTE: The Maserati Service Network can provide you with any information about the available Maserati floor mats included in the “Genuine Accessories” range. 88 • Mounting posts must be properly WARNING! Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. • Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the proper fasteners. • Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning. • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. installed, if not equipped from the factory. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle. Tires • Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. • Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. • Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. • Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. • Check the wheel nuts for tightness. • Check the tires (see "Tire Inflation Pressure" chapter in section "Features and Specifications") for proper cold inflation pressure. Lights and Indicator Lights • Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you operate the controls (see "Lights" chapter in section ""understanding the Vehicle"). • Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument cluster (see "Instrument Cluster" Before Starting chapter in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). Door Latches • Check for positive closing, latching, and locking of doors and boot lid (see "Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob" chapter in this section). 2 Fluid Leaks • Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for recent fluid leaks (oil, fuel, etc.). • If gasoline fumes are detected or fluid leaks are suspected, contact the Service Network. 89 Before Starting 90 3 - Understanding the Vehicle Interior Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Driver Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 "Comfort Luxury" Rear Seats (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Adjustable Pedals (for versions/markets, where provided) . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Rear-View Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Windshield Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Interior Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Power Sunroof with Sunshade (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 HomeLink® (for versions/markets, where provided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Air Conditioning Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 91 Understanding the Vehicle Interior Components Dashboard Components 3 92 Understanding the Vehicle 21 Internal rear view mirror. 2 Hazard lights switch. 22 Auto-dimming on/off button. 3 Drive mode switches. Front dome console. 4 Electric Parking Brake lever. 5 Glove compartment. 6 Unlock button for central console with cup holder and power outlet. Rotary selectors and buttons foe the multimedia navigation. Cover for cup holder and power socket compartment. Central console covers with armrest function. Air outlets (adjustable). 1 Adjustable side air outlets. 23 2 Engine START/STOP button. (*) If equipped. 3 Light switch. 4 Light dimmer controls. 5 Steering wheel controls. 6 Instrument cluster. 7* Right shift paddle +. 8* Left shift paddle –. 9 Hood release. 10 Adjustable central air outlets. 11 Analog clock. 12 MTC+ display. 13 14 Multifunction lever (windshield wipers, headlight selection and turn signals). Climate controls. 15 Dashboard glove box handle. 16 18 Dashboard storage compartment. Cover for compartment with AUX, USB, SD memory card port and slide phone drawer. Storage compartment handle. 19 Storage compartment. 20 Vehicle security light. 17 Central Console Components 7 8 9 10 11 A/C Dual – zone 12 13 3 Rear power sunshade and rear seats comfort controls panel. Storage compartment. Rear climate controls panel for four-zone air conditioner (optional). A/C Four – zone 1 Automatic transmission shift lever. 93 Understanding the Vehicle Front Dome Console Components Front Doors Components 3 Driver door 1 Reading lights control button. 2 Central light control button. 3 Reading lights. 4 Central light. 5 Passenger air bag deactivation warning light (for versions/ markets, where provided). HomeLink controls (optional). 6 7 8 9 10 94 5 Power door unlocks/locks. 6 7 Rear windows and sunshade lockout button. Loudspeakers. 8 Storage compartment. 9 Internal door lock/unlock knob. 10 Passenger door panel grip. 11 Reflex reflector. 12 External door handle. 13 Door lock button with “Passive Entry” function. Door outboard opening lock. 14 Components between the Rear Seats Button to release the manual boot lid or to open fully/partially the power boot lid (optional). Button to enable/disable front sensors of the Park Assist system. Sunroof controls (optional). 1 Internal door handle. 2 Button to switch off passenger compartment lights. 3 Driver’s seat, steering wheel, adjustable pedals (if equipped) and rear mirrors memory switch. Rear view mirrors switches. 4 Power window switch. Passenger door 1 Armrest cup holder covers unlock button. Understanding the Vehicle 2 Armrest compartment unlock button with power outlet and USB port for charge only. "Comfort Luxury" rear seats 6 Left rear seat adjustment control (*). 7 Four-zones A/C controls panel (optional) (*). 8 Unlock button for covers on rear central console (*). 9 Storage covers with armrest function (*). 10 Reclining shelf to access storage box between the rear seats (*). 11 12 V power outlet and USB port for charge only (*). (*) For optional “Comfort Luxury” rear seats version. Rear Dome Console Components "Comfort Luxury" rear seats 3 Cup holder compartment lid (*). 4 Rear seats comfort controls panel on rear storage compartment (*). Front and rear right seat adjustment controls (*). 5 1 Reading lights control button. 2 Central light control button. 3 Reading light LED. 4 Central light LEDs. Rear Doors Components 3 1 Internal rear door handle. 2 Grip. 3 Loudspeaker. 4 Door storage pockets. 5 Power window switch. 6 Power doors lock/unlock buttons. 7 8 “Child protection” door lock system. Inside door lock/unlock knob. 9 Reflex reflector. 10 External door handle. 11 Door lock button with “Passive Entry” function (optional). 95 Understanding the Vehicle Front Seats Grip switch 1 from the back side and push it down or up. Release the switch 1 when the desired position is reached. Seats and seat belts are parts of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle. For further information, see chapter "Occupant Restraint System" in Section "Before Starting". 3 CAUTION! If the seat's movement does not work, make sure that the corresponding fuse is not tripped (see chapter "Fuse Replacement" in section "Maintenance and Care"). WARNING! Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Front Power Seats The switches of the power seats are located on the outboard side of the seat cushion. Use the front switch 1 to move the seat up or down, forward or rearward or to recline the seat cushion. Use the switch 2 to recline the seatback. Use the rear switch 3 to adjust the lumbar support. Head Restraints Adjustment To manually lift or lower the head restraints press the indicated lateral button. NOTE: The Sport Seat does not include the head restraint adjustment. Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch 1 forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch 1 when the desired position is reached. Seat Up/Down Adjustment The height of the seat can be adjusted up- or downward. 96 Understanding the Vehicle WARNING! Remember that the headrests must be positioned so that their upper edge is aligned with the top of the occupant’s head. In fact, only in this position can they provide the support required in the event of a bumper-to-tail collision. Seat Tilt Control (Up/Down) The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push the front of the switch 1, to move the front cushion seat in the direction of the switch. Release the switch 1 when the desired position is reached. WARNING! • Never adjust the seat while driving. You could lose control of the vehicle. Moving the seat could distract you or make you press a pedal unintentionally. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. • Do not travel with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Seat Back Tilt Control The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch 2 forward or rearward, the upper seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch 2 when the desired position is reached. CAUTION! Do not place any object under a power seat or obstruct its movement as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat movement may become limited if there is an obstruction in the way. Power Lumbar Push the switch 3 forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch 3 upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support. The front seats are equipped with heaters in both seat cushions and seatbacks. The front seats heating is operated by the MTC+ System. The seats comfort commands are in the "Climate" screen of the MTC+. Front Heated Seats They are present in the "Climate" screen even when the A/C is off. See "Air Conditioning Controls" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further details. When the MTC+ System is in any mode other than "Climate" (Radio", "Media", "Controls", etc.) the icons of the active front seats comfort functions will be indicated on the upper part of the display. 3 WARNING! Persons with low skin sensitivity • because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions must be careful when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. • Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. 97 Understanding the Vehicle Front Ventilated Seats (optional) Front Seats Heat Function NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate. 3 • Touch the "Climate" soft-key on the lower part of the MTC display. • Starting from the state "OFF", indicated below the respective icon, within 15 seconds touch the driver or passenger seat soft-key once to select HI-level heating. • Within 15 seconds, touch the same soft-key a third time to shut off the seat heating. NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. • Within 15 seconds, touch the driver or passenger seat soft-key a second time to select LO-level heating. 98 When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first 4 minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LOlevel after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will indicate the change from HI to LO. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of approximately 45 minutes. To enhance occupants comfort by high external temperatures, both the driver and passenger seats, on request, can be ventilated. Small fans are located in the seat cushion and seatback, they draw air from the seat surface through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler when the temperature is high. The ventilated seats are operated with the MTC+ System. The seats comfort commands are in the “Climate” screen of the MTC+. They are present in the "Climate" screen even when the A/C is off. See "Air Conditioning Controls" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further details. When the MTC+ System is in any mode other than "Climate" (Radio", "Media", "Controls", etc.) the icons of the active front seats comfort functions will be indicated on the upper part of the display. Understanding the Vehicle Driver Memory Seat Front Ventilated Seats Function NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate. • Touch the "Climate" soft-key on the lower part of the MTC+ display. • Starting from the state "OFF", indicated below the respective icon, within 15 seconds touch the driver or passenger seat soft-key once to select HI-level ventilation. • Within 15 seconds, touch the driver or passenger seat soft-key a second time to select LO-level ventilation. • Within 15 seconds, touch the same soft-key a third time to shut off the seat ventilation. This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat, external side mirrors, adjustable pedals (for versions/markets, where provided), and power tilt and telescopic steering column and a set of programmed radio stations. Your key fob RKE transmitter can also be set to recall the same positions by pressing the button. 3 NOTE: • Only one key fob RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions. • Passive Entry door handles cannot be linked to the memory function. Use either the memory recall switch or the key fob RKE transmitter (if linked to the memory feature) to recall memory positions 1 or 2. The memory seat switch is located on the driver's door trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: • The "S" (SET) button, which is used to activate the memory save function. 99 Understanding the Vehicle • The "1" and "2" buttons which are used to recall either of two programmed memory profiles. • Check on the instrument cluster for the positive response of the actions "Memory 1 (or 2) profile set". After these steps, the profile set will be memorized in the selected position. NOTE: Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in P (Park), but the vehicle must be in P (Park) to recall a memory profile. 3 Pairing Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Seats Memory Memory Profiles Setting NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory. To create a new memory profile, perform the following: • Cycle the ignition device to the ACC or RUN position. • Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals (for versions/markets, where provided), power tilt and telescopic steering column and radio station presets). • Press and release the "S" button on the memory switch. • Within 5 seconds, press and release the memory button "1" or "2". 100 Your key fob with RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two programmed memory profiles by pressing the button on the RKE transmitter. NOTE: This feature can be enabled or disabled using the MTC+ System, refer to "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information. To programme your key fobs RKE transmitter, perform the following actions: • Cycle the ignition device to the RUN position. • Move the seat and/or the other adjustable devices in the position that you wish to memorize, or recall a previously memorized profile, pressing the corresponding memory button "1" or "2". • Cycle the ignition device to the OFF position. • Press and release the "S" button. • Within 5 seconds, press and release the memory button "1" or "2". • Press and release the button on key fob RKE transmitter. • Within 3 seconds, press and release the button on the key fob RKE transmitter. To check if the system has memorized the correct profile, you can move the seat and press the button: the seat will move to the memorized position. NOTE: Your key fobs RKE transmitter can be unlinked to your memory settings by pressing the "S" button followed by the button on the key fob RKE transmitter. Memory Position Recall NOTE: The vehicle must be in P (Park) to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in P (Park), a message will display in the instrument cluster. Understanding the Vehicle To recall the memory settings for driver, press memory button number "1" or "2" on the driver's door trim panel or the button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position "1" or "2" with ignition device in the RUN position. A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the buttons ("S", "1", or "2") during a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat, external side mirrors, adjustable pedals (for versions/markets, where provided), and power tilt and telescopic steering column stop moving. A delay of at least one second will occur before selecting a new recall. Easy ENTRY/EXIT Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you place the ignition device to the OFF position. • When you cycle the ignition to the OFF position the driver seat: - will move about 60 mm (2.36 in) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to ca. 68 mm (2.67 in) forward of the rear stop; - will move to a position of ca. 8 mm (0.31 in) forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 23 mm (0.9 in) and 68 mm (2.67 in) forward of the rear stop. • The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position. • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 23 mm (0.9 in) forward of the rear stop. In this position, there would be no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position. NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled or disabled using the MTC+ System, refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further information. Rear Seats On standard version vehicles, rear seats can fit three passengers. Side seats are equipped with heating resistances. Seats and seat belts are parts of the occupant restraint system of the vehicle. WARNING! Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. 3 NOTE: • See chapter "Occupants Restraint Systems" in section "Before Starting" for seat belt positioning. • For vehicles equipped with "Comfort Luxury" rear seats with rear console storage compartment, refer to chapter "Comfort Luxury Rear Seats" in this section. Rear Head Restraints Side seats are endowed with fixed head restraints. The center seat head restraint has two positions, up or down. When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised position. When there are no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be 101 Understanding the Vehicle lowered in order to provide the driver for maximum visibility. • To raise the head restrainton the left side, pull upward on the head restraint. Rear Armrest • To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the foot of the head restraint on the left side, and push downward on the head restraint. • To close it, pull it upwards then push it back into its seat. On the front part of the armrest there are two cup holders (see "Interior Features" in this section). Inside the armrest there is a illuminated glove or document compartment. Pressing the opening button and lifting the cover of the armrest box you accede a 12 V power outlet and USB port: a tablet plug may be installed. The rear armrest is mobile and can be folded up into the seat back. • To lower it, pull the stripe as indicated. 3 102 • To close the compartment, lower the cover. CAUTION! The armrest is not designed to support the weight of an adult or a child: please use it only to store beverages, small objects or documents. Understanding the Vehicle Rear Side Heated Seats (if equipped) The side rear seats can be equipped with heaters both in seat cushion and seatback. Rear seats heating can be adjusted by operating control devices on the panel located on the rear side of the central console. The panel also includes command for the rear window sunshade (see "Rear Windows" in section "Before Starting") and may include four-zone climate controls (see "Air Conditioning Controls" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. The buttons on the panel with the resistance icon activate the heating on one or both seats. • Push the button once to select the highest heating level. The two LED beside of the icon will illuminate. • Push the same button a second time to select the lowest level. Only the lower LED remains illuminate. • Push the same button a third time to shut the heating elements OFF. The LED will turn off. • The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate. By selecting the HI-level setting, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level. By setting the HI-level, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. The LO-level setting will turn off automatically after a maximum of approximately 45 minutes. 3 WARNING! • Persons with low skin sensitivity because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions must be careful when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. • Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting NOTE: • Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. 103 Understanding the Vehicle "Comfort Luxury" Rear Seats (if equipped) 3 This vehicle can be equipped with two rear seats endowed with ventilation and a heating power regulation system. In this version, the center rear seat is occupied by a central console with several features, a compartment and a small instrument panel to control rear seats, four-zones air conditioning (if equipped) and the sunshade on the rear window. A reclining shelf positioned centrally between both back rests enables to access power outlets and USB port. Beside the heating regulation system designed for a better comfort at high external temperatures, as described in the previous paragraph, the rear seats can be ventilated as well. The seat cushion and seatback are equipped with small fans drawing air from the seat surface through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the occupant bodies cooler in case of high temperature. Seat Setting Devices Rear seat controls operating forward and backward adjustments are positioned on both sides of the central console storage compartment. By 104 moving the seat forward or backward, you can change the tilt of the backrest as well. The rear passenger sitting on the side opposite to the driver can move the front passenger seat by using the rear command. CAUTION! If the seat's movement does not work, make sure that the corresponding fuse is not tripped (see chapter "Fuse Replacement" in section "Maintenance and Care"). Head Restraint Manual Adjustment The head restraints can be tilted and their height adjusted manually in four positions. Lift the head restraint to the correct position. To lower it, press the button located at the bottom of the head restraint. Understanding the Vehicle WARNING! Remember that the head restraints must be positioned so that their upper edge is aligned with the top of the occupant’s head. In fact, only in this position can they provide the support required in the event of a bumper-totail collision. Instrument Panel on the Rear Central Console level. The two LED beside of the icon will illuminate. • Push the same button a second time to select the lowest ventilation and/or heating level. Only the lower LED remains illuminate. • Push the same button a third time to shut the ventilation and/or heating elements OFF. The LED will turn off. NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate. Central Console Features On the front part of the rear central console there is a cup holder, to open it press the cover as pointed out in the picture. To close it, lower the cover to the console support. 3 The instrument panel on the rear central console storage compartment is divided into two areas: • The front area with the control buttons for the rear seats comfort level and the sunshade on the rear window (see "Rear Window" in section "Before Starting"). • The rear area with the control buttons for the four-zone air conditioning system (see "Air Conditioning Controls" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). The buttons labeled with a fan- and a resistance icon are used for ventilation and/or heating control on one or on both seats. • Push the button once to select the highest ventilation and/or heating 105 Understanding the Vehicle 3 By pressing the indicated button and opening the half-lids used as armrests, you can access the internal area of the storage compartment. The compartment is supplied with air-conditioned like the rest of the passenger compartment. The illuminated area of the storage compartment includes: a 12 V power socket/cigarette lighter, a button to exclude the air-conditioning of the compartment and two holders for bottle, can or cups. NOTE: For further information see “Interior Features” in this section. Reclining Shelf Rear Accessories To access devices centrally between the backrests, tilt the reclining shelf downwards. Behind the reclining shelf, you may access a power source of 12 V and a USB high capacity port for charging portable devices. 106 NOTE: For further information see "Interior Features" in this section. Understanding the Vehicle Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel This feature allows you to power tilt the steering column upward or downward or to lengthen or shorten it in order to adjust the steering wheel to an optimized position. The power tilt/telescoping The power tilt/telescoping steering column/wheel switch is located on the lower left side of the steering column. To adjust the tilt of the steering column/wheel, move the switch up or down as desired. NOTE: You can use your key fob with RKE transmitter or the memory buttons on the driver's door trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column/wheel to programmed positions. See "Driver Memory Seat" in this section. WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column/wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering column/wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the steering column/wheel is adjusted before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. Heated Steering Wheel (optional) To lengthen or shorten the steering column/wheel, pull the switch toward you or push the switch away from you as desired. The steering wheel contains a heating element inside the rim that helps warm driver’s hands by cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once turned on, this function will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm. The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using the MTC+ System. The heating steering wheel command is in the “Climate” screen of MTC+. It is present in the "Climate" screen even when the A/C is off. See "Air Conditioning Controls" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further details. When the MTC+ System is in any mode other than "Climate" ("Radio", "Media", "Controls", etc.) the icon of the heated steering wheel will be indicated on the upper part of the display. 3 NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate. • Touch the "Climate" soft-key located on the lower part of the MTC+ display. • When the heating function is in the off state, soft-key is not highlighted. 107 Understanding the Vehicle 3 • Within 15 seconds, touch the heated steering wheel soft-key to turn on the function. • Within 15 seconds, touch the heated steering wheel soft-key a second time to turn it off. 108 WARNING! • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods. • Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat. Adjustable Pedals (for versions/markets, where provided) The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow greater range of pedals positions enabling driver comfort with regard to the steering wheel tilt and the seat position. This feature allows the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver’s feet. The switch is located on the front side of the driver's seat cushion shield. Press the switch downward to move the pedals forward (toward the front of the vehicle). Lift the switch upward to move the pedals rearward (toward the driver). Understanding the Vehicle WARNING! Do not adjust the pedals position while the vehicle is moving. You could lose control and have an accident. Always adjust the pedals position while the vehicle is parked. The following messages will be displayed if the driver is attempting to adjust the pedals when the system is locked out: • "Adjustable Pedals Unavailable While in Reversing"; • or "Adjustable Pedals Unavailable While Cruise Engaged". NOTE: For vehicles equipped with driver memory seat, use your key fob (RKE) transmitter or the memory buttons on the driver's door trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to programmed positions. See "Driver Memory Seat" in this section for further information. CAUTION! Do not place any object under the adjustable pedals or obstruct its movement as it may cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal movement may become limited if there is an obstruction in the adjustable pedal's path. Rear-View Mirrors External Mirrors External mirrors can be adjusted electrically and are equipped with anti-mist resistors operated by the air conditioning system (see “Air Conditioning Controls” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). The mirrors can be closed electrically and will yield in both directions in case of a collision. The external mirrors are electrochromic (for versions/markets where provided), which means, they automatically operate an anti-dazzle function by gradually shading as the light hitting the mirrors increases. The external rear-view electrochromic mirrors work in conjunction with the internal rear-view electrochromic mirror. 3 NOTE: • The mirrors can be adjusted electrically only with the ignition device in ACC and RUN position. • When the vehicle is started, the warning light shown in the picture will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear-view mirrors to let the (Continued) 109 Understanding the Vehicle (Continued) driver know that the BSA system (optional) is operational. For more details see chapter "Blind Spot Assist - BSA" in section "Driving". Mirrors Positioning The power mirror controls are located on the driver's door trim panel. The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. 3 The external of the rear-view mirror support is equipped with LEDs, lighting up when the turn signals and vehicle entry/exit lights are activated. WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the external side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or object. Use the inside mirror to judge the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the external side convex mirror. NOTE: The lighting of the outside door handle and the puddle light near the front door are only available with the optional rear view mirrors (SVC). When the surround view camera system is installed, at the external bottom side of the rear-view mirror is the side view camera (refer to "Surround View Camera System" in section "Before Starting"). 110 Press the mirror control switch corresponding to the arrow indicating the direction of the desired movement. For optimal vision orientate the outside(s) mirror(s) in order to frame the adjacent lane adjacent and get a partial overlap with the visible image on the inside rear-view mirror. Power mirror preselected positions can be reset by operating the optional Memory Driver Seat device. Check "Driver Memory Seat" in this section for further information. To adjust a rear view mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the mirror that you want to adjust. The spin button will illuminate indicating the rear view mirror is activated and can be adjusted. Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse This feature provides automatic external rear-view mirrors positioning, allowing the driver to view the ground area behind the front doors. Understanding the Vehicle The external mirrors will move slightly downward from the current position when the shift lever is shifted into reverse. The external mirrors will then return to the original position when the lever is shifted out of the reverse position. Each memory set of the driver's seat (see "Driver Memory Seat" chapter in this section) corresponds to a mirrors tilt position in reverse. The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches. NOTE: The mirrors tilt in reverse can be turned on and off using the MTC+ System, refer to "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls". Folding Mirrors By selecting this feature on MTC+ the rear-view mirrors automatically fold when the vehicle is locked by the key fob and when the power boot lid (if equipped) is closed and locked by pressing the button on the right lower parts of the lid. When the vehicle and the boot lid will be unlocked and the ignition device is set in RUN position, the rear-view mirrors will automatically open in the position they had before the lock. "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). • If the mirrors are automatically folded after the last lock action, then they will automatically unfold when the ignition device is set on ACC or RUN position. • If the mirrors were manually folded by the switch on the driver's door panel, before a lock action, they will need to be manually unfolded to reactivate the automatic function. 3 CAUTION! Never retract or open the mirrors manually: it could damage the power mechanism. Internal Rear-view Mirror Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in; press the switch a second time to reset the mirrors to the standard position. There is a way to make external mirrors automatically fold/unfold. • If the function is available, it needs to be activated by MTC+ (refer to "MTC+ Settings" in section The position of internal rear-view mirror can be manually adjusted, and is endowed with an accident prevention release system operating in the event of a collision. Internal rear-view mirror is electrochromic (for versions/markets where provided): this glare function is automatically deactivated in reverse to ensure maximum visibility of obstacles. 111 Understanding the Vehicle CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. 3 "Mirror Dimmer" Feature The auto-dimming feature can be disabled or re-enabled by pressing the on/off button on the mirror base. Typical case is at night when the auto-dimming can be excessive (low reflectance). Disabling this feature will increase the reflectance of the internal mirror, increasing visibility. Lights Light Switch The light switch located on the left side of the dashboard is used for the position/DRL lights, headlights, side marker, license plate lights and fog lights operations. The regulation devices beside the switch (see "Interior Lights" in this chapter) can adjust the brightness of the instrument cluster lights, the doors controls rear lighting and the interior lighting. Rotate the light switch to the or to the position: the instrument cluster will display the related telltale. 112 NOTE: • In certain European countries, the position lights will only operate with the ignition switch in OFF position, or with headlights on. Regardless of ignition switch position, the position/DRL lights will remain on as long as the lights switch is in position. • If the headlights or position/DRL lights are on after the ignition is placed in OFF position, a buzzer will alert the driver while opening the driver's door, to exit the car. When the car is locked, the telltale on the instrument cluster will turn off. Understanding the Vehicle The following table shows the on/off condition of external lights, according to the ignition device position, to the engine status, to the twilight sensor mode and to the light switch position. Ignition Device Position Engine Status Twilight Sensor Mode – – Position lights (1), side marker and license plate lights on (4). All lights off. OFF Off – Position lights (1), side marker and license plate lights on (2). All lights off. ACC Low beams, position (1), side marker and license plate lights on (2). Off – Position lights (1), side marker and license plate lights on (2). All lights off. RUN Low beams, position (1), side marker and license plate lights on (2). DRL (1) on. DRL (1) on. RUN On DAY Low beams, position (1), side marker and license plate lights on. RUN On NIGHT Low beams, position (1), side marker and license plate lights on (3). Low beams, position (1), side marker and license plate lights on. Low beams, position (1), side marker and license plate lights on. Light Switch Position AUTO Low beams, position (1), side marker and license plate lights on. 3 (1) The lighting system uses the same LED for DRL and front position lights with two different levels of intensity: high for DRL and low for position lights. (2) The lights are powered up for 30 minutes to preserve the charge of the battery. (3) In some countries a message on TFT display alerts the user to use position when parking because the position lights will turn on with engine started also in low ambient light conditions or at night. (4) To preserve the charge of the battery, do not leave these lights on for a long time. 113 Understanding the Vehicle Automatic Headlights 3 This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light intensity detected by the twilight sensor positioned on the inner surface of the windshield, over the rear view mirror. To turn the system on, rotate the lights switch clockwise to "AUTO" position. When the automatic system is activated, the headlight time delay feature is activated as well. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move the lights switch out of "AUTO" position. NOTE: The engine must be running and the twilight sensor in "NIGHT" mode before the headlights turn on in automatic mode. WARNING! The responsibility for turning on the lights, depending on the daylight and regulations in force in the country of use, always lies with the driver. The automatic system for switching on and off the external lights is 114 to be considered as an aid for the driver. If necessary, switch the lights including the rear fog lights on and off manually. Headlights On with Wipers When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on in "Adverse Weather" mode approximately 10 seconds after activation of the wipers, if the lights switch is placed in the "AUTO" position. The headlights will additionally turn off by deactivation of the wipers if previously activated with this function. NOTE: The headlights with wipers feature may be turned on and off using the MTC+ System, refer to "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instrument and Controls". Headlights Time Delay Headlights Time Delay This safety feature provides headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area. To activate automatically the delay feature with the light switch in "AUTO" position, place the ignition switch in the OFF or ACC position while the headlights are still on. The delay interval begins when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ACC position. To activate manually the delay feature the headlights must be on before place the ignition switch in the OFF or ACC position and the light switch in "AUTO" position. If you place the ignition in RUN, the system will cancel the delay. NOTE: • To activate this feature the light switch must be turned in "AUTO" position within 45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF or ACC position. • Once the delay feature is active, any additional shifting of the light switch will cancel the feature. • The headlight delay time is programmable using the MTC+ System, see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instrument and Controls". • If the low beam LEDs are active due to "Headlights with Wipers", than the headlamps delay feature will not be activated when the ignition switch is set in OFF position. SmartBeam™ System The SmartBeamTM system provides increased forward lighting for a Understanding the Vehicle more comfortable and secure driving experience without glaring other vehicles in several traffic situations. The SmartBeamTM system uses a forward facing digital camera, located on the windshield behind the internal rear-view mirror, and an electronical headlights controller in order to dynamically adapt the front light distribution according to the traffic scenario. The digital camera works like a human eye, it is able to see which is the traffic context while the headlight electronic controller works like a human brain, using information from the camera to command an headlight reaction that gives to the driver the “best” light distribution (best is always in reference to the specific traffic environment). The camera gives information to the electronical headlight controller about environmental brightness, traffic participants vehicle and obstacles lights, distances and velocities. Using a proper combination of all these data the smart beam system is able to dynamically modify the light shape produced by the dipped beam and by the full beam as well, to make the driver visibility as much comfortable as possible in every condition without glaring other traffic participants. System Limitations There are some cases in which the SmartBeamTM system could not properly work temporarily causing glaring for other vehicles especially with "Auto High Beam Assist" feature activated on MTC+ “Controls” page (see "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). These cases could be related to: • Vehicles headlight and/or rear light (one or both of them) not visible in the field of view of the camera. • Heavy rainy weather. • Heavy foggy weather. • Snowing weather. • Windshield dirt or impurities in camera lens zone. • Camera lens obstruction or clogging. In all these cases, it will be driver’s responsibility to avoid this glaring by acting manually on the system, switching off the high beam by means of steering wheel multifunction lever. Daytime Running Lights (DRL) The lighting system uses the same high or low intensity headlamps LED, respectively, for the DRL lights and front position lights. DRL lights will turn on when the twilight sensor is in "DAY" mode, the engine is running and the light switch is in or "AUTO" position. If a turn signal is activated, the DRL LED on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is deactivated, the DRL LED will light up again. NOTE: Depending on your Country’s regulations, DRL lights may be turned on and off. 3 “Full-LED” Headlight with AFS These headlamps combines the "FullLED" technology to the AFS (Advanced Frontlighting System) adaptive features, using a forward-facing camera located on the windshield behind the internal rear-view mirror. "Full-LED" Technology This technology allows having headlights with a simpler construction and a more compact size compared to those equipped with traditional or Xenon light bulbs. Other advantages are: • a clearer light beam, with a cool white tone that allows a better perception of the contrasts thus making the night vision more efficient and less tiring; 115 Understanding the Vehicle • a longer duration equivalent at least to that of the vehicle; • a reduced current consumption. These features positively affect some vehicle management economy aspects by eliminating/reducing the light bulb replacements and the fuel consumption. 3 116 AFS Features The system is able to process signals of onboard systems and subsequently start up five strategic steps in the following situations: • "motorway beam"; • "country beam"; • "town beam"; • "adverse weather beam"; • "tourist beam" (for example in countries with circulation on the opposite side). In this case this function must be activated via the menu of MTC+ (refer to "MTC+ Settings" in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). The advantages offered by the AFS system are perceived especially in case of bad weather, fog and/or insufficient road indications providing broader illumination of the side zones, which are normally left in the dark, and for motorway driving. This surely increases driving safety as it offers less eye stress and increased orientation for the driver and better detection of other persons on the road sides (pedestrians, bicycle riders and motorcycle drivers). Furthermore, the headlamps are suitable to prevent glare, providing optimal lighting when driving the car in a country with circulation on the opposite side. The table shows the light values (lux) and the light flux (lumen) of AFS headlights. NOTE: The values reported in the tables may change depending on the destination market of the car. Lighting (at 25 m / 27 yd) Low beam 55 lux High beam + Low beam 130 lux Light flux Low beam 843 lm High beam + Low beam 1580 lm The system assures better visibility of the road surface when driving in a curve, steering, or in the event of road deviations, optimizing vertical light distribution according to the current drive path. The increased lateral illumination is gained through a fixed bending light or a cornering light (depending on the market) elaborating information about the steering angle, the vehicle speed and the turn indicator. The improved vertical illumination, in case of fast acceleration and/or fast deceleration, will assure the deeper illuminated distance from the vehicle, through a dynamical adaptation of headlight vertical attitude. NOTE: • Each time the adaptive headlight system is turned on, the headlights adjustment will perform a selfregulation cycle. • All AFS features are available only if the vehicle is moving forward. • "Adaptive Front Light" function can be turned on or off using the MTC+ System, refer to "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instrument and Controls" for further information. AFS System Failure In the event of AFS system unvailable, the related warning light and message will light up on the TFT display. Take your vehicle to the nearest Center Understanding the Vehicle of the Service Network as soon as possible to check the system. Automatic High Beam (for versions/markets, where provided) The Automatic High Beam headlight control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of the forward-facing digital camera located behind the rear-view mirror, which is the same one used for example by the Lane Keeping Assist - LKA system on vehicles with ADAS systems. This camera detects the environmental luminosity, the headlamps of oncoming vehicles and the tail lamps of proceding vehicles in the front area. In these cases system automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. Furthermore, the digital camera is able to detect the urban areas and the inhabited centers and to turn off the high beams when driving near of one of them. The properly working for this feature (if all the other conditions are met) is ensured between 40 km/h (25 mph) and 250 km/h (155 mph). Activation Mode To activate Automatic High Beam feature: • Shift the multifunction lever onward . • Put the light switch in "AUTO" position. • Touch the "Controls" soft-key in the lower part of the MTC+ display. • Within 15 seconds, touch the "Auto High Beam Assist" soft-key to turn on the feature. 3 Without ADAS With ADAS • Within 15 seconds, touch the "Auto High Beam Assist" soft-key a second time to turn it off. After these steps, the green indicator on the upper right side of the TFT display comes on. 117 Understanding the Vehicle Moving the full beam light source the "Glare Free" feature will create a shadow in correspondence of other vehicles present in the field of view of the camera. The figure represents an example of the car that is travelling in the following scenarios: 3 NOTE: • The function is enabled only if the brightness sensor detects the right lighting conditions and then switch to low beam on. • Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly. High Beam with "Glare Free" Feature The "Glare Free" system associated with "Full-LED" headlamps assists the driver during travelling on an off-city road with not sufficient environmental illumination allowing the high beam use also with other traffic participants without glaring disturbs. 118 1 2 3 two vehicles ahead in the same direction; another vehicle that is overtaking; another vehicle proceeding in the opposite direction. The system is able to detect and react to an oncoming vehicle starting from a distance of about 400 m (400 yd), in a couple of seconds. Instead, in case of the preceding vehicles, the system is able to detect and react in few seconds starting from a distance of about 100 m (100 yd). Activation Mode The digital camera is the same used for the automatic high beam, and like automatic high beam also for "Glare Free" feature it needs to be activated by MTC+ "Controls" screen, touching the "Auto High Beam Assist" soft-key, as shown in the previous paragraph "Automatic High Beams". The "Glare Free" feature will be engaged after the following actions: • Engine run. • Feature enabled by MTC+. • Low beam on. • Interior light switch in position “Auto”. • Multifunction lever in “High beam” activated position. The “Glare Free” feature will work if: • The vehicle speed is equal or greater than 40 km/h (25 mph) in the engagement phase of the feature. • Environmental brightness is not sufficient for a safe and comfortable drive. • Traffic scenario out of urban context. Once the system will be active, there will be two indicators on the instrument cluster, showed in the same time: one blue and one green. Understanding the Vehicle The green indicator indicates that the "Auto High Beam Assist" feature is activated on MTC+; the blue indicator indicates that all or only some high beam LEDs are physically on in that moment. When instead there is the needing to switch off the whole high beam module to obtain the no glaring effect, on the instrument cluster there will be just one indicator on: the green one. When the scenario allows the partial or full use of high beam with no glaring disturbance, the blue indicator will appear again. NOTE: • Some unpredictable conditions, such as dirt, dust, film or any other obstruction on camera lens zone events could affect "Glare Free" feature making it working improperly. • Heavy rainy and foggy weather could affect system performance, leaving the full beam switched on for longer time than the nominal working condition. This could cause a glaring disturbance for other vehicles, to avoid this the driver has to switch off the high beam manually. • In phase of disengagement of the feature, the minimum operating speed is 30 km/h (18 mph). • "Glare Free" feature proper operation is guaranteed if vehicle speed is less than, or at least equal to 250 km/h (155 mph). Automatic High Beam/Glare Free High Beams Failure In the event of a failure on high beam system (Automatic or Glare Free equipped, as well), the related amber warning light will light up on the TFT display. Take your vehicle to the nearest Center of the Service Network as soon as possible avoiding to use this system. 3 Fog Lights The AFS headlights, in the "Adverse Weather" mode also operate as fog system device (see “Full-LED Headlights with AFS” in this chapter). The rear fog lights switch is built into the lights switch. To activate the rear fog lights, turn the light switch to the low beam light or "AUTO" position. Press the lights switch to turn on the rear fog lights. 119 Understanding the Vehicle by operating the lights switch as previously described. Multifunction Lever 3 Pressing again the lights switch will deactivate the rear fog lights. A dedicated telltale in the instrument cluster illuminates when the rear fog lights are turned on. NOTE: After a key-off/key-on cycle, the rear fog lights will NOT activate automatically when turning on the low beam or "AUTO" headlights. The rear fog lights will only turn on 120 The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals, headlight beam selection, overtaking lights and windshield wiper and washer (for this content see the chapter “Windshield Wipers and Washers” of this section). The multifunction lever is fitted on the left side of the steering column. Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever all the way up or down until the stop trigger; the left or right arrow on respectively the speedometer and tachometer instrument cluster, flashes to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. To activate lane change function, tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent. The turn signals (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off. This function is useful when overtaking or changing lanes. NOTE: • If either light remains on and does not flash, or flashes at a fast rate, check for a defective outside light. Understanding the Vehicle If an indicator on instrument cluster fails while moving the lever, then the turn indicator is probably defective. • The message that a turn signal is on will appear in the instrument cluster and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1.6 km (1 mile) with either turn signal on. High Beams and Flashing To switch on the high beams with the light switch in headlamp or "AUTO" position, shift the multifunction lever onward. A related telltale will illuminate on the tachometer. By pulling the lever backward (toward the steering wheel) you switch off the high beams and switch on the low beams. CAUTION! The high beams can only be switched on manually by pushing the multifunction lever forward. You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is released. WARNING! If the high beams are activated, they will turn on automatically every time the low beams are switched on either manually or automatically. We recommend therefore that you switch them off when they are no longer necessary and every time the twilight sensor deactivates the external lights. 3 Interior Lights Flashing occurs also with lights off if the ignition switch is RUN position. The interior and external approach lights turn on and off when entering/exiting the vehicle (see "Illuminated Entry/Exit" in section "Before Starting" for further information). The brightness of the lights can be manually adjusted with the regulator positioned beside the light switch when the ignition switch is out of OFF position, the light switch can be in any position and the system is in “NIGHT” mode (detected by the RLS solar sensor). 121 Understanding the Vehicle 3 122 To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been shifted to OFF. This occurs if the interior lights were turned on manually or by opening a door. The glove box light, share the same characteristics excepting the boot light. Courtesy Dimmable Lights The following dimmable courtesy lights, can be set with the regulation device: • instrument cluster dials and display; • dome light (front/rear); • internal door handle LED; • doors and steering wheel backlight controls LED; • front footrest light; • front seats night lighting. Dimmer Controls Dimmer controls are located beside the light switch. The regulation device rotates from position "0" upward and back downward performing stable and dimmable positions. The left regulator switch has 4 different positions: 0 Stable position: lower (OFF) level of the internal lighting. 1st Dimmable position: allows minimum to maximum brightness tuning of the instrument cluster dials, display, control switches and MTC’s backlight, including all displayed messages. Understanding the Vehicle 2nd 3rd Stable position: allows maximum brightness set. Stable position: allows to switch on the main and reading lights of the front dome light. The right regulator has 2 different positions: 0 Stable position: front (OFF) seat lighting and front dome light LED are turned off. 1st Dimmable position: allows minimum to maximum brightness tuning of the front dome light LED and the front seats lighting. Dome Lights The front and rear part of the dome, include each a central and two reading lights. The central light automatically turns on when one of the doors is opened and turns off when the door is closed (timed switching off). The light may be switched on manually by pressing the central button. The reading lights are controlled by the respective side buttons. If they are turned on by pressing the button, both central and reading lights will stay on for about 10 minutes after turning the engine off, and will then turn off gradually. When the exterior lights are switched on, the two night LEDs fitted on the side of the buttons will light up to facilitate use of the transmission lever and the central console. If one or more doors are opened, the front and rear dome lights will turn on for 27 seconds. If the door is closed before this time, the lights will dim and subsequently switch off after about 3 seconds. NOTE: The dome lights will also turn on by pressing the or button for centralized doors unlock and lock on the key fob RKE transmitter. See "Illuminated Entry/Exit" section "Before Starting" for further information. 3 In the event of a collision causing automatic interruption of fuel supply, the dome lights switch on automatically and remain lit for approx. 15 minutes. NOTE: The controls of the sunroof, of the HomeLink and the button to switch off Park Assist system can be found on the front dome console. Button to Switch off Passenger Compartment Lights In addition to specific switches to turn on and off the dome lights as previously described, on the front console there is a button that allows to turn off all these lights. 123 Understanding the Vehicle Hazard Warning Lights 3 Cargo Lights To illuminate the cargo area there are two lights inside the boot, one on each side. These lights turn on when boot lid is opened and turn off when it is closed. Press the indicated button on the central console to turn on the hazard warning lights. The operation is independent from the ignition key position. Press the button again to turn them off. When these lights are on, the direction indicators, the related arrow indicator on the instrument cluster and the button itself will flash. The external mirrors can be equipped also with approach and courtesy LEDs, lighting up when the vehicle entry/exit lights are activated. NOTE: When the hazard warning lights are activated, the direction indicators controls is disabled. If boot lid is left open for a long time, lights will turn off after 30 minutes to save battery charge. 124 simultaneously with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the hazard warning lights will also activate these LEDs. Integrated External Rear View Mirror Lights External mirrors are supplied with LED turn signals integrated on the support. The LED turn signal indicators flash Understanding the Vehicle Windshield Wipers and Washers The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition switch is placed in RUN or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column. A windshield washer low fluid level is indicated by the warning light and by the message on the instrument cluster. setting (see "Rain Sensing Wipers" paragraph in this chapter). • For low speed wiper operation (stable position "LO"): rotate the end of the multifunction control lever forward to the first trigger after the intermittent setting. • Rotate to the second trigger after the intermittent setting for high-speed (stable position HI) wiper operation. • Rotate the end of the lever downward to the "MIST" position to activate a single wipe cycle. The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever. • To turn the wipers off rotate the lever to "OFF". CAUTION! • Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. The windshield wipers may be damaged if the wiper control is left in any position other than "OFF". • In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, the wiper motor may be damaged when the vehicle is restarted. • Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, the wiper motor may be damaged. 3 Rain Sensing Wipers To refill the fluid, see "Maintenance Procedures" in section "Maintenance and Care". Windshield Wipers • Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of the four settings to activate the automatic intermittent This feature detects moisture on the windshield through an internal rear view mirror integrated sensor, which automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to adjust the detection system. First wiper delay position is the least sensitive, and fourth wiper delay 125 Understanding the Vehicle 3 position is the most sensitive. Third position should be used for normal rain conditions. The rain sense wipers will automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of detected moisture sensed by a particular area of the windshield. Place the wiper switch in the “OFF” position when you do not want to use the automatic intermittent system. The rain sensing feature can be turned on and off using the MTC+ System, see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information. the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature is below 0°C, To resume, set the automatic feature on the multifunction lever, start the engine and drive or wait until the outside temperature rises above freezing. • Wipe inhibit with transmission in N (Neutral) position: the rain sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position, the transmission shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position and the vehicle speed is less than 8 km/h (5 mph). To resume, set the multifunction lever to the automatic function or move the shift lever out of N (Neutral). Wipers Blades Maintenance When the wiper arms are in the rest position it is not possible to check or replace the blades (Service position) as they are folded under the hood. To service the blades it is necessary to shift the multifunction lever to “OFF” and the ignition switch to OFF position. Shift the control lever within 15 seconds to the "MIST" position (forward rotation of the twist switch) and release. The blades are brought in a position enabling the opening of the wiper arms and change of the blades. Headlights On with Wipers CAUTION! • The rain sensing feature may not function properly due to ice or dried salt water on the windshield. • Use on the windshield of RainX® or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance. The rain sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the following conditions: • Low temperature wipe inhibit: the rain sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is in RUN position, 126 When activating this function, the headlights will light up approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the light switch is placed in "AUTO" position. In addition, the headlights switch off when the wipers are turned off (position "OFF") if they were previously turned by using this function. Powering on Headlights with wipers can be activated and deactivated with the MTC+ System, see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information. It is possible to use the "MIST" position for a maximum of 3 times within two minutes, corresponding to different the blades positions on the windshield. When completed bring the ignition switch in RUN: the arms will reposition. If necessary move the multifunction Understanding the Vehicle Interior Features lever to other required operating positions. WARNING! Operate or service the wiper blades without deactivating the wipers (“OFF” position) leaving the ignition switch in RUN can be dangerous for the operator since the rain sensor may suddenly activate the wipers. Always use “Service” position for any intervention on the wiper blades. Windshield Washers To use the washer, push the end of the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering column) and hold it as long as washer spray is desired. If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the automatic intermittent range, the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the previously selected intermittent interval. If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off (OFF) the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off. Electric Power Outlets WARNING! • Do not start the windscreen washer during the cold months until the windscreen has warmed up. If it has not warmed up, the liquid could freeze on the glass and block your view. • Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use. Head Windshield Washer Nozzles (for versions/markets, where provided) To avoid fluid freezing inside at low external temperatures, the fluid supply nozzles can be heated by internal resistors. The vehicle is equipped with three or four 12 Volt (13 Amp) electric power outlets, one or two (if you use as power outlet the socket of the cigarette lighter) available for each front seat, rear seat passengers and one fitted in the boot. In vehicles equipped with "Smoking Kit" one of the front seat electric power outlets is replaced with a cigarette lighter. In vehicles with "Comfort Luxury" rear seats, there is an extra 12 V power outlet inside the rear console storage compartment and others in the rear of the reclining shelf between the seats. All power outlets are supplied only when the engine is started or the ignition device set on ACC or RUN. Power outlets are protected by a fuse. Insert an accessory plug into the power outlets to ensure proper operation. Otherwise, check the matching fuse integrity, see "Fuse Replacement" in section "Maintenance and Care" for further information. 3 127 Understanding the Vehicle CAUTION! • Do not plug in accessories that 3 exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Damages caused by improper use of the power outlet are not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Replacing the fuses that protect power outlets with others of higher amperage, there is the risk of fire. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lids when the plug is not used and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. 128 Power Outlet inside the Cup Holder Compartment (for Cup Holder with Cover only) To access the power outlet inside the cup holder beside the transmission lever, press the cover as indicated to open completely. Remove the cigarette lighter (if equipped) and use its socket as power outlet. WARNING! High power consumption items plugged into this outlet for long periods may discharge the battery and/or prevent the engine from starting. Power Outlets inside the Central Console To access the power outlet located inside the glove box of the central console you need to open the halflids as indicated in the following paragraph. Rear Power Outlets If the vehicle is equipped with bench seats, a 12 V power outlet inside the armrest between the seats, is available Understanding the Vehicle for rear seat passengers (see “Rear Seats” in this section). CAUTION! • Use light and shatterproof containers. • Do not forcefully push unsuitable containers into the cup holders to prevent damage to the containers. • Do not store hot drinks. "Comfort Luxury" rear seats A 12 V power outlet both inside the central console and in the rear of the reclining shelf, are available for rear seats passengers (see "Comfort Luxury Rear Seats" in this section). Power Outlet inside the Boot The power outlet is positioned on the right side of the boot compartment. Cup Holders for Front Passengers The front cup holders are located beside the transmission lever and may be with access cover or at sight (optional, only for left-hand drive version). To access the cup holder, push the cover as shown in the picture and it will open completely. 3 Cup Holders "Comfort Luxury" rear seats The vehicle is equipped with several cup holders. Version with Cover 129 Understanding the Vehicle NOTE: Vehicles equipped with the four-zone air conditioning system, are not equipped with cup holders inside the central console. 3 Version with Cover The storage and passenger compartment share the same air conditioning even though you may exclude the air conditioning of the cup holder compartment by moving the indicated button. At Sight version Pressing the indicated button on the central console, the half-lids will rise completely enabling access to the inner compartment where the two cup holders are located. 130 To close one or both of the half-lids, push them down to the locking position. Cup Holders for Rear Passengers Two cup holders are available in the frontside of the rear seats central armrest, press the button as shown in the picture to access them. Understanding the Vehicle On vehicles equipped with the "Comfort Luxury" rear seats, the cup holders are located in the front and rear central storage compartment (see "Comfort Luxury Rear Seats" in this section for further information). NOTE: • To prevent damage to the sliding mechanism, do not force the drawer into the extracted position. • Before closing the compartment door, ensure that the drawer is fully back in its seat. "Comfort Luxury" rear seats Multimedia Ports and Phone Housing Compartment Multimedia ports and the sliding drawer for the phone are located inside the dashboard compartment below the climate control panel. To access this compartment check that cup holder cover is closed, then push the door as indicated in picture: it will open completely. If needed, gently pull out the drawer until it stops at the very first position. In case of emergency pull out the drawer completely. The AUX auxiliary port features: • typical input impedance between AUX-IN and AUX_REF: 13 Kohm; • max. applicable voltage: 0.75 Vrms at 1 kHz; • input compatible only with 3.5 mm jack connectors (not included). Any player with these characteristics and analogue audio output (headset output type) can be served by the MTC+ System. The system can recognise the connection to a player outlet autonomously, by enabling access to the audio functions connected to this source. This USB input can be used for data exchange and charge of the connected source (refer to the "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)" guide for further details). Through this USB input is possible to recharge the connected device for about an hour from when the ignition device is turned OFF ("Active Charging" feature). When this feature is enabled, the USB port will be backlight. In the dashboard compartment of the central console there is also a SD memory card input. Once inserted into the slot, to extract it press lightly on the card. Another USB port is present for rear seat passengers, inside the armrest between the rear seats. To access the USB port, open the outside cover. 3 131 Understanding the Vehicle • The "Rear Seat Entertainment" option, includes an AUX and a USB port in the rear of each front seat (see "Rear Seat Entertainment (optional)" in this chapter). iPod® Connection 3 This USB port allow charging the connected source. Following conditions can create USB inputs damage or malfunction: • Usage of non-original lighting cables. • Usage of defective rechargeable devices (smartphone, tablet, mass storage devices or other generic USB devices). • ONLY insert media (eg., USB or SD card), into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. • Usage of damaged or defective cables. NOTE: • Optional "Comfort Luxury" rear seats are equipped with a USB port beneath the reclining shelf between the seats (see "Comfort Luxury Rear Seats" in this section). 132 An iPod® can be connected to the system via USB and AUX ports by means of a special cable (optional). The MTC+ will then control the following functions: play, pause, fast forward, rewind, next track, previous track, random or repeat mode, selection and navigation of playlist/genre/singer/album/Podcast. CAUTION! Do not leave your USB device, iPod® or an external audio source in the vehicle for extended period of time: extreme temperatures and humidity can occur in the vehicle. Sun Visors Sun visors can be folded to the front and to the side of the vehicle. To move the visor laterally, lower and release it from its catch as indicated. By lowering the visor you can access the courtesy mirror with incorporated light illuminating automatically (with the ignition switch in RUN) by raising the mirror protective cover. Before raising the visor, close the mirror cover. A paper holder is fitted inside each sun visor. Understanding the Vehicle Handholds and Cloth Hooks Handholds are fitted above the doors. Once grabbed, they will lower until the block position. When released, a return spring will bring them back to the original position. 3 Removable Ashtray and Lighter (optional) The removable ashtray with cover for front seats passengers can be inserted inside the front cup holder. The rear seat passengers can use the removable ashtray by inserting it into the rear doors pocket. On vehicles equipped with rear seats "Comfort Luxury" smoking kit, lighter and ashtray are fitted inside the center console between the seats. "Comfort Luxury" rear seats Cigarette Lighter Use Pressing the central button activate the cigarette lighter. After about 20 seconds the button returns automatically to the initial position and stops the heating: now the cigarette lighter is ready for use. Rear handholds also include a cloth hook. CAUTION! After use, always make sure that the cigarette lighter is switched off. WARNING! • The cigarette lighter reaches high temperatures. Handle it carefully and do not allow children to use to avoid risk of fire and injury! • The cigarette lighter may not be used as a power outlet. 133 Understanding the Vehicle Map Pockets Front seats are fitted with map pockets, on the rear of the seatbacks, and accessible by rear passengers. CAUTION! Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the map pockets. Tables (optional) Tables are fitted in the back of the front seats. • Opening: press the upper button and lower the table until the supporting mechanism snap lock. • Closing: lift the table until the upper button snap lock. 3 CAUTION! As the table is not equipped with cup holders, do not place open drinks containers on the tables during the journey in order not to damage or stain the surrounding upholstery if they fall over. WARNING! • When the table is not used, it should Rear Seat Entertainment Option be closed to prevent rear seat passengers from being hit by its edges and corners. • When closing the table, hold it up carefully in order to avoid crushing your fingers. Rear Seat Entertainment (optional) This optional includes the installation of a screen in the rear of each front 134 Understanding the Vehicle seatback and a remote control to connect with an external video source and any audio devices. iPad Holder (Genuine Accessories) The Service Network can provide you with all information about the "Maserati iPad Holder" mounted on the rear of the front seatbacks, available in the “Genuine Accessories” range. Cargo Area WARNING! To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts. 3 Vehicle Load Carrying Capacity Inside the map pocket on the rear of the seat-back there are two leds to illuminate the RSE system outlets. For the use of this equipment, see the "Rear Seat Entertainment" user guide on MTC+ screen. The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the vehicle certification label positioned on the rear right hand door's ledge. The information indicated on the label concerns passengers and luggage loading operations. Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the 135 Understanding the Vehicle Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), both front and rear. The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR indicated on the label. 3 Vehicle Loading WARNING! • Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way the vehicle steers, handles and the way the brakes operate. • Never drive with the boot lid open. Exhaust gases can enter the passenger compartment. • Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visibility or become dangerous in a sudden stop or collision. The boot is the most suitable place to load bulky and heavy objects onboard the vehicle. The maximum allowable load on the floor of the boot is 200 kg (440 lb). To load your vehicle properly, store heavier items below and be sure you 136 distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before start driving as they could move during the trip. Light objects can be stored in the net pocket on the right side of the boot compartment. To fasten heavy and bulky luggage inside the compartment a luggage net with hooks anchored to the floor is available upon request. The hooking eyelets of the net are positioned on the floor and on the rear wall of the boot compartment. NOTE: The Maserati Service Network can provide you with information about the available "Genuine Accessories" for the boot compartment. Loading with Rear Seatbacks Folded Down The 60/40 split-folding rear seat with folding option on the smaller side only, provides cargo-carrying versatility. The seatback fold down easily by pulling tab between the seatback and the bolster. Understanding the Vehicle • Secure the rear hook of the bag to the eyelet located on the rear wall of the boot compartment. • Wrap the belt around the seat back of the folded seat and fasten the belt buckle. • Tighten the belt as much as necessary to prevent the bag from moving. The seat folded down, provides a continuous nearly-flat extension of the load floor able to accommodate large sized equipment and objects (such as the "Maserati Ski and Snowboard Bag") that may not fit with the normal dimensions of the boot. Sky and Snowboard Bag Housing To safely store the Ski and Snowboard Bag: • Tilt forward the short seatback side. latched seat could cause serious injury. • The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and use proper restraint system. 3 When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap. WARNING! • Make sure that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly 137 Understanding the Vehicle Power Sunroof with Sunshade (if equipped) 3 The sunroof is power controlled and can only be operated with the ignition switch in RUN position. It can slide lengthways and be raised at the rear (tilting). By opening the sunroof a front flap rises automatically in order to deviate the air flow. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from the vehicle if the sunroof is open. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too. • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never insert fingers, other body parts, or any object through the roof opening. The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open. WARNING! • Improper use of the sunroof can The power sunroof controls are located between the sun visors on the overhead console. The right two buttons controls the sunroof movement, whereas the left button controls the lifting of the sunroof for venting. 138 be dangerous, even if it features a finger-trap prevention system. Before and during the sunroof operation, always make sure that passengers are not exposed to the risk of injuries caused by the moving sunroof or by personal objects dragged or hit by the moving sunroof. • Never leave children in a vehicle with the key fob RKE transmitter in the passenger compartment. CAUTION! • In the event of rain, always close the sunroof to prevent water infiltrations from staining the fabric/leather upholstery. • Do not open the sunroof if there is ice on it: risk of damage. Slide Opening Sunroof • Full automatic express opening Press the right rear button for more than half second and the sunroof will open automatically regardless of any previous position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. During this operation, if any sunroof button is pressed, the sunroof will stop. • Full or partial manual opening To open the sunroof manually press the right rear button for less than Understanding the Vehicle half second to move step by step the sunroof panel. Venting Sunroof Press and release the left button, and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called "Express Vent", and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During this opening operation, any movement of the button will stop the sunroof. Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during express close operation. If an obstruction is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. If this occurs, remove the obstruction then press the right front button and release to express close. NOTE: If three consecutive attempts to close in express mode the sunroof result in pinch protect reversals, the fourth attempt will be manual, with pinch protect feature disabled. Pinch Protect Override If any obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing the sunroof, press the right front button and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position. NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while pressing the right front button. Closing and Opening the Power Sunroof with RKE Transmitter and Ignition Off When the ignition switch is in OFF position, if the sunroof is open, it can be closed together with the windows by pressing the button on the RKE transmitter (refer to "Power Windows" in section "Before Starting"). • Press and release the button. • Press a second time the button and keep it pressed until the sunroof is completely closed. To open completely the sunroof from the outside, press in the same way the button on the RKE transmitter. Wind Buffeting and can be minimised. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimise the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimise the buffeting. Ignition Off Operation The power sunroof controls will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is in OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The ignition system timing can be set using the MTC+ System (see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). 3 Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel. NOTE: To manually unlock the power sunroof (if equipped), please contact the Service Network. Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure or a helicopter-type sound. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence 139 Understanding the Vehicle HomeLink® (for versions/markets, where provided) ® 3 HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters operating the automatic devices that open garage doors and gates, enable/disable the lighting or security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicle's 12 Volt battery. The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the overhead console designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® warning light is located behind the buttons. WARNING! • Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance. • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. Before You Start Programming HomeLink® NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the vehicle security alarm is active (see "Vehicle security alarm" in section "Before Starting"). 140 Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming. For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radiofrequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system. Before starting programming it is necessary to erase the standard codes memorized on the HomeLink® device during the production phase. To erase such codes: • place the ignition device in the RUN position without starting the engine; • press and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) until the warning light starts flashing (after approximately 20 seconds); • release the buttons. NOTE: • Erasing the standard codes should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not perform this operation to program additional buttons. • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. Understanding the Vehicle • Release immediately the Homelink® button you want to program. • Continue holding the hand-held transmitter button until the warning light starts flashing quickly; then release the button. The quick flashing light indicates that the channel with the new frequency has been acquired and programmed correctly by the HomeLink® system. System with Devices Provided with Rolling Codes Programming the Hand-held Transmitters Manufactured after 1995 These devices can be identified by the "LEARN" or "TRAIN" setting button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door/gate opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. • Place the ignition device to the RUN position without starting the engine. • Place the hand-held transmitter 5 - 30 cm (1 to 3 inches) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program. • Simultaneously press the Homelink® button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button. NOTE: The distance necessary between the portable hand-held transmitter and the HomeLink® in the vehicle depends on the system you wish to program. Probably it will be necessary to try several times. Upon every attempt, keep the setting position for at least 15 seconds before trying again. Synchronising the Rolling Codes At the end of the previously-described programming, if the HomeLink® has been programmed for a rolling code system, it will be necessary to synchronise it to ensure its correct operation. • Locate the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" setting button of the opening motor. Firmly press it and then release it. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. NOTE: You have 30 seconds to initiate the next step after the setting button has been pressed. • Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds and then release it. • Repeat this operation a second time. If the garage door opening device activates, the programming/ synchronization phase is complete. 3 NOTE: If the garage door opening device does not activate, press the button a third time for two seconds and then release it to complete the programming/synchronization phase. • To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button To reprogramme a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps: • Place the ignition device to the RUN position without starting the engine. 141 Understanding the Vehicle • Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. • Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming the hand-held transmitters” from second step and follow all remaining steps. 3 System with Devices Without Rolling Code Programming the Hand-held Transmitters Manufactured before 1995 • Turn the ignition device to the RUN position without starting the engine. • Place the hand-held transmitter 5 to 30 cm (1 to 3 inches) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program. • Simultaneously press and hold both buttons until the warning light starts flashing quickly; then release both buttons. The quick flashing light indicates that the channel with the new frequency has been acquired and programmed correctly by the HomeLink® system. NOTE: The distance necessary between the portable hand-held transmitter and the HomeLink® in the vehicle depends on the system you wish to program. Probably it will be necessary to try 142 several times. Upon every attempt, keep the setting position for at least 15 seconds before trying again. etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. • Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button. If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete. To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. Do not erase the channels. It is advisable to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle. To erase the channels press and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) until the warning light starts flashing (after approximately 20 seconds). The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when the vehicle security alarm is active (see “Vehicle security alarm” in section “Before Starting”). Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps: • Place the ignition device to the RUN position without starting the engine. • Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. • Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming the hand-held transmitters” from second step and follow all remaining steps. Using HomeLink® To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, Security Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble while programming HomeLink®, here are some of the most common solutions: • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter. • Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for a rolling code. • Did you unplug the device for programming and forgot to plug it back in? If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. Understanding the Vehicle Radio Frequency Transmitter Regulatory Information The "Regulatory Information" for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section "Services" on the website www.maserati.com. 3 143 Understanding the Vehicle Air Conditioning Distribution 3 A/C Dual-zone 144 Understanding the Vehicle 3 A/C Four-zone 145 Understanding the Vehicle Adjustable and fixed air vents allow passengers to achieve the optimal comfort conditions. Fixed Air Vents 3 • The fixed vents under the dashboard are aimed at ventilating the lower part of the front passenger compartment. • The fixed vents, positioned on the upper part of the dashboard, beneath the windshield and above the front part of the front door panels are meant to guarantee the demisting and defrosting of the windshield and the side windows. A/C Four-zone floor vent Adjustable Air Vents • The ventilation of the lower part of the rear passengers compartment is made by means of fixed vents positioned under the front seats and they are specific for dual-zone and four-zone A/C system. A/C Dual-zone floor vent 146 • The adjustable air vents are located at the center and at the side ends of the dashboard. They have the purpose of ventilating the upper part of the passenger compartment. Two more vents, adjustable by the rear passengers, are placed at the rear end of the central console. • Optional four-zone air conditioning provides additional adjustable vents on the side pillars between the doors. These vents can be adjusted in vertical and horizontal direction, by operating on the central paddle 1, as indicated in the following pictures. The rotor 2, located near each air vent, allows to regulate the airflow, or to close the vent. Orienting these vents it is also possible to demist the rear-door windows. Understanding the Vehicle 3 A/C Four-zone side pillar vent NOTE: In order to avoid the obstruction of the windshield defrost vents, it is recommended not to place objects on the dashboard. 147 Understanding the Vehicle 148 4 - Dashboard Instruments and Controls Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 MTC+ "Controls" Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 MTC+ Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Dashboard Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Phone and Voice Controls on Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 149 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Instrument Cluster The instrument cluster is divided into three main areas displaying information, signs and text and/or icon messages. A - Analogue speedometer. It indicates the vehicle speed. B - Analogue tachometer. C - TFT display. In this area the odometer display shows the total distance covered by the vehicle. 4 V8 - Gasoline NOTE The image shows the instrument cluster before starting the engine. Speedometer and tachometer display the main warning lights (see “Warning and Indicator Lights on Analogue Instruments” in this chapter). The other warning lights are displayed on the TFT display together with mode and drive function indicators (see “TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Lights of Set Modes/Functions” in this chapter). V6 - Gasoline, V6 - Gasoline - AWD V6 - Diesel 150 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Warning and Indicator Lights on Speedometer Following tell tales are displayed on the speedometer, and related messages are visible for 5 seconds on the central sector of the display, unless otherwise indicated (see “TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Lights of Set Modes/Functions” paragraph in this chapter). Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. Under normal conditions, this indicator light should switch on when the ignition switch is in RUN position and switch off as soon as the engine is started. This is a sign of the indicator light working properly. If the indicator remains lighted up or switches on while driving, there is a failure in the fuel supply/ignition and emission control systems. The failure could cause high exhaust emissions, loss of performance, poor vehicle handling and high consumption levels. Under these conditions you can proceed slowly without forcing the engine or driving at high speeds. The indicator light will switch off if the problem is solved. The error will be registered by the system in any case. CAUTION! When the ignition switch is in the • RUN position and if the indicator light does not switch on or if it switches on while driving, contact the Service Network as soon as possible. • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss may occur. Immediate service is required. Left Turn Signal Indicator Light The indicator lights up when the left direction indicators or the hazard lights are turned on. The indicator light will flash at the same frequency of the turn indicators and is controlled by the stalk switch lever. If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle drives for more than 1.6 km (1 mile) with either turn signal on, a continuous sound will alert the driver to turn the signal off. If the indicator flashes at a rapid ratel, check for a defective exterior light bulb. 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Light This warning light is connected to the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Under normal conditions, the warning light should illuminate when the ignition switch is in RUN and should go off as soon as the engine is started. If the warning light remains lit or illuminates while driving, the pressure of one or more tires is too low and a message will be displayed. 151 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 The TPMS malfunction indicator is connected to the low tire pressure monitoring light. When the system detects a malfunction, the monitoring light and the related message will flash for approximately one minute and then remain lit. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction lasts. When the malfunction indicator lights up, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure correctly. Please refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in section "Driving" for further information. Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) Malfunction Warning Light This light, and its related message, indicate possible malfunctions of the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is in RUN position and may stay on for 4 seconds. If the ABS light remains lit or turns on while driving, the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and requires service. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the 152 warning light is switched off. If the ABS light turns on while driving, or if it does not switch on when the ignition switch is in RUN position, please visit as soon as possible a Service Center in order to restore the Anti-Lock brakes functions. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light The ESC activation/malfunction indicator light on the instrument cluster will display when the ignition switch is in RUN position. It should switch off by starting the engine. If the light stays on with the engine running, there is a malfunction in the ESC system. If the light still stays on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven for several kilometers at more than 48 km/h (30 mph) speed, visit the Service Network as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and restored. NOTE: Each time the ignition switch is in RUN: • The ESC OFF indicator light and the ESC activation/malfunction indicator light illuminates temporarily. • The ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously. The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive by solving the problem that caused the ESC activation. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light This indicator notifies that the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is disabled; the linked message will be displayed. Warning and Indicator Lights on Tachometer Following tell tales are displayed on the tachometer and related messages are visible for 5 seconds on the central sector of the display, unless otherwise indicated (see "TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Lights of Set Modes/Functions" paragraph in this chapter). Dashboard Instruments and Controls restart the engine normally with the ignition device while holding down the brake pedal. See chapter “Normal Starting of the Engine” in section “Driving” for further information. Gasoline Diesel Start&Stop Active Indicator This telltale indicates that the engine has been switched off automatically by the Start&Stop system. When the engine starts again, the telltale will switch off. If the telltale during an automatic engine shutdown (AutoStop) phase starts flashing, it will be necessary to Rear Fog Light Indicator This indicator lights up when the rear fog lights are switched on. High Beam Indicator This indicator lights up when the high beams are switched on or when blinking. Brake Indicator Light This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake engagement. If the brake light illuminates the parking brake may be engaged, the brake fluid level mat be low or a problem with the anti-lock brake system (ABS) reservoir may have occurred. In all the above situations, a related message will be displayed. If the light still illuminates when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, there could be a brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the brake booster detected by the ABS/ESC system. If this occurs, the light will remain lit until the problem has been solved. If the problem concerns the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when engaging the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop of the vehicle. Inefficiency of one of the dual brake system cycle is indicated by the brake warning light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a certain level. The light will remain lit until the problem has been solved. If a brake failure occurs, visit the Service Network as soon as possible in order to check up the brake system. In the event of an Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) failure, both the brake indicator light and the ABS light illuminate. Immediate repair of the ABS system is required. Functioning of the brake warning light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from OFF to RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately 2 seconds. 4 153 Dashboard Instruments and Controls The light should switch off unless the parking brake is engaged or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light system overhauled by the Service Network. The light will also switch on when the parking brake is engaged with the ignition switch in RUN position. This light only indicates the brake is engaged but not the clamping force of the parking brake to the wheels. 4 WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on can be very dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed, resulting in increased braking distances and the risk of an accident. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at the Service Network. Air bag Indicator Light This light will illuminate for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is in RUN. If the light does not illuminate while starting the engine, stays lit, or switches on while driving, have the system checked at the Service Network as soon as possible. In the latter case, the message will remain displayed: to hide it, press on the steering wheel right side. 154 If the indicator flashes at a fast rate, check for a defective outside indicator light bulb. See "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) – Air bags" in section "Before Starting" for further information. WARNING! If the warning light remains ON or if it does not illuminate or illuminates while driving, contact your Service Network as soon as possible. Right Turn Signal Indicator This indicator lights up when the right direction indicators or the hazard lights are switched on. The indicator will flash at the same frequency of the turn indicators and is controlled by the turn signal lever. If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle drives for more than 1.6 km (1 mile) with either turn signal on, a continuous sound will advise the driver to turn the signal off. Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is in RUN, the seat belt reminder light will light up for a few seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, you will hear an acoustic signal if one or both front seat belts are unbuckled. The SBR system monitors the condition of the seat belt buckled and unbuckled for all the passengers in the vehicle. The system visualizes this warning light inside the tachometer and the state of each seat belt represented by the same symbol in red or green color on the upper part of the TFT. After the bulb check or while driving, if driver or front passenger seat belt is unbuckled, together with the acoustic signal the seat belt reminder light will light up. WARNING! Maserati urges you to use the seat belts correctly fastened and adjusted at all times. Correct use of the seat belts can help reduce the risk of serious injury in the event of an Dashboard Instruments and Controls accident. Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges: they could tear. Do not pin anything to the seat belts. This could reduce their initial strength and cause them to tear in the event of a crash. Refer to "Occupants Restraint Systems" in section "Before Starting" for further information. 2 3 TFT Display: Menus and Settings When operating, the TFT Display is divided into sectors including menus and sub-menus, running data, warning lights and messages. The different sectors of the display layout are rendered in the following picture. 4 5 6 7 10 11 Fuel Gauge. 9 Main area. Position within the submenus and scroll arrows (example: 1 of 5). There can be maximum 9 displayable submenu positions. When the number of submenu points exceeds 9, the points are replaced by a numerical value within the scroll arrows. Menu Instruction (hideable). Shift lever position (P, R, N, D, M, 1, 2, 3...). Gear shift indicator light and paddle (if equipped). Hard/soft suspension indicator light. Complete Odometer. 8 1 Selectable information (data, time, outside temperature, compass, etc.). When setting the "Auto High Beam Assist" feature, in the right portion of this area is displayed the respective indicator. Main menu number and titles with scroll arrows (the number and the main menu title is always visible while scrolling the menu, and for the next five seconds). Submenu Titles. 12 Engine Temperature Gauge. 13* Reconfigurable quadrant for red telltales. 14* Reconfigurable quadrant for amber telltales. 15 Low beam headlights/position lights. 16 Speed Warning indicator (dynamic text). 17 NORMAL, SPORT and I.C.E. modes indicator light. 18* Combined telltale of ACC, LKA and HAS status. They are displayed in the cluster when one (or more) of these systems is enabled and a different menu from "Drive Assist" is displayed in the main area. 19* CC and ACC status function. 4 20* Traffic Sign Assist icons: conditioned and unconditioned speed limit and/or overtaking ban. See "Traffic Sign Assist TSA" in section "Driving" for further details. 21 Electric Parking Brake (EPB) failure warning light. (*) See "TFT Display: Warning/ Indicator Lights of Set Modes/ Functions" in this chapter. 155 Dashboard Instruments and Controls The display background may change according to the type of message displayed. 4 • Blue colour: normal conditions. • Yellow colour: low-critical warning. • Red colour: high-critical warning. Press and release the multifunction switch in the and arrow directions to scroll upwards and downwards the main menu titles. The Main Screen area in sector 1 (Menu Information) will be updated and the selected title will be shown in sector 3 (Main Menu Title). Press and release the switch ( ) to enter the information screens or a submenu. Keep the switch ( ) for 2 seconds to restore the selected/ visualized functions. The selected sub-menu title will be displayed in sector 4 (Submenu Title). When the driver selects a main menu page and the Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) feature on "Controls" page of MTC+ is set off (see "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in this section), main menu title, its number and the scroll arrows will disappear after two seconds. When driver selects a main menu, if the TSA feature is set on and a sign and/or a speed limit icon is displayed in the sector 20, only the main menu number and the scroll arrows remain displayed in the sector 3 left side. TFT Display: Main and Submenu Operate the controls on the right side of the steering wheel to scroll, modify and program the Main- and Submenu. Within a submenu, press and release the switch in the and arrow directions allow to scroll the menu. Press the button to return to the main menu from an item of interest or from an information screen. 156 TFT Display: Main Menu & Submenu Content Overview 1. MAIN MENU • View speed in km/h or mph 2. VEHICLE INFO • Tire Pressure • Transmission Temperature • Oil Temperature Dashboard Instruments and Controls • Oil Pressure (Gasoline only) • Battery Voltage • AdBlue Level (Diesel only) • Maintenance 3. DRIVE MODE • Drive Mode - Torque Distribution - Powertrain status - ESC status Suspension stiffness status 4. DRIVER ASSIST • Shows the status of any active driver assist systems: CC, ACC, LKA and HAS. Graphics in the main area of TFT display only refer to ACC, LKA and HAS systems • LKA (LaneSense) status 5. FUEL ECONOMY • Average, Range, Current gauge 6. TRIP • Trip A: Average, Avg. speed, Elapsed time, Distance • Trip B: Average, Avg. speed, Elapsed time, Distance 7. START&STOP • Messages relating to the Start&Stop function 8. AUDIO • Information concerning audio status according to current media source, track and station. 9. STORED MESSAGES 10. VEHICLE SETTINGS • Speed Warning: enables, disables or sets the speed limit represented in the dynamic icon on the TFT display • Auto apply Off/On of the Electric Parking Brake • Passenger Air bag enable/disable • Screen Setup - Upper Left - Upper Right - Main Menu: Line 1 - Main Menu: Line 2 - Main Menu: Line 3 - MPH km/h Display On/Off - Main Menu Navigation - Outline Colouring - Key-On Display - Key-Off Display - Defaults TFT Display: Messages on Main Display Area activated them remains active) and can be reviewed from the "Stored Messages" main menu item. Example of this message type is the one shown in the picture. 4 • Unstored Messages Unstored Messages This message type is displayed until the condition that activated the message is cleared (see example in picture). The main display area also displays "pop up" messages. These pop up messages fall into several categories: • Five-Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message appears on the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the condition that 157 Dashboard Instruments and Controls • Unstored Messages with Ignition Switch in RUN This message type is displayed until the ignition switch is in RUN position. An example of this message type is the one shown in picture. While approaching the turn, further pop ups will be displayed starting at 400 m (437 yd) from the turning point and the countdown to 0 meters. 4 • Five-Second Unstored Messages When appropriate conditions occur, this type of message appears on the main display area for five seconds then returns to the previous screen. • Five-Second-displayed Navigation Messages Messages When the navigation menu is enabled on the MTC+, information pop-ups will be displayed for 5 seconds while changing direction or approaching a turning point. On highway, the first pop up will be displayed at 3.2 km (2 miles) from the turn, on roadway, at 1.6 km (1 mile). 158 While getting closer to a turn, the sections referred to the distance already travelled will switch off while the ones referred to the distance yet to be travelled will remain on. NOTE: • Popup boxes might take up the space normally used to display main menu items and relevant submenus. • The distance indicated under the road name is expressed in the unit of measure set by the user. 1. MAIN MENU Press and release the multifunction switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. Pressing and releasing the switch ( ) will toggle the unit of measure between km/h or mph. Further to speed, the main area can indicate three lines that can be set to the same options and in the top right or top left area. When these three lines are present and turn-by-turn navigation is on, main menu area will automatically show navigation information. For further details, please refer to "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)" guide. Press and release the button to return to the main menu. 2. VEHICLE INFO Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. Press and release the switch ( ) to access the submenus. Dashboard Instruments and Controls Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions to scroll through the following information displays pressing and releasing the switch ( ) to display the selected information. • Tire Pressure Indicates the pressure of each single tire (see example below). Please refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in section "Driving" for further information. Displays both the level of reducing agent AdBlue® contained in the tank located in the luggage compartment and, if there is the need to refuel, the remaining range. For details on refilling or top-up, see chapter “Adding reducing agent AdBlue® (Diesel only)” in section "Driving". 4 Diesel • Transmission Temperature Displays the current transmission temperature level. • Oil Temperature Displays the current engine oil temperature level. The gauge fill and telltale (if applicable) are highlighted in red to emphasise that the parameter is at a critical level. NOTE: This strategy is also applicable in the Transmission Temperature and Oil Pressure information screen. • Maintenance (service) Displays mileage and days remaining to the execution of scheduled maintenance service. • Oil Pressure (Gasoline only) Displays the current motor oil pressure level. • Battery Voltage Displays the current battery voltage. • AdBlue Level (Diesel only) 159 Dashboard Instruments and Controls For any color-coded components, color depends on settings of: • ESC: identified by wheel color. • PowerTrain: identified by engine + transmission unit color. • Suspension : identified by the color of the four shock absorbers. 4 160 Press and release the button to return to the main menu. 3. DRIVE MODE Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. The screen graphically shows the Drive Mode: I.C.E., NORMAL, SPORT and (Suspension) set by the user through the relevant controls. The display main area will show vehicle image with parameters and color-coded components affected by the selected drive mode. The image will show the following parameters: • selected drive mode (in the example shown: I.C.E.); • torque distribution percentage indicated under the arrow in front of the wheels (on AWD version only). NOTE: To set drive parameters according to own needs and path, refer to chapter "Drive mode" in section "Driving". Press and release the button to return to the main menu. 4. DRIVER ASSIST Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. • Active Driver Assist System The screen graphically shows current status of driver assist systems: the figure shows an example with ACC engaged and HAS set. For every drive mode, function (ESC, PowerTrain and Suspension) and color of the components shown are matched as follows: • LKA (LaneSense) Status Vehicle is delivered with LKA in off state set on MTC+ system, page "Controls". You can enable LKA in the ”Visual” only or "Visual & Haptic" mode by Dashboard Instruments and Controls turning on the function via MTC+ system soft-key and by changing your selection in the dedicated submenu. The setting chosen will latch over key cycles. NOTE: To set these systems, see chapters "Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC", "Highway Assist - HAS" and "Lane Keeping Assist - LKA" in section "Driving". Press and release the button to return to the main menu. 5. FUEL ECONOMY Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. The screen will display the following: • Current Fuel Economy in L/100km or MPH Shows the instantaneous fuel economy. During AutoStop stage performed by the Start&Stop system (see "Normal Starting of the Engine" in section "Driving"), a dash will be displayed instead of the value. • Range in km or miles Shows the range since the last fuel average reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read "Reset" or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset. • Fuel Economy Average in L/100km or MPH Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. Press the multifunction switch ( ) for 1 second and release it to reset the "Fuel Economy Average". When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read "Reset" or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset. Press and release the button to return to the main menu. 6. TRIP Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. 4 For each of the "Trip A" and "Trip B" sub-menus the screen will display the following: • "Distance" traveled in km or miles. 161 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 Shows the total covered distance since the last reset. • "Average" consumption in l/100km or MPG. Shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset. • "Average" speed in km/h or MPH. Shows the average speed since the last reset. • "Elapsed Time" Shows the total time of travel since the last reset in "hours:minutes: seconds." Elapsed Time will increment when the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position. Press the multifunction switch ( ) for 1 second and release to reset "Trip A" or "Trip B". "Trip B" is reset after each key on/key off cycle. Press and release the button to return to the main menu. 7. START & STOP Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. With the ignition device in RUN position, the screen will display the status of the function (see example in picture). To change the status of the function, please see chapter 162 "Automatic Start&Stop System" of section "Driving". 8. AUDIO Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. The display will show the audio status (source and current audio track) as set on the MTC+. It is possible to display 5 lines of 15 alphanumeric characters. Displays Audio Statuses are: • AM: Station Number, provided with 2 info lines; • FM: Frequency, provided with 2 info lines; • DAB (digital radio) where available: number and station name, artist, song; • BTSA Bluetooth: folder, album, artist, song; • USB (Audio): USB, album, artist, current track or, if available, previous track, current track and next track; • USB: older, previous track, current track and next track; • SD Card (Audio): album, artist, previous track, current track and next track; • SD Card: folder, previous track, current track and next track; • AUX: name of source, “Device Connected” text; • No Signal: "No Signal Available" text; • Mute: symbol "Mute", the lines remain those displayed before the command "Mute". The different reception modes are identified by symbols, shown on the display above the info lines. The chart indicates their meaning. AM Dashboard Instruments and Controls FM AUX SD DAB (where available) Settings” in this section). On display, said details shall temporarily replace the ones on media source in use. Press and release the button to return to the main menu. 9. STORED MESSAGES Press and release the central switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. The system will either display the number of the stored messages (if any available) or “No Stored Messages” as shown in picture. USB • Many signals • Signal not available BTSA App Audio mute • Phone Call Details The display will show the information on incoming call if this feature is checkmarked on MTC+ (see “MTC+ Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions to scroll the stored messages. When the number of messages exceeds 9, the submenu points will be replaced by a numerical value indicating the message number. Press and release the switch ( ) to view the selected message (see example in the picture). Press and release the button to return to the main menu. 4 10. VEHICLE SETTINGS With ignition switch in RUN position and vehicle stopped, press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. Press and release the switch ( ) to access the submenus. Scroll with the switch in the or arrow directions to view the selectable items: • Speed Warning • Electric Parking Brake • Passenger Air bag (if equipped) • Screen Setup (Continued) 163 Dashboard Instruments and Controls NOTE: • In order to modify the status of electric parking brake, please see chapter "Parking Brake" in section "Driving". • In order to modify the status of passenger air bag, please see paragraph "Passenger's Air bag Deactivation" in "Supplemental Restraint Systems – Air bag" in section "Before Starting". 4 TFT Display: Example to modify the "Speed Warning" status remain next to the previously-selected item until a new selection is made. Press and release the switch ( ) once again to view the related options: "Off" is the default status. NOTE: • Minimum set speed: 30 km/h (18 mph). • Maximum set speed: 280 km/h (174 mph). When the vehicle is in motion (above 8 km/h – 5 mph) this function is available and displayed in the list of "Vehicle Settings" menu. Scroll with the switch in the or arrow directions to view the selectable items. Press and release the switch ( ) to select "Speed Warning". 164 Scroll with the switch in the or arrow directions to view the selectable options. Speed values are in loop, keeping the switch pressed in the or arrow directions will increase scroll speed. Press and release the switch ( ) to select the option. A check mark will A setting saved notification appears as a popup for 2 seconds and a white telltale indicating the set speed limit will appear on display. Then the display will show the last modified item. When the set speed is exceeded, the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal Dashboard Instruments and Controls and the telltale indicating the speed limit becomes amber. A pop-up message indicating that the limit has been exceeded will appear on display. The pop-up message and the telltale will be displayed for 5 seconds then system will return to the previous screen. SCREEN SETUP After having entered the "Vehicle Settings" menu, press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. Press and release the switch ( ) to access the available items for this submenu. If the vehicle exceeds 8 km/h (5 mph), this feature is unavailable and the main screen shows possible options in grey (not activable). Operate this function with the vehicle stopped and transmission in P (Park) position. In order to enter a function, press the switch ( ) as shown in the picture. The following directory shows the items available in the "Screen Setup" submenu: Upper Left • None • Compass • Outside Temperature (default: Upper Right) • Date • Time • Time/Date (default: Upper Left) • Range to Empty • Average L/100km or km/L (or MPG) • Current L/100km or km/L (or MPG) • Trip A Distance • Trip B Distance Upper Right (example in picture) • None • Compass • Outside Temperature (default: Upper Right) • Date • Time • Time/Date (default: Upper Left) • Range to Empty • Average L/100km or km/L (or MPG) • Current L/100km or km/L (or MPG) • Trip A Distance • Trip B Distance Main Menu: Line 1 (only displays in Main Menu) • None (default status) • Compass • Outside Temperature • Date • Time • Time/Date • Range to Empty • Average L/100km or km/L (or MPG) • Current L/100km or km/L (or MPG) • Trip A Distance • Trip B Distance • Audio Main Menu: Line 2 (only displays in Main Menu) • Same configurable options as Line 1 Main Menu: Line 3 (only displays in Main Menu) • Same configurable options as Line 1 4 165 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 166 MPH km/h Display (instruction line) • On • Off Main Menu Navigation • On • Off Outline Colouring • On • Off Key-On Display • On • Off Key-Off Display • On: Trip summary • Off: screen with Maserati logo and trident Defaults • Restore • Cancel Scroll with the switch in the or arrow directions to view the selectable items (in the example "Time" is selected). A check mark will remain next to the previously-selected item until a new selection is made. Press and release the switch ( ) to select an item. The notification of setting saved appears as a popup for 2 seconds, then the display will show the last-modified item. Press and release the button to return to the “Screen Setup” submenu. "Screen Setup" submenu parameters set by the user as the ones to be displayed are also indicated in the top part of the MTC+ (see example in the figures). As for the instruction line "MPH km/h Display", you can either select to display it in sector 6 or not ("Off" option). In the latter case, the function of changing units remains in any case active. If the "Main Menu Navigation" is set to "On", navigation information will be displayed in the main area of the display only if a destination has been set on the navigator of the MTC+. If Dashboard Instruments and Controls function is set to "Off", the navigation information will not be displayed. If the "Outline Colouring" is set to "On", the TFT side edge of engine temperature and fuel gauge indicators will change color depending on the selected Drive Mode: • SPORT: green (example shown in picture); • I.C.E.: light blue; If it is set to "Off", the color/Drive Mode combination is not active and the edges will remain "NORMAL" Drive Mode color. "Key-On Display" and "Key-Off Display" items allow user to set display during vehicle key-on and off. "Key-On Display" is normally set to "On". When entering the vehicle, after the welcome screen, the display will show the information concerning engine starting sequence. While if it is set to "Off" (example shown in figure), the display will show the information displayed before last vehicle key-off. 4 When engine is started and ignition device is pressed to stop it, it is possible to set "Key-Off Display", "On" or "Off" to obtain the following display settings: • "On": Trip summary screen (Trip B is reset after each key-on/key-off cycle); • "Off": screen with Maserati logo and trident. The "Defaults" item of "Screen Setup" submenu allows restoring Maserati factory settings. 167 Dashboard Instruments and Controls TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Lights of Set Modes/Functions Display sections indicated in the figure show warning/indicator lights concerning all selected driving functions and all set functions/systems. The relevant messages will be indicated within the main area for five seconds, unless otherwise specified. Fault messages will be stored under “Stored messages”. 4 Gasoline 168 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 Diesel 169 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 Charging System Warning Light This warning light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system warning light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Require IMMEDIATE service at the Service Network. If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Start Procedures” in section “In an Emergency”. Transmission Temperature Warning Light This warning light and the related message indicate that the transmission fluid temperature is rising. If this warning light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into P (Park) and run the engine at idle until the temperature drops and the light switches off. If the problem persists, contact the Service Network. 170 CAUTION! Continuous driving with the transmission temperature warning light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or failure. WARNING! If the transmission temperature warning light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire. Engine Temperature Warning Light This warning light notifies when the engine is overheated. If the temperature reaches critical levels and the gauge displayed in sector 12 turns red, this warning light under the engine temperature gauge indicator will illuminate in red color combined with the related message on display. When the temperature is reaching the set threshold an acoustic signal will be heard. If the warning light switches on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into N (Neutral) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature does not return to normal, immediately turn the engine off and contact the Service Network Check "Engine Overheating" in section "In an Emergency" for more information. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light Under normal conditions, the warning light illuminates when the ignition device is turned to RUN and goes off as soon as the engine is started. If the warning light stays or turns on while driving, the engine oil pressure is too low. The warning light is combined with a displayed message and an acoustic signal that will last 4 minutes. In this case, turn the engine off immediately and carry out the necessary checks. Do not operate the vehicle until the problem has been solved. This light does not indicate the oil level. The engine oil level must be checked with the dipstick located under the hood (see “Maintenance Procedures” in section “Maintenance and Care”). If the problem persists, contact the Service Network. Dashboard Instruments and Controls Engine Oil Temperature Warning Light This light indicates that the engine oil is overheated. The warning light is combined with the related displayed message. In this case, drive carefully until the temperature drops back to normal level and the warning light turns off. If the problem persists, contact the Service Network. WARNING! After battery disconnection event, the warning light may be on. In this case, start the engine and perform a steering wheel stroke to bottom in both senses. If the problem persists, contact the Service Network. Low Engine Oil Level Warning Light (Gasoline only) This warning light and the related displayed message, indicate a low engine oil level. The engine oil level must be checked with the dipstick fitted under the hood (see “Maintenance Procedures” in section “Maintenance and Care”). Catalyst Over Temperature Warning Light This warning light, and the related message, light up if the engine runs irregularly with consequent high temperature in the exhaust system. Electric Power Steering Failure Warning Light This warning light, and the related message, illuminate when the electric power steering is not operating and needs service. If the warning light is on, steering assistance may be not available. • If the warning light is accompanied WARNING! by the message "Catalyst Temp Getting Hot Reduce Speed": the temperature of the catalytic converters is too high. The driver must slow down immediately until the warning light turns off. • If the message "Catalyst Temp Hot Stop Safely Wait To Cool" appears after decelerating: the temperature in the catalytic converters has reached a dangerous level and the catalytic converters could be damaged. Drive slowly to the nearest Service Network. • If the light turns on permanently 3 times the engine will stop. It will be possible to restart the vehicle only after a key-off / key-on cycle. Then slowly drive to the nearest Service Centre. • Maserati declines all responsibility for whatever damage deriving from non-compliance with the above mentioned warnings. 4 Door Ajar Indicator This indicator illuminates on when one or more doors are ajar. The indicator will show which door is ajar. When one or more doors are open, a related message will be displayed if the vehicle is running at a speed of 8 km/h (5 mph) or faster. Boot Lid and Hood Ajar Indicators These light indicators will illuminate to indicate that the boot lid and/or hood are ajar. When the boot lid or the hood is open, a related message will be displayed besides the light if the vehicle is running at speed 8 km/h (5 mph) or faster. 171 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 Low Fuel Indicator When the fuel level reaches approximately 16.0 litres (3.5 UK gal) this light under the fuel gauge indicator will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added together with the related message. In this condition the color indicating the quantity of fuel in the tank, inside the indicator on display, will go from white to amber. Refer to "Refuelling" in section "Driving" for fuel filling. Windshield Washer Low Fluid Indicator This indicator will illuminate for 5 seconds to indicate a low level of the windshield washer fluid. A related message will be displayed. See “Maintenance Procedures” in section “Maintenance and Care” for fluid filling. Headlight Aiming System Failure Warning Light This warning light, and the related message, indicate a failure of the horizontal levelling or electromechanical swivelling of the headlight system. Please contact the Service Network to check the system. 172 Advanced Frontlighting System (AFS) Failure Warning Light This warning light and the related message light up to report a failure of the AFS system. Contact the Service Network as soon as possible. Automatic High Beam Failure Warning Light This warning light and the related message light up to report a failure of the automatic high beam headlights. Contact the Service Network as soon as possible. Suspensions Failure Warning Light This warning light and the related message turn on while driving if there is a failure of the Skyhook suspension system. Please contact the Service Network to check the system. Ice Hazard Indicator When the external temperature falls below 3°C (38°F), the temperature value blinks for a few seconds, the warning light turns on, a message is displayed and an acoustic signal is triggered to warn the driver of the risk of icy roadbed. Under such conditions, we recommend using the I.C.E. drive mode (see "Automatic Transmission" in section "Driving") drive carefully and slow down as the grip of the tires may be significantly reduced. The warning light flashes for 5 seconds and switches off when the temperature reaches 6°C (43°F) or higher. Brake Pads Wear Warning Light This warning light and the related message indicate that the brake pads have reached their wear limit. Please contact the Service Network to have them replaced. Electric Parking Brake Failure Warning Light This warning light and related message illuminate when there is an EPB system failure. The failure could also completely or partially block the vehicle because the parking brake could remain on even after it has been automatically or manually disengaged though its controls. If it is still possible to use the vehicle (parking brake not engaged) drive Dashboard Instruments and Controls to the nearest Service Network and remember to perform each operation/command during which the electric parking brake does not work. Start&Stop Disable Indicator This indicator illuminates when Start&Stop is turned off through the main menu item “Start&Stop”, via the controls located on the right side of the steering wheel, or through the button on the central console or through the relevant soft-key of the MTC+. See chapter “Automatic Start&Stop System” of section “Driving” for further information. Start&Stop Failure Warning Light This warning light illuminates when there is a failure in the Start&Stop system. Switch the engine on or off using the normal procedure with the ignition device START/STOP and have the vehicle checked at a Service Network. Scheduled Maintenance (Service) Indicator This indicator illuminates and a message flashes on the display after an acoustic signal to indicate that the next scheduled maintenance is due or has already overdue. Unless reset, the indicator and message will continue to display each time you cycle the ignition to the RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the button on the steering wheel. To reset the service indicator system, please visit a Service Centre. Passenger's Air bag Deactivated Indicator (if equipped) This warning light switches on when the passenger's airbag is deactivated. See "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Airbags" in section "Before Starting" for further details. Wait to Start Indicator (Diesel only) This indicator will turn on when the ignition device is first turned to the RUN position. Wait until the Wait to Start indicator turns off to start the engine. Refer to "Normal Starting of the Engine" in section "Driving" for further details. water from the fuel filter to prevent engine damage. Contact the Service Network for inspection and draining of the fuel filter. CAUTION! The presence of water inside the fuel system can damage the injection system and cause engine’s malfunction. If the warning light turns on, you shall contact the Service Network as soon as possible to have the fuel filter cleaned. If, after a refueling, the warning light turns on, some water could have entered the fuel tank: in this case, turn off the engine immediately and contact the Service Network. 4 Low AdBlue® Indicator (Diesel only) This indicator will turn on to indicate the AdBlue® is low (for more details see paragraph "Messages Concerning the AdBlue® Injection System (Diesel only)" in this chapter. Water in Fuel Indicator (Diesel only) It indicates there is water detected in the fuel filter. If this light remains on, DO NOT start the vehicle before you drain the 173 Dashboard Instruments and Controls ADAS Status Indicators When you are not viewing the "Drive Assist" page, the indicators at top left-hand side of the display indicate status of individual ADAS system or the combination of them (see examples). For further details, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC", "Lane Keeping Assist - LKA" and "Highway Assist HAS" in section "Driving". 4 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off This warning light informs the driver that Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is disabled. This might occur when front sensor and/or the ACC/FCW system sensors are malfunctioning and need cleaning or servicing and when ACC/FCW system is not available due to a system error (for further details, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC" in section "Driving"). This warning light will light even when the activation of another driver assistance feature or drive mode (such as " – ESC OFF") disables the FCW. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Fault This warning light informs that FCW is in fault state. If this occurred together with other 174 specific messages, could mean that a system fault requiring servicing at the Service Network. It is nevertheless possible to drive the vehicle without using this function (for further details, refer to "Forward Collision Warning FCW" in section "Driving"). AWD Failure Warning Light (AWD version only) This warning light turns on to indicate a fault of the AWD system otherwise a fault or overheating due to excessive wheel spin. Contact the Service Network as soon as possible, and avoid using the vehicle in heavy duty conditions. Set Passive Speed Limit This warning light indicates the passive speed limit set via the controls on the RH side of the steering wheel (for further details, refer to "TFT Display: Menus and Settings" in this chapter). Passive Speed Limit Exceeded This warning light informs the driver that the speed limit that was set has been exceeded. Stiff Suspension Setting Indicator This indicator light indicate that the stiff suspensions program ("S") is on. For further details, refer to "Drive Mode" in section "Driving". Set Drive Mode Indicator Drive mode set by the driver through the controls on central console is displayed above the transmission lever indicator (example in picture: NORMAL). For further details, refer to “Drive Mode” in section "Driving". Cruise Control (CC) Ready or Canceled This white light indicator will illuminate when the CC is ready to be set (with 3 dashes below) and, once it sets, when it is temporarily canceled (set speed in white below). For further information, check "Electronic Speed Limiter and Cruise Control” in section "Driving". Cruise Control (CC) Set This green light indicator will illuminate with the set speed when the CC is set and in driver override. For further information, check "Electronic Speed Limiter and Cruise Control" in section "Driving". Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) Fault This warning light on indicates that the LKA system is in fault. If the warning light and the relevant message do not go off after Dashboard Instruments and Controls a few manoeuvres and eventually an ignition cycle, contact the Service Network. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready or Canceled This white warning light indicates that the ACC is ready to be set (with 3 dashes below) and, once it sets, when it is temporarily canceled (set speed in white below). For further details, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC" in section "Driving". Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set This green warning light with below the set speed turns on when the ACC is set (for further details, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC" in section "Driving") and vehicle will keep set speed. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault This warning light turns on when ACC is not operating or needs servicing, For further details, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC" in section "Driving". Blind Spot Assist (BSA) Failure Warning Light This warning light and related message light on to report a failure of the BSA system. As consequence, on vehicles equipped with ABSA also this latter will be not working or malfunctioning. Contact the Service Network as soon as possible avoiding to use this system. information refer to "All-Wheel Drive" in section "Driving". Headlight On Indicator This indicator will illuminate when the position lights or headlights are turned on. For further details, see "Lights" in section "Understanding the Vehicle". Automatic High Beam On Indicator This indicator turn on when the 2Auto High Beam Assist" feature is set on MTC+ (see "MTC+ Settings" in this section). Gear Shift Indicator Light This indicator lights up to indicate gear shift change in order to optimise fuel consumption. See "Drive Mode" in section "Driving" for further information. Service AWD System Message (AWD version only) The message on the TFT display will illuminate when all-wheel drive feature requires service. For further DPF System Messages (Diesel only) Under conditions of exclusive short duration and low speed driving cycles, the engine and exhaust after treatment system may never reach the conditions required to remove the trapped Particulate Matter (PM). If this occurs a message will be displayed permanently on the TFT display when driving. This message is repeated each time the vehicle is started and, if user changes the TFT page, it reappears after 120 seconds and will remain displayed for the entire driving cycle. By driving your vehicle at highway speeds for as little as 30 minutes, you can remedy the condition in the particulate filter system by allowing the trapped PM to be removed to 4 175 Dashboard Instruments and Controls restore the system to normal operating condition. Carefully follow the indications shown on the display until regeneration is completed (see examples). 4 Diesel Diesel 176 Diesel Diesel If the exhaust after-treatment system requires service intervention, a message and the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) will be displayed to alert the driver. In this condition the engine will be derated to prevent permanent damage to the after-treatment system. If this condition occurs, it is necessary to have your vehicle serviced by your local Service Network. CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the MIL on inhibits the regeneration process with possible DPF clogged. • Maserati is not responsible for defects occurring due to not performed DPF regeneration process. Messages Concerning the AdBlue® Injection System (Diesel only) Suitable messages displayed on the TFT display indicate when the system needs servicing, or AdBlue® needs to be added to the tank in the boot compartment. When the system requires servicing, in addition to the message the Malfunction Indicator Light is also displayed. In these cases, as indicated on the message reported in figure, contact the Service Network. Dashboard Instruments and Controls Diesel Diesel When AdBlue® needs to be added to the tank, its messages are displayed when driving and are repeated each time the vehicle is started, accompanied by a single acoustic signal. The mileage reported on some of these messages indicates the remaining range of AdBlue® which is continuously updated and made visible at each next start up. This mileage is the result of an estimated consumption that depends on the type of use of the vehicle. Therefore it is appropriate to refuel as soon as possible When the estimated range of AdBlue® is less than 2400 km (1500 mi) on the instrument cluster display an early warning about AdBlue® level low appears: it is suggested to refuel AdBlue® as soon as possible. When the estimated range is less than 1500 km (932 mi), the warning light comes on. When the mileage displayed reaches 600 km (360 mi), the messages will be displayed continuously unless other warnings come up (i.e. safety related messages). been turned off, will not restart: refuel AdBlue® regularly (see chapter "Adding reducing agent AdBlue® (Diesel only)" in section "Driving"). It is important that you follow the displayed instructions closely otherwise the engine may not restart after it stops. A few example messages are reported in the figure. Messages are stored in Stored Messages. 4 Diesel CAUTION! When the indicated range is less than 1 km (0.6 mi), if the engine is switched off the car can no longer be started: in this case we suggest you not to switch off the engine and to refuel preventively AdBlue®. NOTE: In case of exhaustion of AdBlue® the vehicle, once the engine has 177 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Infotainment System Diesel 4 178 Message Concerning the Residual Life of Engine Oil (Diesel only) According to the degradation that the engine oil has reached, according to the conditions of use of the vehicle, the instrument cluster can display the request to carry out the oil change in advance of the expected Service. A first warning will indicate to change the oil as soon as possible and a second will indicate to do it immediately. After this last warning, if the oil is not replaced, in addition to the warning indicated in the picture, the Malfunction Indicator Light will also come on. CAUTION! • When the warnings on the residual life of engine oil appear on the instrument cluster, it is advisable to go as soon as possible to the Service Network that will carry out the necessary checks. • Prolonged driving with the MIL on inhibits the regeneration process with possible DPF clogged. The vehicle is equipped with the infotainment Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+) System, an advanced user interface which combines innovative and exclusive technical features integrating entertainment, user settings, air conditioning, navigation, communication and information features within a single system. The MTC+ System features an audio system which is acoustically optimised for this specific vehicle. WARNING! The navigation system assists the driver while driving, providing advice and suggestions, by voice guidance and graphic information, for the best route to reach the set destination. The suggestions provided by the navigation system do not relieve the driver from full responsibility for the manoeuvres made through traffic while driving, or from compliance with road regulations and other provisions regarding road traffic. The person driving the vehicle is always and in any case responsible for safe driving on the road. Dashboard Instruments and Controls The vehicle is provided with a specific add to the owner’s manual, describing the MTC+ System features and listing all warnings and precautions, which are essential for a safe use of the system. Maserati advises you to read this add carefully and thoroughly. The MTC+ display is positioned in the central part of the dashboard and the manual controls and devices for connecting external sources are positioned on the central console. 7 Tune/scroll control. 8 Slide phone drawer. 9 Door for access to multimedia ports and phone housing. Manual Controls and Devices 1 MTC+ touch display. 2 Ports for SD card, AUX and USB (for further details, refer to “Interior features” in section "Understanding the Vehicle"). "Browse" button . 3 4 5 "Back” button “Enter” button. 6 Volume control. . SD, AUX and USB Ports When an SD card is inserted into its housing, the MTC+ is able to read it and select multimedia files (music and images) from the device. By using the AUX and USB inputs it is possible to connect external devices to the MTC+ (see chapter "Interior features" in section "Understanding the Vehicle"). After connecting the device, by using the MTC+ display soft-keys, knobs on the central console and controls at the steering wheel, user can navigate through the content of the connected device and set its playing mode. 4 Multimedia Navigation Controls on Central Console The manual controls located on the central console are a further interface for the driver and nearby passenger, that adds to the MTC+ display softkeys. Using the manual controls, the MTC+ display will work as a graphic display of the inputs from the controls. 179 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Volume Control By working this knob in "Radio" or "Media" mode, user can adjust the volume of the radio or audio files, from minimum to maximum and vice versa. Turn knob clockwise to increase the volume, anti-clockwise to decrease it. The volume status will be indicated in the top part of the MTC+ display. 4 Tune/Scroll Control By working this knob in "Radio" or "Media" mode, user can go through the radio stations or scroll the tracks inside connected external devices and confirm the selection by pressing enter button. In any other mode of the MTC+, use this knob to scroll the list of available options or to manage the cursor movement in the lower bar of the main menus. Then press enter button 180 to confirm the function or setting highlighted on MTC+ display. Main Menu Bar on MTC+ Display Browse button After selecting a function, using the tune/scroll knob or soft-keys on MTC+ display, press this button to see the detail of the items/options of the selected function. This button is also used as short cut to display the phone book, when the "Phone" menu is selected, or the favourites when the "Nav (Navigation)" menu is selected. The soft keys located on the lower part of the MTC+ display represent the main menu modes/functions, which are briefly indicated below. Back button Press this button to go back to previous menu or previous screen. Press this button to shift the navigation one level backwards on MTC+ screen. If it is pressed and held for at least 2 seconds, it brings the cursor back in the lower bar of the main menus. Enter Button To confirm the function or setting highlighted on MTC+ display. When in “Radio” mode and the ignition switch in RUN position, you can save your preset stations. MTC+ with Navigation System MTC+ without Navigation System Main menu bar is set up by Maserati: it can be customised according to personal requirements, as explained in Dashboard Instruments and Controls "Customising the Main Menu Bar" in this chapter. NOTE: The images may represent a main menu bar other than the one on your MTC+. For further information refer to the "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)" dedicated booklet included in the owner documentation. 1 "Radio" soft-key Touch this soft-key to enter the Radio mode. The different tuner modes: FM, AM, DAB and "Aha" App (for countries where they are supported) can be selected by touching the related soft-keys in the Radio mode. 2 “Media” soft-key Touch this soft-key to access media sources such as: USB Device, AUX, Bluetooth and SD card as long as the requested media is present. 3 “Controls” soft-key Touch this soft-key to access the features of some driver assistance system (ADAS) that can be set up. Features can be selected and adjusted or turned on/off by touching the related soft-key (see "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in this section). 4 (Apps) soft-key Touch this soft-key to access connected phone connection options and user functions settings. 5 "Climate" soft-key Touch this soft-key to access the air conditioning settings. In this screen the following controls are also available: Heated Seats, Heated Steering Wheel and Ventilated Seats. See "Air Conditioning Controls" in this section for further details. 6 "Nav" soft-key (if equipped) Touch this soft-key to access the Navigation feature. Refer to the MTC+ instruction manual for further details. 7 "Phone" soft-key Touch this soft-key to access the MTC+ Phone feature that can be set or monitored via MTC+. 8 “Screen Off” soft-key (default position only for MTC+ without navigator). Touch one of these soft-key to access the list of functions that the user can set. Touch screen Display Warnings CAUTION! • Do NOT attach any object to the touch screen, doing so can result in damage to the touch screen. • Do not press the screen with any hard or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.) which could scratch the touch screen surface. • Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the screen. Use a clean and dry microfibre lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the touch screen. • If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol, or an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent manufacturer’s precautions and directions. 4 Switch OFF Touch screen Backlight If the screen backlight becomes annoying when driving, it is possible to switch it off. Switch off the screen backlight by touching "Screen OFF" soft-key in the "Controls" screen of MTC+ display. 181 Dashboard Instruments and Controls • hold depressed and drag the icon corresponding to the selected function until it overlaps the one to be replaced on the bottom bar. Without ADAS 4 Once it is set in the menu bar, the new connection will be immediately operational. Use the MTC+ Display as Projection Device With ADAS Customising the Main Menu Bar The soft-keys for the main functions of the MTC+ system, indicated at the bottom of the MTC+ display, can be easily customised to suit user's requirements, as follows: • touch button to open applications/settings screen; 182 If your smartphone is properly connected to the vehicle via the USB port, on MTC+ screen in place of “Phone” soft-key and in the source list of “Media” screen you can find the “Apple CarPlay” (example shown in picture), the “Android Auto” or the “Baidu CarLife” (for markets where it is available) app soft-key. With “Baidu CarLife” active the native “Phone” app will always available in the (Apps) screen. Depending on the operating system of the connected device (Android or iOS), applications on the phone that are compatible with "Android Auto", "Apple CarPlay" or "Baidu CarLife" (for markets where it is available) can be projected on the MTC+; these applications may require confirmation via pop-up or an explicit Bluetooth® connection before starting the projector function. When the projector function is on, the other devices connected via Bluetooth® will be disconnected. “Android Auto” app needs to be downloaded on the mobile devices with Android operating system “Baidu CarLife (for markets where it is available) app needs to be downloaded on the mobile devices with Android or iOS operating system. Dashboard Instruments and Controls “Apple CarPlay” allows the best use of your iPhone® in the car and perfect integration with the MTC+ display and with the controls of the car, including Siri voice control. You can make phone calls, access music, send and receive messages, get real-time directions on traffic conditions, all while staying focused on the road The “Android Auto” app lets you share information while driving and make it easier to access Google. The interface is equipped with Google Maps with voice guided navigation, traffic information in real time, on-demand access to millions of songs in Google Play Music. It also offers the possibility to make phone calls or send and receive messages without taking your hands off the steering wheel. You can also request Google to make any type of research. Android Auto will give an easier access to applications and content from the MTC+ system display. “Baidu CarLife” (for markets where it is available) is an application that can be executed on mobile devices with Android or iOS operating system. It uses its own voice command engine, similar to Siri or Google Voice, and supports navigation services (Baidu Maps) and streaming music. All phone-related features will relay on the native “Phone” app of the MTC+ system. NOTE: For further details on connecting and using the mobile projector function, refer to the “Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)” guide. With the smartphone connected via USB port, when a session is established and the mobile device (represented in Table A) or the MTC+ System (represented in Table B) is performing an action, the following tables show which source is displayed on the MTC+ screen (indicated with “Screen” in tables) and which audio source (indicated with “Audio” in tables) of projection device or of MTC+ is displayed or used by the system in the projector function. 4 183 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Table A: device is performing an action MTC+ System : Active Mode Action Radio 4 Media No App active Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Start Media Player Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Start Navigation Screen: Audio: + Audio priority Screen: Audio: + Audio priority 184 Phone Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Voice Rec. Screen: Audio: + Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: + Audio priority Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Start Phone Call Start VR Navigation Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Dashboard Instruments and Controls Table B: MTC+ is performing an action Device Action No App active Media : Active Mode Navigation Phone Call Voice Rec. Start Radio Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Screen: Main Audio: + mix prompt nav Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Start Media Player Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Screen: Main Audio: + Audio priority Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Start Navigation Screen: Audio: Screen: Main Audio: + Audio priority Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: + Audio priority 4 Screen: Audio: + Audio priority Screen: Audio: Start Phone Call Start VR Screen: Audio: Start Rear Parking Camera Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: + Audio priority Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: + Audio priority Screen: Audio: Cannot start VR during Call Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: 185 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Audio Controls The vehicle is equipped with audio controls that allow both driver and front passenger to operate the audio system. These controls can be used to adjust audio volume, change radio station or mode (FM, AM, USB, etc). Steering Wheel Audio Controls 4 These audio controls are rocker-type switches with a button in the center and are located on the rear side of the steering wheel, right behind the front switches. Press any button to display information on the radio station or track being listened to inside a pop-up for 2 seconds on instrument cluster. The right-hand control manages the volume. By pressing the top of the rocker switch you can increase the volume 186 and by pressing the bottom of the rocker switch you can lower it. Press the center button to mute the volume. The left-hand control functions depend on the current source. To change source, press the center button. When in "Radio" mode, pressing the top of the switch will "Seek" up for the previous listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will "Seek" down for the previous listenable station. When an external source is connected to MTC+, a light press on the top of the switch will play the next track on the device connected. Press the bottom of the switch once to go to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play. If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third one, etc. Audio Controls on Central Console Console In "Radio" mode, turn the volume upper knob to set the audio volume, or turn the tune/scroll bottom knob to tune station. For further details, refer to "Infotainment System" in this section. When in App/Settings mode, the tune/scroll bottom knob and the browse and enter buttons allow you to scroll through the menus and change the user’s settings (see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). Dashboard Instruments and Controls Audio System The vehicle is equipped with an audio system that offers superior sound quality, higher sound pressure levels and reduced energy consumption. The new system maximizes the amplifier and speaker technology delivering substantially higher components and system efficiency. The standard sound system "Premium" features 10 speakers and can develop a sound output of 900 W. The standard system includes: • Four 165 mm (6.5 in) diameter Woofers, one on each door. • One 80 mm (3.15 in) diameter Midrange diameter, on the top of the dashboard. • One 25 mm (1 in) diameter Tweeter, 2 on the upper edges of the dashboard and 2 on rear doors. • One 315 x 200 mm (12.4 x 7.9 in) Subwoofer on the rear panel below the rear window. • 12-channel amplifier in the boot. The vehicle can be equipped with an "High Premium" surround system including 15 speakers and 1280 W of sound power, available upon request. The "High Premium" system includes: • Two 165 mm (6.5 in) CFR Woofer: one on each front door. • Two 165 mm (6.5 in) Black Kevlar Woofer: one on each rear door. • Five 100 mm (4 in) Yellow Kevlar Midrange: one on centre dashboard, two on each front door, two on each side of the rear parcel shelf. • Five 25 mm (1 in) MMX Tweeter: one in centre and one on the each side of the dashboard, one on each rear door. • 315 x 200 mm (12.4 x 7.9 in) Racetrack Sub Dual VC Subwoofer on the rear parcel shelf. • 16-channel 1280 Watts Class-D amplifier in the boot. The standard sound system "Premium" is supplied with a 12 channel high efficiency amplifier and is operated by a high voltage tracking power supply and drives a 7.5-channel playback architecture. This audio system offers the ability to choose Logic 7® surround sound for any audio source. The high-efficiency speaker design ensures higher Sound Pressure Level (SPL) and exceptional dynamic sound quality. The speakers are tuned for maximum efficiency and compatible with the amplifier output stage ensuring best updated surround sound processing. Logic 7® multichannel surround sound technology delivers an immersive, accurate sound stage throughout the passenger compartment. This surround effect is available from any audio source - AM/FM/Satellite Radio or AUX and USB input; and is activated through the MTC+ System controls (see “MTC+ Settings” in this section). By selecting “Surround Sound”, you can activate the Logic 7® multichannel surroundsound technology in your vehicle. All information on the current operational mode are listed in the specific booklet visible on the MTC+ screen. When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set automatically. Fader control is available in surround mode but it should be set to the center position for optimal surround performance. 4 187 Dashboard Instruments and Controls MTC+ "Controls" Screen 4 Touch the "Controls" soft-key on the lower part of the MTC+ display to turn on/off some on-board devices and turn on/off and adjust some driver assist systems (ADAS). Once you enter the "Controls" screen, using the touch soft-keys or turn the tune/scroll knob to scroll and change settings of the features and press the enter upper button to confirm the selection. Some of these devices or systems are optional or for a specific model/version and may not be available on your vehicle. The "Controls" screen is specific to the vehicles that are not equipped with driver assistance systems (Without ADAS) and for those that have them (With ADAS). With ADAS Some features can be set only on or off touching the corresponding softkey which will be highlighted with the blue outline. Other features can have one or more instruction/setting pages that are accessed by touching the corresponding soft-key (example: "Privacy Lock"). The ADAS features have two soft-keys: the first changes the current setting on or off, the second on the side shows the current setting. Touching this last soft-key you enter the setting page in which all feature options are visible and adjustable. NOTE: • For further details refer also to the "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)" guide. Without ADAS 188 Dashboard Instruments and Controls • All settings must be edited with ignition device set to RUN position. • Some of the Customer programmable features are optional or for a specific model/version and may not be available on your vehicle. • Only one touch screen area/soft-key may be selected at a time. • Menu navigation indications refer to the use of soft-keys on MTC+ display: the same operations can be performed using the manual controls on central console. Features Common to All Configurations • Privacy Lock The two modes of this feature allows you to enter a 4-digit PIN code to lock and unlock the glove box in the passenger side of the dashboard and, choosing "Valet Mode", to lock your settings for listening and guidance. See "Dashboard Compartments" in this section for further details. • Rear Sunshade This feature allows you to open and close the sunshade on the rear window. See "Rear Window" in section "Before Starting" for further details. • Start & Stop Off This feature allows you to disable the Start & Stop when frequent stops and restarts of the engine may become annoying. See "Automatic Start&Stop System" in section "Driving" for further details. • Auto High Beam Assist By selecting this feature, when the forward digital camera detect a vehicle that precedes in the direction of travel or in the opposite direction, adjust the high beam in an automatic way not to dazzle. See "Lights" in section "Understanding the Vehicle" for further details. • Screen OFF This feature allows you to switch off the MTC+ screen backlight if it becomes annoying when driving. See "Infotainment System" in this section for further details. • Settings Touch this soft-key you enter the "Settings" page that displays all user - customizable features: see "MTC+ Settings" in this section. Features Specific for Vehicle without ADAS • Blind Spot Assist Activating this feature the BSA and RCP systems assist the driver when changing lanes, overtaking and when parking, by detecting the arrival of other vehicles from a side or rear blind spot. When this happens, a light signal appears in the external rear-view mirror. When Blind Spot Assist (BSA) is selected, the feature can be set to "Off", "Lights" or "Lights + Chime" (default mode). When this feature is activated in "Lights" mode, the system will only show a warning light in the outside mirrors. When "Lights + Chime" mode is activated, the system will show a warning light in the outside mirrors as well as give an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When "Off" is selected, the system is deactivated. For description of this system, see chapter "Blind Spot Assist - BSA" in section "Driving". 4 Features specific for Vehicles with ADAS • Lane Keeping Assist 189 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 Activating this feature the LKA system will attempt to keep the vehicle in lane and can apply direct input to electric power steering system to change direction of vehicle. The current system setting is shown in blue on the right side of the LKA soft-key. Touching this soft-key the set page of LKA system will be displayed (see picture). Driver warnings can be only "Visual" or "Visual & Haptic" (default mode). System response can be set to "Early", "Medium" (default mode) and "Late". System reaction force can be set to "Low", "Medium" (default mode) and "High". See "Lane Keeping Assist - LKA" in section "Driving" for more details. • Active Blind Spot Assist 190 Activating this feature the system will try to prevent collision between host vehicle and potential blind spot collision hazard. System applies direct input to electric power steering system to change direction of vehicle to avoid collision. The current system setting is shown in blue on the right side of the ABSA soft-key. Touching this soft-key the set page of ABSA system will be displayed (see picture). Driver warnings can be only "Visual", "Visual & Acoustic" (default mode) or "Visual & Haptic". System response can be set to "Early", "Medium" (default mode) and "Late". System reaction force can be set to "Low", "Medium" (default mode) and "High". See "Active Blind Spot Assist - ABSA" in section "Driving" for more details. • Forward Collision Warning (with active braking) The FCW feature primary use the front radar and the forward looking camera for sensing vehicle and pedestrian (if the car is equipped with Pedestrian Emergency Braking - PEB function) ahead, provide warnings to the driver and may perform brakings and brake jerks (if set). The current system setting is shown in blue on the right side of the FCW soft-key. Touching this soft-key the set page of FCW system will be displayed (see picture). FCW is always active: it is possible to set the sensitivity and the aid of the active braking. FCW sensitivity can be set to "Near", to "Medium" or to "Far". Dashboard Instruments and Controls The default status of FCW is the “Medium” setting. Setting it to "Far" means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle or pedestrian (if the car is equipped with Pedestrian Emergency Braking PEB function) in front of you when you are farther away. This gives you the best reaction time, though could lead to some more unwanted warnings. "Medium" gives instead a little less time for reacting compared to "Far", but at the same time should lead to less not desired warning. To change the setting for more dynamic driving, select the "Near" setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle or pedestrian (if the car is equipped with Pedestrian Emergency Braking - PEB function) in front of you. FCW with active braking can be set to "On" or "Off". • Surround View Camera Activating this feature the system uses four cameras to monitor the area around the vehicle when transmission lever is shifted to P (Park), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) position. When activation occurs by touching the "Surround Camera" soft-key in the "Controls" screen or moving the shift lever in R (Reverse) position, the initial view will be the default view (associated with current gear state). Image will be displayed with active guidelines while in that gear as long as vehicle speed remains lower than 12 km/h (8 mph). When vehicle is shifted into a different gear, the image will remain displayed for 10 seconds, or vehicle is shifted in P (Park), or until vehicle speed exceeds 12 km/h (8 mph), at which point it will immediately cancel and return to the last-viewed screen. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off". See "Surround View Camera System" in section "Understanding the Vehicle" for further details. • Traffic Sign Assist Activating this feature the forwardfacing digital camera, with the aid of maps on the navigation system, is able to detect signs (no overtaking, etc.) and speed limits. Those are displayed by the TSA system on the instrument cluster display together with a possible alert when the vehicle exceeds the speed limit. See "Traffic Sign Assist - TSA" in section "Driving" for further details. 4 191 Dashboard Instruments and Controls MTC+ Settings Customer Programmable Features 4 The MTC+ System uses a combination of keys able to access and change the customer programmable features present in the "Settings" and "Controls" page (see also "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in this section). Access programmable features touching "Settings" soft-key in the "Controls" screen page, or using manual controls on central console (refer to "Infotainment System" in this section). Turn the tune/scroll knob to scroll through menus and change settings on MTC+ display, press the enter upper button to confirm the selection. Without ADAS 192 With ADAS NOTE: • For further details refer also to the "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)" guide. • All settings must be edited with ignition device set to RUN position. To display the programmable features menu on MTC+, you can also touch soft-key to view all available applications and then select "Settings". In this mode the MTC+ System allows you to access the following programmable features (some of them are optional or for a specific model/version and may not be available on your vehicle): Display, Units, Voice Commands, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistant, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, Radio Setup, Restore Settings and Clear Personal Data. NOTE: • Only one touch screen area/soft-key may be selected at a time. • Menu navigation indications refer to the use of soft-keys on MTC+ display: the same operations can be performed using the manual controls on central console. To make a selection, and enter the desired function, touch the corresponding soft-key on the menu (the picture shown is "Engine Off Options"). Dashboard Instruments and Controls Display To scroll through the functions, move the cursor up or down, or touch the arrow or . Once the desired mode is entered, press and release the touch screen area of the setting that you wish to modify. The new setting will be highlighted with one or more boxes to indicate status or possible variants of the function status. A check mark in a box indicates the current status of the function. Touch the check mark to cancel, or the empty box to insert the check mark, and change the status of the function. Once the procedure is completed (for example, Display mode) touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the upper right “X” soft-key, to close the settings screen. Touching the or soft keys and the cursor on the right side of the screen will allow you to scroll up or down through the available settings. After pressing the "Display" soft-key the following mode settings will be available. • Display Mode When in this display you can select one of the auto display settings. To change mode status, checkmarked "Night", "Day" or "Auto" cell. • Display Brightness with Headlights On (Night) On (Night) When in this display, you can select the brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness from level 0 to 10 with the "+" and "–" setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+" and "–" soft-keys. • Display Brightness with Headlights Off (Day) When in this display, you can select the brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness as previously explained for "Night" setting. • Set Language Set Language When in this display, you can select one language for all display descriptions, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). The available 4 193 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 languages are specific to the target markets. • Touchscreen Beep When in this display, you can turn on or shut off the sound activated by pressure of a touchscreen soft-key. • Controls Screen Time-Out When this mode is selected, the "Controls" screen will remain displayed for 5 seconds. If this mode is not selected, the screen will remain displayed until closed manually. • Nav Next Turn Pop-ups in Cluster By selecting this feature, the next turn direction will appear on the instrument cluster along a programmed route until the desired destination is reached (see picture). 194 • AutoShow Smartphone Display Upon Connection This feature allows to use the MTC+ display as a projection device connected via USB port in order to browse the Apple CarPlay and Android Auto apps. By setting this feature, automatic switch from native screen to projection device will happen every time you connect your smartphone. For further details refer to the "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)" guide. Units After pressing the “Units” and then “Custom” soft-key on the touchscreen you may select between “Metric” and “Imperial” units of measure. Each unit of measure can be independently displayed in the TFT Display and in the navigation system. The following selectable units of measure are listed below: • Distance unit: select from: "km" or "mi". • Speed unit: select from: "km/h" or "MPH". • Consumption unit: select from: "L/100km", "km/L", "MPG (UK)" and "MPG (US)". • Capacity unit: select from: "L", "gal (UK)" or "gal (US)". • Pressure unit: select from: "kPa", "bar" or "psi". • Temperature unit: select from: "°C" or "°F". • Power unit: select from: "kW", "hp (UK)" or "hp (US)". • Torque unit: select from: "Nm" or "lb-ft". Voice Commands After pressing "Voice" soft-key the following modes will be available. • Voice Response Length When in this display, you can change the voice response length settings. To change the voice response length, touch the "Brief" or "Detailed" softkey. Dashboard Instruments and Controls • Show Command List When this feature is selected, it is possible to select options during a voice control session. Options for available controls are: "Always", "w/Help" or "Never". Clock Time is always visible on the dashboard analog clock (see "Analog Clock" in this section) and in digital format on the instrument cluster and on the MTC+ display. With this feature it is possible to view and set the following modes. • Sync Time with GPS Time is normally automatically synchronised with the radio signal. It is also possible to set automatic synchronisation mode using GPS signal instead. manually from 1 to 24. To select, touch the "+" or "–" soft-keys to adjust the hours. • Set Time Minutes With "Sync Time with GPS" feature unchecked and this mode selected, you can set the minutes manually from 0 to 59. To select, touch the "+" or "–" soft-keys as done for the hours. • Time Format When in this mode, you can select the time format display. To change the current setting, touch and release the "12 Hrs" or "24 Hrs" soft-key. • Show Time In Status Bar This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar. • Set Date in Cluster When in this mode, you can set the date manually in the status bar of the MTC+ and on the instrument cluster display. Touch the "+" or "-" softkeys to adjust day, month and year. 4 • Set Time Hours Set Time Hours With "Sync Time with GPS" feature unchecked and this mode selected, you can set the hours 195 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Safety & Driving Assistant 4 196 Touch this soft-key to set the following modes. • ParkSense (Park Assist) The park assist system will scan for objects behind and in front of the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than 12 km/h (7.5 mph). The system can be enabled with “Sound” only, "Sound+Display", or turned “Off”. See "Park Assist (optional)" in section "Before Starting" for further information. • Front Sensors Active in Drive If this feature is active, when driver takes shift lever from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to D (Drive), front parking sensors are activated. If this feature is not active, when driver takes shift lever from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to D (Drive), front parking sensors are NOT activated. • Front ParkSense Volume When this feature is selected, the chime volume of front park assist sensors can be set to "Low", "Medium" or "High" level. “Medium” is the default setting. The system will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles. • Rear ParkSense Volume When this feature is selected, the chime volume of rear park assist sensors can be set to "Low", "Medium" or "High" level. "Medium" is the default setting. The system will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles. • Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse By selecting this feature the outside side-view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in R (Reverse) position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of R (Reverse). The feature can be set to "On" or "Off". • Auto Folding Side Mirrors By selecting this feature on MTC+ the rear-view mirrors automatically fold when the vehicle is locked by the key fob and when the power boot lid (if equipped) is closed and locked by pressing the button on the right lower parts of the lid. When the vehicle and the boot lid will be unlocked, the rear-view mirrors will automatically open in the position they had before the lock. If the mirrors were manually folded by the switch on the driver's door panel, before a lock action, they will need to be manually unfold to reactivate the automatic behave. • ParkView Backup Camera Delay By selecting this feature, when the shift lever is moved out of R (Reverse), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 12 km/h (8 mph), or the transmission is shifted into P (Park) or the ignition device is switched to the OFF position. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off". • Rain Sensing Auto Wipers By selecting this feature, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses Dashboard Instruments and Controls moisture on the windshield. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off". • Hill Start Assist This feature allows you to disable the HSA system. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off". See "Brake and Stability Control System” in section "Driving" for further details. Lights Press the "Lights" soft-key to set the following modes. • Headlight Off Delay By selecting this feature, the driver can choose to have the headlight off or lit for 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the engine is shut off. To change the current headlight off delay status, touch and release the "0", "30", "60" or "90" soft-key to select the desired time range. • Headlights While Opening By selecting this feature, the driver can choose to have the headlight off or lit for 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the key fob RKE transmitter. • Headlights with Wipers By selecting this feature, while the headlight lever is in "AUTO" position, the headlight will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are activated. The headlight will also turn off when the wipers deactivate if they were activated in the current mode. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off". • High Beams Auto Dim By selecting this feature, the high beam headlight will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. See “Lights” in section "Understanding the Vehicle" for further information. • Headlight Dip (right/left-hand drive) By selecting this feature, the headlights will change their light distribution when a left-hand-drive vehicle enter a Country with righthand-drive system and vice versa. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off". • Adaptive Front Light By selecting and checkmarked this feature, the system turn off the beam shaping and bending. See "Lights" in section "Understanding the Vehicle" for further details. Doors & Locks Press the "Doors & Locks" soft-key to set the following modes. • Auto Door Locks When this feature is selected, all doors will automatically lock when the vehicle is in motion. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off". 4 • Auto Unlock on Exit Auto Unlock on Exit By selecting this feature, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position and the driver's door is open. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off". • Flash Lights with Lock 197 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 198 Flash Lights with Lock By selecting this feature, the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob RKE transmitter or when using the Passive Entry feature. • Sound Horn with Lock (where available) When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the doors are locked with the key fob RKE transmitter. You can choose from the following options: "Off" (no sound), "1st Press" (sound on the first press of the button) and "2nd Press" (sound on the second press of the button). • Sound Horn with Remote Start When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when you use the key fob RKE transmitter to start the engine. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off". See “Remote Start System” in section “Before Starting” for further details. • Remote Unlock Sequence By selecting this feature you may set up only the driver's door or all doors mode will unlock on the first press of the key fob RKE transmitter button. When "Driver Door" is selected, you must press the key fob RKE transmitter button twice to unlock also the passenger's doors. When unlocking "All Doors" by first press selection mode, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob RKE transmitter button. If driver door first is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob RKE transmitter). If the vehicle is programmed on “1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks”: - all doors will unlock no matter which "Passive Entry" equipped door handle is grasped; - only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped; - with "Passive Entry", touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening. • Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle door(s) without having to push the key fob RKE transmitter or buttons. By selecting this feature, "Passive Entry" may be set to "On" or "Off". The default status is "On". With "Passive Entry" deactivated, also the "Pre-Short Drop" function is disabled (for further information, refer to “Bodywork Maintenance and Care” in section “Maintenance and Care”). • Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob This selected mode enables to combine the key fob to personal driver’s position settings. These settings will be implemented when pressing the button on the key fob RKE transmitter with ignition device in RUN position. • Power Liftgate Alert When this feature is selected, further to turn indicators flashing, an acoustic warning will also be triggered when opening and closing the liftgate/boot lid. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off". • Hands Free Power Liftgate To prevent the accidental opening of the Power Boot Lid/Hands Free (optional) with the movement of the foot, it is possible to disable the "Hands Free" function. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off". This operation is recommended when you have to wash the car (for further information, refer to “Open and Close the Power Boot Lid” in section "Before Starting"). Dashboard Instruments and Controls Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start • Auto-on Driver Heated/Vented Seat & Steering This feature allows to activate the comfort of the driving seat when starting the engine. If equipped, the driver’s heated/vented seat and/or heated steering wheel will automatically activate by temperatures below 4°C (40°F). When temperatures are above 26°C (80°F) the driver vented seat will turn on. • Remote Start If the vehicle is equipped with the remote start system, you can choose from the following options: "Off", "Remote Start" (activation of this function when you use the key fob RKE transmitter to start the engine) and “All Starts” (activation of this function when you start the engine in all modes). Engine Off Options This feature allows you to set some functions after turning off the engine. • Seat Easy Access When this feature is selected, the driver's seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off for easy exit of the vehicle. The feature can be set to "On" or "Off". • Power Off Delay (Power duration after engine shutdown) By selecting this feature, the power window switches, radio, MTC+ Phone System, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after turning off the engine. Opening of one front doors will cancel this feature. The switch-off delay can be cancelled (0 seconds) you can choose from 45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes. • Headlight Off Delay By selecting this feature the headlight will stay lit for up to 90 seconds after turning off the engine. The switch-off delay can be cancelled (0 seconds) or reduced to 60 or 30 seconds. Audio This feature enables to view and set the available audio modes depending on the type of audio system supplied on the car. The following modes refer to the "High Premium" audio system. • Balance/Fade Use this screen to adjust the balance and fade settings. Touch and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows to adjust, or tap the "C" icon to readjust to the centre. 4 199 Dashboard Instruments and Controls touch the "Off", "1", "2" or "3" softkey. 4 • Equalizer Use this screen is used to adjust the "Bass", "Mid" and "Treb" settings. Adjust the settings with the "+" and "–" setting soft-keys or scroll and touch the slider in any point on the scale between the "+" and "–" softkeys. tracks played by radio stations. In case of high-definition source files like the ones on a CD, Clari-Fi shall apply no enhancement. Clari-Fi intervention is completely automatic. The feature can be set "On" or "Off". • Auto Play When a portable device is connected via USB port to MTC+ system, it plays automatically the songs if this feature is set to "On". • Surround Sound This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. Available settings: "On" and "Off". Phone/Bluetooth • Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume combined to vehicle speed. To change the speed adjusted volume 200 • Clari-Fi This function improves the audio quality by enhancing digitally compressed source files such as MP3 and AAC files and certain music Press this soft-key to select and connect phones and audio sources. • Do Not Disturb Settings available for this feature: - Auto Reply To change the mode status, touch the "Text", "Call" or "Both" softkey. - Auto Reply Message Dashboard Instruments and Controls To change the mode status, touch the "Custom" or "Default" soft-key. - Customise Auto Reply Message This feature allows you to customise the "Auto Reply Message". Text messages are limited to 160 characters (key pad is not available while vehicle is it motion). • Paired Phones By selecting this feature you will be notified which phones are combined to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For each option, you can also add one or more devices and change the PIN code of the device you wish to connect. For further information, see the "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)" guide. When this mode is selected a popup message will appear in case of incoming call. Information associated to call in progress are available by entering to the "Audio" menu using the buttons on the steering wheel RH side. NOTE: On the Maserati website, at www.maserati.com, or through the Maserati Service Network you may consult the list of telephones that are compatible with the MTC+, and their level of compatibility. • Paired Audio Sources By selecting this feature you will be notified which audio source are combined to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For each option, you can also add a device and change the PIN code of the device you wish to connect. For further information, see the "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)" guide. • Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster 4 • Phone Connection Mode This feature allows you to change the phone connection mode from “Settings” menu or from the phone settings menu. Selecting this feature accesses the page where the current connection mode is selected. The mode list is configured according to the connected projection device. To activate a new connection mode (example: "Charge Only") a pop-up invites the user to disconnect and reconnect the device cable to the USB port and confirm the action. 201 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Radio Setup confirming that settings have been reset to default and then the MTC+ will restart. Press the "Radio Setup" soft-key to set some listening options. • FM By Selecting the FM type of frequency you may listen to traffic announcement, alternative frequency information or tune to the regional mode. Clear Personal Data When this feature is selected, it will remove personal data concerning settings and/or options that have been modified compared to factory settings and will also remove from system memory Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove personal information, select this feature and a pop-up will appear asking confirmation to delete all personal data. Select "OK" to clear, or "Cancel" to exit. Once the data have been cleared, a pop up appears confirming that personal data have been cleared and then the MTC+ will restart. 4 • DAB (if supported) Digital radio extends the selection of stations, adding also numerous specialty channels. By selecting the DAB type of frequency you may listen to connection type announcements and announcement categories. By selecting DAB Announcements Categories (if supported) are displayed additional Categories such as: alarm, traffic announcement, etc... 202 All these items can be set to “On” or “Off”. Restore Settings When this feature is selected, it will reset the "Display", "Clock", "Audio", and "Radio Settings" to their default settings. Run this feature and a pop-up will appear asking user to confirm default settings resetting. Select "Yes" to restore, or "Cancel" to exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop-up appears Dashboard Instruments and Controls Dashboard Compartments The two glove box compartments on the dashboard may be used to store devices, small items or documents. In the compartment below the climate control panel, on the slider drawer can be housed the phone, cards or small items. In this compartment there are also the multimedia ports (see "Interior Features" in section "Understanding the Vehicle" for further information). WARNING! Do not operate the vehicle with the lid of glove box or compartment in the open position. Store objects or devices in dashboard compartment or in any other vehicle compartments, to ensure they will not move during the trip and prevent them from hitting any person on board. CAUTION! Do not place objects weighing over 10 kg (22 lb) in the glove box compartment. The compartment is ca. 25-30 cm (10-12 in) deep and is lit by two courtesy lights when open (the light automatically switches off when the compartment is closed). Glove Box Passenger Side To open the glove box, pull the handle as shown in the picture. The compartment is divided into two parts: in the lower part you can find the Owner’s documentation, while in the upper part you can fit small items. 4 The compartment is illuminated by a courtesy lights when open (the light will automatically switch off when the compartment is closed). Glove Box Driver Side To open the glove box on the driver side, pull the handle as indicated. 203 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 Privacy Lock Features (for versions/markets, where provided) The glove box in the passenger side can be equipped with an opening/closing electric actuator that can be locked and unlocked via the "Privacy Lock" menu of the MTC+, by entering a 4-digit PIN code. When you have to leave the vehicle to another driver (for eaxample, to park it), the "Valet Mode" feature is available in the same menu. This feature, in addition to the glove box, allows you to lock your settings for listening and guidance. It is important to memorise and take note of the PIN since if it is lost, you must contact the Maserati Service Network that will reset this feature. 204 NOTE: • "Glove Box Mode" and "Valet Mode" can not be activated at the same time. • "Glove Box Mode” and "Valet Mode" lock features must be activated when the glove box is already closed. If you activated one of these lock features when the glove box is opened, the glove box will not close properly and will not lock. Activation Procedure • Open "Controls" screen and touch "Privacy Lock" soft-key. With ADAS • Checkmarked one of the two features (the figures shows "Glove Box" feature only) and touch the soft-key to activate the feature. Without ADAS • Using the keypad, enter the four digits of the PIN and touch "OK". The system prompts you re-enter the PIN code to confirm it. Dashboard Instruments and Controls Glove box is now locked and the MTC+ will go back to "Controls" page. In this condition, system operation is reduced and only "Climate", "Controls" and "Settings" features are active. NOTE: • If you do not enter all PIN digits, a prompt will indicate that you should do so. • In case of incoming call while entering the PIN, the MTC+ system will temporarily stop the release function. As soon as the call is over, the keypad screen will be displayed again so that you can enter the PIN. Deactivation Procedure To unlock the glove box which it was locked with PIN code, touch "Controls" soft-key on the status bar and then "Privacy Lock" soft-key to enter this page. • Touch the soft-key to deactivate the feature (the figure shows "Glove Box Mode" feature only). open the glove box that has been locked using the PIN code. To perform this operation you need to remove the lower dashboard moulding to access the actuator unlocking cable. Considering the complexity of this operation, we recommend you to contact the Service Network. 4 • When the next page shown in figure appears, touch "OK". Unlock glove box by entering the lock code as previously specified. Glove Box Manual Unlock If battery is flat, it is necessary to manually unlock the actuator on the LH side of the glove box in order to 205 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Analog Clock Air Conditioning Controls To adjust the analog clock located on the center of the dashboard between the air outlets, use the MTC+ System (see “MTC+ Settings” in this section). The vehicle is equipped with an automatic dual-zone air conditioning system that allows to adjust separately the temperature and the airflow distribution in the left and in the right zone of the passenger compartment, according to the requests of the driver and the front passenger. A humidity sensor, positioned on the inner surface of the windshield, over the rear view mirror, allows the A/C system to prevent/eliminate fogging of the windshield and side windows. The best efficacy in preventing fogging is obtained by selecting the "AUTO" function, described later. A dual zone solar sensor helps to achieve the best comfort in presence of solar radiation. Upon request, the vehicle can be equipped with an additional automatic dual-zone air conditioning system installed in the central console, between the front seats. The additional dual-zone module, can be operated by the rear passengers (see “Four-zone Climate Control (optional)” in this chapter), by means of the control panel at the end of central console, but also by the front 4 The time can be visualized also on the MTC status bar and on the instrument cluster display (see "MTC+ Settings" in this section). Clock lighting works in the same way as instrument and controls backlighting (refer to "Lights" in section "Understanding the Vehicle"). 206 passengers using the soft-keys on MTC+ display. Dual-Zone Climate Controls This system can be operated by using the controls of the climate control panel on the dashboard, or the soft-keys on the MTC+ display when "Climate" mode is selected. Once entered in the “Climate” screen, it is possible use the lower rotary knob on the central console to scroll through the soft-key of each function: the cursor will appear in grey outline on the first available function. Press “Enter” button to enter the selected function and to adjust it. Once you have entered a function, press “Back” button to exit the function and to return the “Climate” main screen (see “Infotainment System” in this section for further details) In the "Climate" screen of the MTC+, the front seats and steering wheel comfort setting soft-keys may be present (optional equipments). The "OFF" state of the front seats comfort setting is shown on their soft-key. Dashboard Instruments and Controls display together with the active front seats and steering wheel comfort functions. Description of Controls All described functions can be set and modified using the climate control panel or the MTC+ display. Front seats and steering wheel comfort setting soft-keys are present even when the A/C is off (see "Front Seats" and/or "Steering Wheel Adjustment" in section "Understanding the Vehicle" for further details). To adjust driver and passenger side temperature and fan speed, climate control panel features rocker switches that can be pushed up to increase temperature/speed, or down to decrease them. When MTC+ is in any mode other than "Climate", pressing an air distribution or blower hard control on the climate control panel a small pop-up will appear for three seconds above the "Climate" icon on the main bar. 4 1. Climate control on/off Once you enter the screen “Climate”, touch the “ON” soft-key to switch the climate control on/off. When the MTC+ System is in any mode other than "Climate" ("Radio", "Media", "Controls", etc.) the settings of driver and passenger temperature and air flow distribution will be indicated on the upper part of the Press any of controls on the climate control panel to display “Climate” screen. 207 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 The “OFF” soft-key will appear in place of “ON” when the A/C is on. If the A/C system has been turned off, temperature values in the upper status bar will be obscured in all MTC+ modes. NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the Air Conditioning System will not function during Remote Start operation if the climate control is left in “OFF”. 2. A/C Touch the A/C soft-key to change the current air conditioning setting; the soft-key illuminates when the A/C is on. Operating this function will cause the automatic feature to switch into manual mode and the "AUTO" LED on the buttons and MTC+ soft-key will turn off. 208 3. Driver temperature control Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Touch the blue soft-key for cooler temperature. Touch the red soft-key for warmer temperature. The driver's temperature setting will be displayed on the MTC+ between the soft-keys and . The temperature can also be adjusted by touching and sliding the bar towards soft-key , to increase temperature, or towards soft-key to decrease it. During this phase, a small pop-up on the side will show the corresponding temperature. You can increase or decrease the temperature using the rocker switch on the climate control panel. NOTE: In “SYNC” mode, this control will also automatically and simultaneously adjust the passenger temperature. 4. Passenger temperature control Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Touch the soft-key for cooler temperature. Touch the soft-key for warmer temperature. The passenger's temperature setting will be displayed on the MTC+ screen between the soft-keys and . The temperature can also be adjusted by touching and sliding the bar towards soft-key , to increase temperature, or towards soft-key to decrease it. You can increase or decrease the temperature using the rocker switch on the climate control panel. NOTE: Pressing the 4 button/soft-key while in "SYNC" mode will automatically exit "SYNC". 5. Recirculation Press to change the current setting, the LED indicator on the button and the relevant soft-key illuminates to indicate which recirculation function is activated. For further details, see paragraph "Dual zone Climate Control Functions" in this chapter. 6. Blower control Blower control is used to adjust the amount of air forced through the climate system. Eight levels of blower speed can be selected. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual. On the climate control panel, push the rocker switch up to increase blower speed. Push the rocker switch down to decrease blower speed. Pushing down the rocker switch when set blower is at Dashboard Instruments and Controls the first speed, causes the A/C system shutdown (OFF condition). On the MTC+ display, touch the small icon of the blower to decrease the speed, or the big icon to increase it. Between the two icons, bars will appear to show the number of the corresponding selected speed. The blower can also be activated/ regulated by touching the bars between the two blower icons. When the MTC+ is displayed in any mode other than "Climate", the blower speed is indicated by the bright segments in the climate icon. 7 - 8. AUTO This function automatically controls the interior temperature by adjusting the air flow rate and the air distribution respectively on the driver and on the passenger zone. Press "AUTO" to switch the ATC between manual and automatic mode. The LED on the button and the “AUTO” soft-key illuminates when the "AUTO" function is activated. See “Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)” in this chapter for more information. 9. MAX defrosting/demisting Press the button or the MTC+ soft-key to switch the airflow setting to the windshield and the front side windows to get quick defrosting/ defogging. The LED on the button and the MTC+ soft-key illuminates when this feature is activated. Operating this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode: so the "AUTO" LED on the button and the MTC+ soft-key will turn off. With engine off, the blower will run at minimum speed (level 1) and can be increased manually: with engine on, the blower speed will gradually increase to the higher speed (level 8). MAX defrosting/demisting shall also involve REAR defrosting/demisting function. If this function is turned off the climate system will return to the previous setting, switching on the A/C ("A/C" LED on the button and the MTC+ soft-key illuminated). 10. REAR defrosting/demisting Press the button or the MTC+ soft-key to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors. The LED on the button and the MTC+ soft-key will illuminate when the rear window defroster and the heated external mirrors are on. The rear window defroster and the heated external mirrors automatically turn off after 10 minutes. For any subsequent request after the first one (in the current ignition cycle), the system activates the function for 5 minutes. The timing described above is automatically reset and the defrost/demisting function is deactivated at each key-off. CAUTION! Failure to observe the following cautions may cause damage to the rear windows defroster: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects inside the vehicle at a safe distance from the window. 4 11. MAX A/C By pressing the "MAX A/C" button or the MTC+ soft-key, the system automatically switches to get the maximum cold air flow in both zones. 12 - 13. Air flow distribution modes The airflow distribution mode, respectively on the driver and on the passenger zone, can be adjusted so air 209 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 210 comes from the dashboard vents, vents under the dashboard in direction of the floor, vents under the front seats and demist/defrost vents. The MTC+ display contains the relevant soft-keys used to set these modes for each zone. The climate control panel features a single button for each zone: press it several times to select and set the required airflow distribution mode. Available settings are as follows: • "Floor" mode Air for each zone comes from the front vents, located under the dashboard and under the front seats. A small portion of the airflow is directed through the defrost/demist vents to prevent windows fogging. • "Dashboard" mode "Dashboard" mode Air flows for each zone from four adjustable vents of the dashboard, two vents on the upper part of the dashboard and two positioned at the rear end of the central console. Each of these vents can be singly adjusted. The air grids or vanes of the vents can be moved to adjust air flow direction. A setting wheel, placed near each vent, allows to regulate or close the airflow. • "Bi-Level" mode Air for each zone comes from the dashboard and central console adjustable vents and the fixed floor vents. A small portion of the airflow is directed through the defrost/demist vents to prevent windows fogging. NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed to let cooler air come in the dashboard and rear part of the central console vents and warmer air from the floor vents. • "Defrost" mode Air for each zone comes from the dashboard defrost/demist vents to prevent windows fogging. • "Mix" mode Air for each zone comes from the defrost/demist vent, the vent under the dashboard and from floor vent. This mode is recommended for cold climates, to improve comfort and prevent windows fogging. • "Hi-Level" mode Air for each zone comes from the dashboard defrost/demist vents, from the dashboard and central console adjustable vents and the fixed floor vents. • "Tri-Level" mode Air for each zone comes from all the adjustable/fixed and defrost/demist vents. 14. "SYNC" mode Touch the "SYNC" soft-key on the MTC+ to switch the Sync feature on/off. The "SYNC" soft-key illuminates when this feature is selected. This function is used to synchronise the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in "SYNC" will automatically exit this feature. 15. "REAR" mode This soft-key is present only if the vehicle is equipped with the additional dual-zone air conditioning system for rear passengers. Touching "REAR" soft-key you enter the screen where the settings available for rear seat passengers are displayed. For the description of these controls, see paragraph "Four-Zone Climate Controls (optional)" of this chapter. Dual-Zone Climate Control Functions Air Conditioning (A/C) The "A/C" soft-key allows to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air Dashboard Instruments and Controls conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the vents into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, touch the "A/C" soft-key to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. When the "A/C" and "AUTO" functions are switched off it is not possible to have air at a lower temperature than the outside. Recirculation and Air Quality Sensor When outside air contains smoke, odours, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the recirculation control button or the relevant soft-key button to activate the two different functionalities. The recirculation function, that allows to open/close the A/C air inlet by operating the button on the climate control panel or the MTC+ soft key, is integrated with the Air Quality Sensor. This sensor, positioned upstream of the A/C filter, in front of the air intake of the A/C system, detects the presence of polluting substances and submits an electric signal to the A/C control unit, that closes the intake of the external air by activating the air recirculation. The button or the MTC+ soft-key can therefore enable three operating modes, switchable in sequence. Starting from the outside air condition with LED on the button off and MTC+ soft-key not highlighted, in which the external air is aspirated by the A/C system and treated to be introduced into the passenger compartment, subsequent actuations of the button or the MTC+ soft-key change the state as follows. • First press: the A/C system activates the automatic recirculation control by using the signal transmitted from the AQS. The symbol "A" on the button and the MTC+ soft-key lights up. • Second press: the A/C system activates the recirculation, the LED on the button or the MTC+ soft-key light up. The A/C system will stay this way up to a new actuation, or until the increased humidity could lead to windshield fogging: in this case the recirculation automatically switches to external air. • Third press: the A/C system switches back to external air (default operating mode). The next press of the button or the MTC+ soft-key restarts the operating cycle just described. NOTE: To avoid the risk of fogging, the AQS is disabled when the external temperature falls below 2°C (35°F) or rises above 26°C (79°F). 4 (Continued) 211 Dashboard Instruments and Controls NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead to window fogging. Select the MIX mode and increase the blower speed to prevent fogging. 4 MAX A/C Activating this function, the system switches to exit "AUTO", enter "A/C" and recirculation. The minimum temperature (LO) in both zones, the maximum blower speed and the "Dashboard" air distribution mode are also selected. The blower speed can be adjusted and the air distribution can be modified without exiting "MAX A/C". To exit "MAX A/C" touch the relevant MTC+ soft-key or exit A/C or recirculation. Selecting , "AUTO", or "OFF", will also exit "MAX A/C". 212 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Automatic operation • Press the "AUTO" soft-key of driver and/or passenger zone on the climate control panel or the relevant soft-key button on the MTC+ screen. The text "AUTO" will appear inside the space usually occupied by the bars between the blower icons. • Set the desired temperature adjusting the driver and/or passenger temperature control buttons or softkeys. The system automatically work to maintain the best comfort level inside the passengers compartment. • When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings anymore, simply allow the system to function automatically. • To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode, during cold start-ups the blower speed will remain low until the engine warms up. • AUTO mode can be deactivated by operating any airflow or blower controls and by pressing “AUTO”, “A/C”, “MAX AC”, ” " or “OFF” button or the same MTC+ soft-key. Manual operation The system allows manual selection of blower speed, air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control. The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by using the blower control. In this case the blower will operate at a fixed speed until a different speed is selected. This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle exiting the "AUTO" mode. Dashboard Instruments and Controls The user can also choose the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C operation, recirculation control and "SYNC" mode can also be manually selected. Four-Zone Climate Controls (optional) Air conditioning controls that allow rear passengers to adjust the temperature in the left and right rear part of the passenger compartment are located at the rear end of the central console underneath the adjustable air outlets or on the rear console storage compartment between the rear seats, if the vehicle is equipped with “Comfort Luxury” seats. "Comfort Luxury" Rear Seats Description of Controls The following functions can be operated/adjusted by using the rear climate control panel (represented on the "Comfort Luxury" rear seats version). 1. Rear climate control on/off Press the button to switch the rear climate control on/off. The LED on the button turns on when the rear A/C is on. 2. A/C Press to change the current air conditioning (A/C) setting, the "A/C" symbol on the button illuminates when the A/C is on. This will cause the automatic operation to switch into manual mode and the "AUTO" indicator will turn off. 3. Left side temperature control Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings or the button for warmer temperature. The set temperature value will be displayed in the area above the buttons. 4. Right side temperature control Provides the rear seats passengers with independent temperature control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings or the button for warmer temperature. The set temperature value will be displayed in the area above the buttons. 5. Blower control Blower control is used to regulate the airflow of the rear climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause the automatic mode to switch to manual. 4 213 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 Press the "+" button to increase blower speed. Press the "-" button for lower speed. Airflow distribution modes The airflow distribution can be adjusted to let air come in from the adjustable and fixed central console vents and floor vents. The set mode is recognisable through the lighting of the soft-key or the LED on the button of the climate control panel. 6. "Bi-Level" mode Air comes from the adjustable vents on the rear central console and on the side pillars between the doors, and from the fixed vents on the floor. NOTE: The Bi-Level mode is designed to provide comfort by sending cooler air out of the central console and side pillars vents and warmer air from the floor vents. 7. "Floor" mode Air comes from the floor vents under the front seats. 8. "Torso" mode Air comes from the adjustable vents on the central console and the ones on the pillars between the doors. Each of these vents can be singly adjusted. The air grids of the vents can be moved up/down and right/left to 214 adjust the airflow direction. A setting wheel, placed near each vent, allows to regulate the airflow or to close the vent. 9. AUTO This function automatically controls the interior temperature by adjusting the air flow rate and the air distribution. • Press the "AUTO" button: the automatic rear climate control switches from manual to automatic mode and vice-versa. The "AUTO" symbol on the button illuminates when this function is activated. • Adjust then the temperature you wish to maintain by regulating the left and/or right side temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is set, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level. • When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings anymore: simply allow the system to function automatically. To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode, during cold start-ups the blower speed will remain low until the engine warms up. Four-Zone Climate Control by the Driver By operating the MTC+ display controls the driver can adjust the settings of the rear climate zones by touching "REAR" soft-key. Once you have entered the rear climate screen, by touching the following soft-keys, the driver is able to: Dashboard Instruments and Controls 6 7 1 The A/C compressor will turn on. 2 The system switch the ATC between manual and automatic mode by controlling the interior temperature (controls 3, 4) by adjusting the air flow rate and the air distribution (controls 5) of the rear passengers. Adjust the temperature in the left rear zone in the indicated mode for the front zones. Adjust the temperature in the right rear zone in the indicated mode for the front zones. Set the airflow distribution in “Torso”, “Bi-Level” or “Floor” mode. 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 Synchronise the two rear passenger temperature setting. If the driver adjust the temperature while SYNC mode is on, this will affect the rear passenger temperature. If the front or rear passengers adjust the temperature setting the system automatically break the function and turn it off. Set the blower speed through seven speed levels. Re-activate the rear climate setting. Turn off the rear climate option. Block the settings of the rear climate. Return to the front climate control screen. Operating Tips • Continuous use of the air recirculation in winter, in rainy weather or humid climate is not recommended because it may cause window fogging. • Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by fast defrosting/demisting. The "Mix" mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed. NOTE: • Recirculation mode without A/C should not be used for long periods of time, as fogging may occur. • If inside the passenger compartment there are conditions of high temperature and humidity, when the A/C compressor is switched on (A/C soft-key illuminated on MTC+ display or LED on climate control panel A/C button ON) there may be some cold steam at ventilation port outlet: this situation is normal and does not indicate air conditioning system malfunction. • Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to prevent or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. 4 • Make sure the external air intake grille, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves or other objects. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. • The temperature can be displayed in Metric or U.S. units by selecting 215 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 the "Units" customer programmable feature. See "MTC+ Settings" in this section. • Any time you store your vehicle or keep it stationary (i.e., during vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air by high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication and minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. Phone and Voice Controls on Steering Wheel The commands on the right side of the steering wheel activate/deactivate the phone mode ( ) and the Voice Recognition ( ) controls functions. A/C Filter The climate control system filters outside air containing dust, pollen and some odours. Strong odours cannot be totally removed by A/C filter at the entrance of the air climate system. See "Maintenance Procedures" in section "Maintenance and Care" for filter replacement instructions. These functions are only available when one or more Bluetooth® compatible mobile phones are paired with the MTC+ System connection: to pair a phone and to learn all available functions refer to the "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)" guide. NOTE: On the Maserati website, at www.maserati.com, or through the Maserati Service Network you may consult the list of telephones that are 216 compatible with the MTC+, and their level of compatibility. The voice command communication system is fully integrated with the vehicle's audio system. The volume can be adjusted from the upper knob on the central console (see"“Infotainment System" in this section or from the steering wheel radio controls (see "Audio Controls" in this section). The system will automatically mute the radio when using the phone mode. When activating the phone mode using voice commands with speakerphone, you should talk quietly in a normal conversional tone by keeping the driving position and turning to the microphone of the voice command system located inside the internal rear-view mirror. The ability of the system voice control to recognise the user's voice commands can be invalidated when speaking too quickly or too loudly. Dashboard Instruments and Controls WARNING! Any voice-controlled system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable regulations. Full attention should be kept on driving. Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death. Phone Mode By using the phone button on the steering wheel it is possible to: activate the phone mode, start a call, show recent incoming and outgoing calls, show contacts list, etc. All these functions can also be reached by using the touch screen commands on the MTC+ display in "Phone" mode. a control is executed (e.g.: answer, reject, etc.) for the incoming call. The screen will only display the phone number or name of caller (if available) as long as this complies with system specifications in terms of font and number of characters. Call details can be displayed at any time through “Audio” submenu item. “Phone: call details” using the buttons on steering wheel RH side. On display, said details shall temporarily replace the ones on media source in use. 4 Voice Commands When pressing the phone button an audible sound will invite you to impart a command. Information on incoming call is indicated in a pop-up on instrument cluster display main area if this feature is checkmarked on MTC+ (see “MTC+ Settings” in this section). Said information will stay displayed until The short pressure of the VR button on the steering wheel allows you to give voice commands dedicated to all the native functions of the MTC+ (radio, media, navigator, climate, etc.). Excluded are all functions that interact with the Apps: “Apple CarPlay” and “Android Auto” or those of the voice assistants: Siri, Google Voice, etc..., supported on the mobile paired via Bluetooth® to the MTC+. The voice assistant of Baidu is not available with mobile paired via Bluetooth® to the MTC+ because Baidu CarLife is a projection mode application. A long pressure of the VR button, in addition to the native ones of the 217 Dashboard Instruments and Controls MTC+, allows to give voice commands dedicated to the above mentioned Apps and voice assistants. make phone calls, create notes and reminders, etc. NOTE: The pressure difference of the VR button (short or long) is effective only when the mobile is paired via Bluetooth® to the MTC+. 4 218 Once voice recognition is activated via the VR button on the steering wheel, a “teleprompter” screen is displayed on the MTC+ with a list of commands specific to each active function key on the main menu bar. The key words to activate the dialog are white, the variable ones gray between the symbols "< >" and the alternative ones after the slash "/". Touching “Voice Settings” soft-key opens the Setting page where the user can set if and how to visualize the teleprompter and close it by touching the red "X". Touching one of the function soft-keys, the session is canceled and displays the selected function screen. When pressing the VR button an acoustic signal will invite to give a voice command. NOTE: For further details refer to the "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)" guide. Siri Smart Personal Assistant When a compatible iPhone or iPad that supports Siri voice recognition is paired to the vehicle via Bluetooth®, a long press of the VR button activates the Siri Smart Personal Assistant. Siri requires mobile internet access and its functionality might change depending on the geographical area. Through simple voice commands, without taking your eyes off the road, it may be possible to send messages, 5 - Driving Normal Starting of the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Automatic Start&Stop System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 All-Wheel Drive (AWD version only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Drive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Brake and Stability Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Using the Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Use of the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Electronic Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Forward Collision Warning - FCW (for versions/ markets, where provided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Lane Keeping Assist - LKA (optional, with ACC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Blind Spot Assist - BSA (for versions/markets where provided, without ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Active Blind Spot Assist - ABSA (optional, with ACC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Highway Assist – HAS (for versions/markets where provided, with ACC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Traffic Sign Assist – TSA (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Tires - General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Driving Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Adding Reducing Agent AdBlue® (Diesel only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 219 Driving Normal Starting of the Engine WARNING! It is dangerous to run the engine in an enclosed area. The engine consumes oxygen and discharges carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and other toxic gases in the atmosphere. 5 When doors are opened, the instrument cluster displays the Maserati Logo in the center and the complete odometer plus the open doors indicator in the lower part of the cluster. Before starting the engine, close the doors, adjust your seat, the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt and instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. 220 The shift lever must be in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear (see "Automatic Transmission" in this section). cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). CAUTION! • Before starting the engine, switch off the electrical devices with a high power consumption (air-conditioning and heating system, heated rear window, headlights, etc.). • Do not start the engine if the fuel level in the tank is low. The keyless ignition allows the driver to operate the ignition switch by pushing the center button, as long as the key fob RKE transmitter is within the passenger compartment (check "Keys” in section “Before Starting” for further information). By pressing the brake pedal and pushing the START/STOP button the engine starts. Instrument cluster displays the initial sequence with warning light and analog instruments test routine and switch-on of the engine temperature indicators and fuel level. This happens if option “On” was set in screen settings for display switch-on (see chapter "Instrument The current display subsequently sets up with the latest screenshot. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to starting it, press the button again. Driving NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. If the driver only pushes the START/STOP button but does not press the brake pedal, the ignition switch cycles to the ACC position (see "Keys" in section "Before Starting") and the instrument cluster displays the latest screenshot. At the third press of the START/STOP button the ignition switch returns to OFF position and the display powers down. At the fourth press of the START/STOP button the screen will display the message that invites you to press the brake pedal and push the START/STOP button to start the engine. NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) position and the transmission is in P (Park), the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position. After starting the engine, the idle speed is controlled automatically and will decrease as the engine warms up. Notes for the Diesel Engine Starting (Diesel only) With cold engine and external temperature below 0°C (32°F), ignition may be delayed a few seconds in order to allow the glow plugs to pre-heat. In this case the amber light will illuminate on the TFT display and will stay on for a few seconds after the engine has started. Cold Weather Precautions (Diesel only) If the outside temperature is very low, the diesel fuel thickens due to the formation of paraffin clots and could clog the diesel filter. In order to avoid these problems, different types of diesel fuel are distributed according to the season: summer type, winter type and arctic type (very cold, mountainous areas). If refueling with diesel fuel whose specifications are not suitable for the too cold outside temperature, it is advisable to mix TUTELA DIESEL ART additive in the proportions shown on the container with the fuel. Pour the additive into the tank before the fuel using the funnel provided. Engine Start Failure CAUTION! • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Moreover, unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. See "Auxiliary Jump Start Procedure" in section "In an Emergency" for further information. 5 Flooded engine clearing If the engine fails to start after you have followed the described procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, move the shift lever in P (Park) position. Press and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator all the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the START/STOP button once. The starter will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, 221 Driving and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal starting of the engine” procedure. Starting by cold engine Start-off slowly, avoiding sudden acceleration and rev the engine up at low medium speeds. High performance driving should be avoided until the engine temperature reaches 65-70°C (149-158°F). Engine Turn Off 5 222 • With the shift lever in P (Park), D (Drive) or R (Reverse) positions (see "Automatic Transmission" in this section) and vehicle standstill, press and release the START/STOP button to switch off the engine. A burst on the accelerator pedal before turning off the engine has no purpose and increases fuel consumption. • If the shift lever is in N (Neutral) and the START/STOP button is pressed once, the instrument cluster will display a "Vehicle Not in Park" message and the engine will remain running. WARNING! Never leave a vehicle out of the P (Park) position, as it could move. NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) position and the transmission is in P (Park), the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to OFF position. Engine Turn Off when in Automatic Start&Stop When the engine has been turned off by the Start&Stop system, press and release the START/STOP button. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position and the vehicle is off. "Panic Stop" Strategy In panic conditions, if driver stops engine in any non-standard manner while driving at a speed over 8 km/h (5 mph), the "Panic Stop" strategy can manage the situation by checking gearchange condition upon engine cutting, driver’s action on brakes, road condition (flat or slope) so as to set gearchange to the most suitable condition. Automatic Start&Stop System The Maserati Start&Stop system allows the engine to automatically switch off when the vehicle stops and to restart when the driver intends to drive. This feature can reduce fuel consumption up to 6% according to different drive conditions. During the "Stop (AutoStop)" phase the ignition is still on and all security features are available. In order for the Start&Stop to activate, the vehicle must be stationary and the brake pedal adequately pressed. NOTE: If the brake pedal is not sufficiently pressed the Start&Stop may not function even if the vehicle is stopped. When the Start&Stop switches off the engine, the related light illuminates on the instrument cluster. As soon as the brake pedal is released, the engine turns on. While the vehicle is stopped, the transmission can be placed in P (Park) pressing the "P" button on the shift lever In this case it is possible to release the brake pedal and the vehicle will remain in "AutoStop" with engine off. Driving Pressing the brake pedal and shifting transmission into D (Drive) or R (Reverse) will deactivate the "AutoStop" condition and restart the engine. Start&Stop Not Active For keeping driving safety, interior comfort and a correct functioning of engine and vehicle, the Start&Stop function does not activate under the following conditions: • When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled (see example). Start&Stop Deactivated Start&Stop function is deactivated under the following conditions: • When SPORT drive mode is activated. • When (ESC Off) drive mode is activated. • If it has been disabled through the main menu item "Start&Stop", via the controls located on the right side of the steering wheel, or through the Start & Stop hard button on the central console (see chapter "Drive Mode" in this section) or via the MTC+ in the "Controls" page (see "MTC+ “Controls” Screen" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls") . • When the driver door is open. • When the fuel level is too low. • When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep road. • When the vehicle is stopped with steered wheels (over 135° of steering wheel angle for each part). • When the vehicle is manoeuvring: shift lever in R (Reverse). • When the temperature conditions inside the vehicle do not correspond to the air conditioning setting. • When the front and rear "defroster" function is activated. • When the engine coolant and the engine oil temperature is not on proper functioning level. • When the external temperature is too cold. • When the battery charge is below safety value. • When the previous stop had just happened (few seconds) and the minimum speed has not yet been achieved. • Shortly after R (Reverse) has been set or when driving under a certain speed level. • When the hood is open. • The sensors managing the Start&Stop have been damaged. • Start&Stop system faults are present. • When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and/or Highway Assist (HAS) system are engaged. • During DPF regeneration process (Diesel only). 5 Automatic Restarting of the Engine The engine may automatically restart, before the brake pedal has been released, when one of the following conditions occurs: • The SPORT drive mode or (ESC Off) drive mode is being activated. 223 Driving 5 • If the Start&Stop function has been disabled through the main menu voice "Start & Stop" (see chapter "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls") or through the Start&Stop hard button on the central console (see chapter "Drive Mode" in this section) or via MTC+ in the “Control” page (see "MTC+ ”Control" Screen" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). • If shift lever is moved to R (Reverse). • If the steering wheel is moved to steer the wheels. • When the temperature conditions inside the vehicle do not correspond to the air conditioning setting. • When changing the temperature setting on the air conditioning. • When the defroster function is being activated. • When the battery charge is below safety value. • When the accelerator pedal is being pressed (together with the brake pedal). • If a long time has passed since the last automatic stop of the engine. Occupants Safety Function To enhance occupants safety, the Start&Stop system monitors if the driver is present and does not allow 224 automatic restarting of the engine if one of the following manoeuvres is being performed while in "AutoStop" condition: • The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt and releases the brake pedal. • The driver opens the door and releases the brake pedal. • The driver unbuckles the seat belt and opens the door. • The driver opens the hood. All the above-mentioned conditions deactive the Start&Stop function (the "AutoStart" is deactivated and the engine remains off) and the transmission shifts automatically in P (Park). The telltale will flash to indicate the Start&Stop function disabling. To restart the engine it is necessary to press the brake pedal and push the START/STOP button. Move the shift lever to D (Drive) to drive away. WARNING! • Even when the vehicle is stopped in the "Stop (AutoStop)" phase, the driver is responsible for the vehicle and the occupants and shall take care of what happens inside and outside the vehicle. • Even when the vehicle is stopped within the "Stop (AutoStop)" phase, the vehicle driver is responsible for the vehicle, the vehicle’s occupants and the vehicle’s surrounding area. Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running; doing so poses a risk of danger. It is a good practice to always ensure to set the parking brake and place the transmission gear selector lever into the P (Park) position, thereby ensuring the vehicle will not move, when performing any vehicle checks, maintenance and/or service procedures on the vehicle. Start & Stop Function Disabling Start & Stop enabled is the default status. Under certain driving conditions, when frequent stops and restarts of the engine may become annoying, it is possible to disable the Start & Stop function in different ways. Press the Start&Stop hard button on the central console to the disable the function (see instructions in chapter "Drive Mode" in this section). When the Start & Stop function is disabled, in addition to the related Driving message the amber indicator indicated in the picture will turn on. Without ADAS Other ways to disable the Start & Stop are via the MTC+ entering the "Controls" or (Apps) menu. • Touch the "Controls" soft-key on the lower part of MTC+ display. • Touch the "Start & Stop Off" soft-key to disable the function. • Touch a second time the same softkey to re-enable the function. To quickly disable the Start&Stop function, you can insert it in the main menu bar, at the bottom of the MTC+ display, as follows: • press button to open applications/settings screen; • hold depressed and drag the "Start & Stop Off" icon until it overlaps the one to be replaced on the bottom bar. 5 With ADAS NOTE: The highlighted soft-key indicates the disabled status of Start & Stop system and vice versa. • Touch the (Apps) soft-key on the lower part of MTC+ display. • Touch the "Start & Stop Off" soft-key to disable the function. Once it is set in the menu bar, the new menu will be immediately operational. 225 Driving NOTE: The yellow LED on the button indicates the disabled status of Start&Stop system and vice versa. If the driving conditions allow it, the user can re-enable the Start&Stop function at any time using one of previous ways. NOTE: After user intervention, the Start&Stop system will automatically update the status of the function in all contexts where it can be modified. Start&Stop System Failure 5 226 When the warning light and the related message illuminate on the TFT display (see chapter "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls") there is a malfunction in the Start&Stop system and the engine cannot be switched off and restarted automatically. To switch off or restart the engine it is necessary to push the START/STOP. Have the vehicle checked at the Service Network. Automatic Transmission The vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled 8-speed automatic transmission, which automatically changes gear according to the vehicle's instantaneous usage parameters (vehicle speed, road gradient and accelerator pedal position). It is possible to change gear manually thanks to the "M +/-" (Manual) position for the shift lever. The electronic shift lever replaces the conventional mechanical lever and has no mechanical connection to the transmission. The transmission is operated by electrical actuators on the hydraulic system and all commands to the control system are transmitted by the CAN network. The lever itself represents a mere user interface. Gear positions are simulated by solenoids inside the lever body, which are computer-controlled and enable or disable certain positions of the lever. The solenoids inside the shift lever prevent the movement of the lever towards invalid positions. The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating, therefore the gearshift behaviour could become perfect as expected after few hundreds of km. CAUTION! In order to properly use the automatic transmission, it is essential that you read through the whole chapter, so that you can understand right from the start what the correct and granted operations are. Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Shift into P (Park) only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop: this is the default position of the lever. After engaged P (Park) it is possible set the ignition switch to OFF. • Shift into or out of R (Reverse) only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. • Do not shift between P (Park), R (Reverse), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) when the engine is above idle speed. • To effect any change from vehicle stop to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 1st or 2nd gear, it is necessary to keep the brake pedal fully depressed. Driving • When leaving the vehicle, always WARNING! • It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing on the brake pedal. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the electronic parking brake, shift the transmission into P (Park), and turn the engine off. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. remove the key fob and lock your vehicle. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a feature which requires the transmission to be placed in P (Park) before the engine can be turned off. This prevents the driver from inadvertently leaving the vehicle without having placed the transmission in P (Park). This system also locks the transmission in P (Park) whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position. Transmission status is visible on the lever and on the lower part of the instrument cluster display. 5 Automatic Transmission Lever Automatic transmission is operated by a shift lever with unlock button, located on the central console, which can have the following operating positions: • P (Park): button control; • R (Reverse); • N (Neutral); • D (Drive) automatic forward speed; • M -/+ (Manual): "+" shifting to higher gear or "–" shifting to lower gear in manual mode (see "Drive Mode" in this section). Shift Lever Movements Shift lever has two main positions with a single step selection (backward/ forward): two unstable position (2) and (3) and two stable position (1) and (4). 227 Driving • When P (Park) mode is selected, the letter "P" becomes brighter and " " appears brighter near "N". Backlit on the shift lever depends on the status of the ignition device. 5 • Automatic lane ("R", "N", "D") as main central position. • Manual lane ("M +/-") on left position: move forward for "–" and backward for "+". • "P" is a button on the top of the lever. Shift Lever Backlit • White backlit for "P", "R", "N", "D" and "M +/-": brighter when selected and dimmer when not selected. 228 To Engage a Mode (briefly) To select one of the operating modes, move the lever as previously indicated and press the brake pedal at the same time. To engage "P" mode, driver must press the "P" button. In order to engage "R", "N" or "D" mode, driver have to move the shift lever by pressing the unlock button. If the unlock button is not pressed, the instrument cluster shows the popup message shows in picture. The lever functions like a joystick, so releasing it after giving the command, it automatically returns to the two stable positions (vertical in line with "R", "N" and "D" or in line with "–" and "+" when in "M +/-" mode). • Normally, to engage R (Reverse) mode, press the brake pedal and the unlock button together. • To pass from P (Park) mode directly to D (Drive) mode, in addition to pressing the brake pedal, it is also necessary to press the unlock button. • Normally, to pass from R (Reverse) mode directly to D (Drive) mode and vice versa, in addition to pressing the brake pedal, it is necessary to press the unlock button. • The P (Park) mode can be automatically enabled by pressing the "P" button: if the shift lever was in "M +/-" position, will go to central stable position automatically. Driving • If using the shift lever in M +/(Manual) mode, you can activate it by moving the lever from D (Drive) to the left and then forward towards the "–" symbol or back towards the "+" symbol and the gear is shifted. • To exit P (Park) mode, or to pass from N (Neutral) to D (Drive) or R (Reverse) position when the car is stopped or is moving at a low speed, the brake pedal must also be pressed. CAUTION! • DO NOT accelerate while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to another mode. • After selecting a transmission mode, wait a few seconds before accelerating. This precaution is particularly important with a cold engine. Transmission Status on the Instrument Cluster Display By pressing the unlock button on the lever, the gear change positions field is displayed: if you release the button without moving the lever, the field disappears after 2 seconds. By operating instead the lever, the new range will be indicated in the field and in the lower part of the display. 5 If the vehicle is in D (Drive) status, in M +/- (Manual) or temporarily in manual drive mode, the gear position is indicated beside the lever status (“D” or “M”), on the lower part of the display. Service Shift Lever In the event of a shift lever malfunction, a message on the instrument cluster will invite to stop the car safety and turn off the engine. In this way the system moves the transmission in P (Park) position. 229 Driving WARNING! • Never use the P (Park) mode as a Automatic Transmission Range 5 230 P (Park) Use this position to park the vehicle. The transmission can be shifted from "P" position only with the brake pedal and the unlock button pressed: then move the shift lever. To move the shift lever from "P" position to any other position, the engine must be switched on. The engine can be regularly started in P (Park) range. Never attempt to use P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion. When parking on a level surface, you may press the “P” button first, and then apply the electronic parking brake by pulling the trigger upwards. The Instrument cluster will display the related light indicator and the message for 5 seconds. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before pressing the "P" button. For enhanced security, turn the front wheels toward the kerb on a downhill and away from the kerb on an uphill grade. substitute for the electric parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to prevent vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • Make sure the transmission is in P (Park) before leaving the vehicle. CAUTION! DO NOT race the engine when shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the "P" position: • when shifting into P (Park), push the "P" button on the shift lever. • with the brake pedal released, verify that "P" position is illuminated on the shift lever and in the instrument cluster display. R (Reverse) This range is used to move the vehicle backward. Switching to R (Reverse) starting from N (Neutral) is only possible if the vehicle is moving backwards. We Driving recommend to shift into R (Reverse) only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Vehicle stationary: switching between R (Reverse) and D (Drive), passing from N (Neutral), requires brake pedal pressed and action on the lever. • Vehicle moving: the driver can switch from R (Reverse) to N (Neutral) acting on the shift lever without pressing the unlock button and the brake pedal. N (Neutral) • Vehicle stationary and engine started: switching from N (Neutral) to P (Park) requires "P" button pressed only. Switching from N (Neutral) to R (Reverse) and/or D (Drive) requires brake pedal and unlock button pressed and the action on the shift lever. • Vehicle moving: switching from N (Neutral) to R (Reverse) and/or D (Drive) requires pressing the unlock button and the action on the shift lever. Switching to R (Reverse) starting from N (Neutral) is only possible if the vehicle is moving backwards, while switching to D (Drive) starting from N (Neutral) is only possible if the vehicle is moving forwards. Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into P (Park) mode if you must leave the vehicle. NOTE: To move the car into tunnel washers, or to generally move with engine off, if foreseen use the "Car Wash" mode (see "Bodywork Maintenance and Cure" chapter in section "Maintenance and Care"). WARNING! Do not switch to N (Neutral) and/or never turn off the ignition to coast downhill. These are unsafe practices that limit driver’s response to changing traffic or road conditions. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in N (Neutral) can result in transmission damage. See "Towing a Disabled Vehicle" in section "In an Emergency" for further information. D (Drive) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically shifts up and down through all gears. The D (Drive) mode provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions of the vehicle. • Vehicle stationary: to switch from D (Drive) to R (Reverse) requires brake pedal and unlock button pressed and the action on the shift lever: to reach N (Neutral) starting from D (Drive) is possible by only acting on the shift lever. • To enable special operations while the car is moving at a low speed, such as getting out of marsh or snow, it is possible to run quickly from D (Drive) to R (Reverse), and vice versa, by pressing the unlock button and acting on the shift lever passing from N (Neutral). • Vehicle moving: switching to N (Neutral) from D (Drive) it is not necessary to press brake pedal. • From D (Drive) selected mode it is always possible to switch to M +/- (Manual) mode, by move the shift lever to the left (see following paragraph); to return to "D" position, move the shift lever to the right. It is possible to shift from D (Drive) mode to M +/- (Manual) mode regardless of car speed. 5 231 Driving 5 • When in D (Drive) mode, using the paddles behind the steering wheel (if equipped), will cause the system to enter a temporary function and enable the manual shift mode. This range is indicated with the symbols "+/-" above and below "D" letter on the gear range field of the display. The system will then switch back to automatic mode according to time elapsed in “temporary” mode and driving conditions. At extremely cold temperatures (-30°C / -23°F or below), transmission may be affected by the low temperature of the engine and transmission. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a normal level. M +/- (Manual) This mode is obtained by moving the shift lever to the left in "M +/-" position. In this mode, the transmission interacts with the driver in order to allow manual shift and ensure increased control of the vehicle. The current mode allows the transmission system to optimise the engine brake action, remove undesired shifting into higher and lower gears and improve the overall performance of the vehicle. 232 This mode allows you to move the shift lever step by step forward "–" or backward "+" without pressing the unlock button. The current transmission gear is displayed on the instrument cluster beside "M". Manual mode can be activated at any time, with no need to release the brake pedal. In M +/- (Manual) mode, the transmission will shift up or down (+/–) if manually selected by the driver by using the shift lever, or shift paddles on the steering wheel (if foreseen). The transmission remains in the engaged gear until the driver shifts into another higher or lower gear, except in the following cases. • Lack of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to automatic operation. The transmission will also upshift automatically once maximum engine speed is reached. • If in SPORT mode, the transmission will remain in the selected gear even when maximum engine speed is reached. The transmission will upshift only if enabled by the driver. Manual upshift or downshift will be maintained as long as SPORT mode is selected, even by full stroke pedal press. • If in “M +/-“ or in SPORT mode, the transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to halt (to prevent engine lugging) and the current gear will display on the instrument cluster. Shifting the shift lever backward “+” or moving the right shift paddle "+" towards the steering wheel when stationary, will cause the vehicle to start in second gear. If the vehicle speed is too low, the system will ignore further upshifts. Avoid using speed control when the M +/- (Manual) mode is engaged. When the car stops in M +/- (Manual) mode, the transmission automatically moves the shift lever and inserts P (Park). If you enter the I.C.E. drive mode when the gearshift is in "M +/-" position, the Driving system activates the automatic return of the shift lever in D (Drive) mode. downshift or upshift (example in the figures). Note for Diesel Version If the transmission is in SPORT mode, the system will change gear automatically when the set rpm limit (limiter) is reached. Shift Paddles (if equipped) The driver can change gears with the shift paddles behind the steering wheel when in D (Drive) and M +/(Manual) mode. instrument cluster beside the "M" indication and current shifted gear. Pull the right shift paddle "+" towards the steering wheel and release it to enter the higher gear; do the same operation with the left shift paddle "-" to enter the lower gear. • When in D (Drive) mode, by pressing "–" paddle the transmission shifts to "D1 - D2" temporary mode. • Pull simultaneously both paddles to deactivate the D (Drive) temporary mode. Gear Shift Indicator Light In order to improve fuel economy, we recommend that you shift gears when the system prompts you to do so. This will help reduce fuel consumption without significantly affecting vehicle performance. The indicator beside the displayed gear will light up just before reaching the required speed to change 5 When the new gear is engaged, the indicator turns off. If the shift runs late or is not performed at all, the indicator remains lit for a few seconds then turns off. As soon as new conditions requiring further gear change occur, the indicator light will illuminate again. (Continued) 233 Driving NOTE: The gearshift indicator will only work when the transmission is set in M +/(Manual) mode. red warning light illuminates on the instrument cluster. Transmission Malfunction and Overheating Conditions 5 Transmission Emergency Control Transmission function is electronically monitored to detect abnormal conditions. If a condition that could result in transmission damage is detected, "Transmission Limp Home Mode" will be activated. In this situation, the transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission system may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver about the more serious transmission conditions, and indicate what actions may be necessary. Transmission Oil Over Temperature If the transmission oil temperature exceeds the operating limit, the 234 In this case, slow down until temperature returns to normal level (the light will turn off). If this is not sufficient, we recommend to stop the vehicle, shift the lever to position P (Park) or N (Neutral) and keep the engine idle until the red temperature warning light turns off and the message disappears from the display. Resume driving without demanding high engine performance. If the red warning light and the related message turns on again, it is advisable to stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and wait for the engine/transmission assembly to fully cool down. If the instrument cluster message indicates that the transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown, perform the following procedure preferably at a Service Center. In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps. • Stop the vehicle. • Shift the transmission into P (Park), if possible. • Turn the engine off. • Wait approximately 30 seconds. • Restart the engine. • Shift the transmission into D (Drive) and then into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit the Service Network at your earliest possible convenience, which has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position See chapter "Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position" in section "In an Emergency". Driving All-Wheel Drive (AWD version only) The active on-demand All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system provides available optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear wheels as necessary. To maximise fuel economy, the AWD system automatically disengages torque distribution on front axle when road and environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental conditions require increased levels of road traction, the AWD system automatically distributes the torque between front and rear axle in order to grant the best driving experience. Torque distribution is displayed on the TFT in the "Drive Mode" main menu. Refer to paragraph "TFT Display: Menus and Settings" in chapter "Instrument Cluster" of section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information. WARNING! There may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel slip condition occurs. NOTE: If the AWD system service warning message appears after engine start up, or during driving, it means that the AWD system is not functioning properly or is in recovery mode due to overheating caused by the excessive wheel spin. In this condition the vehicle can continue driving but only rear wheel drive is working. If the warning message is often activated, it is recommended to have the vehicle serviced at the Service Network. 5 235 Driving Drive Mode Controls Preview Drive modes can be set using the buttons on central console. CAUTION! "NORMAL" is the default drive mode, optimised for the best balance between performances, fuel consumptions and emissions in the standard conditions use of the car. 5 Buttons on the central console have the following functions: • (ESC Off): to exclude/reactivate the ESC system. • (Start&Stop Off): to deactivate/ reactivate the Start&Stop system. • I.C.E: to activate/deactivate the drive mode to ensure increased control 236 on slippery surfaces as well as higher energy efficiency. • SPORT: to activate/deactivate a sportier drive mode. In this mode, the vehicle has a faster throttle response and ESC sport calibration (not recommended on wet/slippery surfaces). Activating this drive mode, will also change the EPS setting. • (Suspension): to switch between the two suspensions setting modes: soft (LED light off) and hard ("S", LED light on). Activating this drive mode, will also change the EPS setting. By selecting one of these drive modes, the yellow or white LED on the button illuminates and, for some of these, the vehicle configuration obtained is graphically displayed on instrument cluster. The same screen is also obtained when selecting the "Drive mode" menu using the buttons on steering wheel. When changing drive mode between I.C.E., NORMAL, SPORT and (Suspension), engine temperature and fuel level indicators inner edge will change color if "Outline Coloring" of submenu "Screen Setup" is set to "On" (see example in the figure). Refer to chapter "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information. Setting the Drive Mode Drive modes can be set using the buttons on central console. Keys (buttons) only have two statuses: OFF and ON. The OFF status (button released) is the standard function mode. The ON status is activated by pressing the button, the dedicated LED will illuminate. It is necessary to press the (ESC Off) button for at least 3 seconds. At each key on the car starts always in NORMAL drive mode (all LEDs are OFF) and driver can select different drive mode according to following table. Button ON – Button pressed (LED ON) Electronic Stability Control ESC partially deactivated. Driving Button ON – Button pressed (LED ON) Start&Stop function deactivated. I.C.E. SPORT Increased Control and Efficiency mode ON (*). Sportier drive mode (SPORT) ON. Hard/stiff suspension setting (“S”). (*) I.C.E. (Increased Control and Efficiency) operates on engine supply in order to reduce fuel consumption, exhausts, noisiness (efficiency) by dampening vehicle reactions (control). The current mode is also useful for low-grip surfaces. 5 The tables below summarise the adjustment of transmission and engine parameters according to set drive mode/s. (ESC Off) is the only mode that does not depend on the activation or deactivation of the other modes. The tables show the two configurations with: • (ESC Off) button NOT pressed; • (ESC Off) button pressed. 237 Driving (ESC Off) Button NOT pressed Button pressed: LED ON Button not pressed: LED OFF I.C.E. SPORT Setup NORMAL + S&S enabled + Soft suspensions 5 238 I.C.E. SPORT I.C.E. SPORT I.C.E. SPORT I.C.E. SPORT NORMAL + S&S disabled + Soft suspensions I.C.E. + S&S enabled + Soft suspensions SPORT + S&S disabled + Soft suspensions NORMAL + S&S disabled + Hard suspensions Stability control Active Active Active Active-Sport (*) Active-Sport (*) Electric Power Steering (EPS) Normal Normal Normal Sport Sport Suspensions setup Normal Normal Normal Normal Hard Engine control Normal Normal Comfort Performance Performance Engine boost Normal boost Overboost Low boost Overboost Overboost Exhaust sound Low (Rev. Threshold) Low (Rev. Threshold) Low Always High Always High Gear shifting point Normal ‒ Comfort Performance Performance Kick down Yes Yes Yes - Soft Yes - Strong Yes - Strong Upshift rev. limiter Yes Yes Yes Yes (No, when in M+/-) Yes (No, when in M+/-) Automatic downshift Normal Anti - Stall Comfort Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-) Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-) Driving Button pressed: LED ON Button not pressed: LED OFF Shifting timing I.C.E. SPORT Normal I.C.E. SPORT Rapid - Normal I.C.E. SPORT Comfort I.C.E. SPORT Sport (Rapid Sport, when in M +/-) I.C.E. SPORT Sport (Rapid Sport, when in M +/-) (*) In low- and medium-grip conditions (e.g., rain, snow, ice, sand, etc.) it is advisable not to activate SPORT mode, even with the ESC system active (button (ESC OFF) not pressed). (ESC Off) Button pressed Button pressed: LED ON Button not pressed: LED OFF I.C.E. SPORT Setup NORMAL + S&S disabled + Soft suspensions I.C.E. SPORT I.C.E. SPORT I.C.E. SPORT I.C.E. SPORT NORMAL + S&S disabled + Soft suspensions I.C.E. + S&S disabled + Soft suspensions SPORT + S&S disabled + Soft suspensions NORMAL + S&S disabled + Hard suspensions Stability control OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Electric Power Steering (EPS) Normal Normal Normal Sport Sport Suspensions setup Normal Normal Normal Normal Hard Engine control Normal Normal Comfort Performance Performance Engine boost Normal boost Overboost Low boost Overboost Overboost 5 239 Driving Button pressed: LED ON Button not pressed: LED OFF 5 240 I.C.E. SPORT I.C.E. SPORT I.C.E. SPORT I.C.E. SPORT I.C.E. SPORT Exhaust sound Low (Rev. Threshold) Low (Rev. Threshold) Low Always High Always High Gear shifting point Normal ‒ Comfort Performance Performance Kick down Yes Yes Yes - Soft Yes - Strong Yes - Strong Upshift rev. limiter Yes Yes Yes Yes (No, when in M+/-) Yes (No, when in M+/-) Automatic downshift Normal Anti - Stall Comfort Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-) Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-) Shifting timing Normal Rapid - Normal Comfort Sport (Rapid Sport, when in M +/-) Sport (Rapid Sport, when in M +/-) Driving NOTE: A different drive mode can be set even with engine running and vehicle in motion. To activate a drive mode, press briefly the corresponding button. The LED on the button will light up and set drive mode screen will be displayed (example in the figure: NORMAL) for 5 seconds. To deactivate the drive mode, press the same button again: the LED will turn off and the display will show the message indicating that (ESC OFF) drive mode is off and ESC system is active. Activate/Deactivate (ESC OFF) Drive Mode To activate (ESC OFF) drive mode press the corresponding button for at least 3 seconds: the yellow LED on the button will turn on. Deactivate/Reactivate (Start&Stop Off) Drive Mode To deactivate the Start&Stop function normally active, press the corresponding button once: the yellow LED on the button will turn on. To reactivate the Start&Stop function, press the same button again: the LED will turn off. To disable the drive mode activated, press the same button again: the LED will turn off. Monitoring Settings on Display By gaining access to "Drive mode" menu through the buttons on steering wheel right-hand side, it is possible to monitor the settings for driving. The list and figure show vehicle parameters referred to each drive mode. Driving mode and its parameters are identified by a different color (example in the figure: I.C.E.). 5 Activate/Deactivate I.C.E., SPORT and (Suspension) Drive Mode To activate one of these drive mode, press the corresponding button once: the white LED on the button will turn on. 241 Driving 5 242 A Powertrain. B ESC. C Suspension stiffness. D Torque distribution (AWD version only). Press " " (Suspension) button, the icon with "S" beside will light up on the upper right side of the TFT display. Driving The table below specifies the default settings for each drive mode. Drive Mode Default Condition ESC I.C.E. Normal ESC Normal Normal ESC 5 Sport Normal 243 Driving Drive Mode Default Condition ESC Sport Sport 5 244 Driving I.C.E. Mode excluding ESC To release the vehicle in low grip conditions (e.g.: heaps of snow, mud, sand, etc), it is possible to shift the transmission feature in the specific driving mode as required for these situations, by pressing the I.C.E. button and to exclude completely the yaw and spinning control system, by pressing the button for at last three seconds (ESC Off). Parking Brake The vehicle is equipped with an electric automatic parking brake, also called EPB (Electric Parking Brake). The EPB braking action on model with "Base" braking system (equipped with rear floating caliper) is ensured by a power actuator directly working on the brake pad inside each caliper of the rear brake system. All other braking system ("Performance Dual Cast" and "Dual Cast") are equipped with a dedicated caliper which acts on each rear brake disc. It can be automatically engaged when the engine is turned off and disengaged with engine running, driver seatbelt latched and driver door closed, while pressing the brake pedal and operating the shift lever. Furthermore, EPB can be automatically engaged above a slope threshold with transmission in parking to avoid damage to the vehicle. EPB can be disengaged before to turn off the vehicle. When the parking brake is applied, the warning light lights up on the tachometer display and the related message is displayed on the instrument cluster for 5 seconds (see "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). During engagement and disengagement procedures, the warning light flashes until the parking brake has reached its maximum activation force and is respectively fully released. In the above-mentioned conditions, the automatic engagement function can be deactivated/activated by selecting the menu item "Vehicle settings" on the main menu (refer to paragraph "Deactivating Automatic Operation" in this chapter). 5 Manual Engagement/ Disengagement The parking brake can also be manually engaged or disengaged when the engine is running or the ignition switch is in the RUN position, 245 Driving 5 246 by pressing the brake pedal and raising the lever located behind the shift lever. When the parking brake is applied, the warning light lights up on the tachometer and the related message will be displayed for 5 seconds on the instrument cluster. If you attempt to engage/disengage the parking brake without having pressed the brake pedal, a message will be displayed, warning you to proceed. If the engine was turned off when the automatic engagement device was deactivated (see “Deactivating Automatic Operation” in this chapter) it is possible to shift the parking brake simply by pulling the lever upward within 3 minutes after turning off. CAUTION! The main function of the EPB is to allow safe parking of the vehicle, therefore it must only be applied when the vehicle is already stationary. If the EPB is used while the vehicle is moving and decelerating until a speed lower of 5 km/h (3 mph) and, in particular, until complete stop (typically in a sudden brake), it is necessary to have the EPB system checked by the Service Network. Deactivating Automatic Operation The automatic engagement function can be deactivated/reactivated by selecting the menu item "Vehicle settings" through the switch on the right-side of the steering wheel (refer to "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls".) Press and release the switch toward the arrow ( ) to select “Electric Park Brake”. WARNING! • Always hold the brake pedal pressed during engagement or disengagement of the parking brake. • The EPB command activation while running generates a deceleration of the vehicle with strong deceleration (Dynamic Braking). It is therefore recommended to use this feature only in case of emergency. The stability of the car is guaranteed by the action of the activated ESC system. • It is advisable to keep the "Auto Apply" function always active (On) so that the vehicle is properly secured with electric parking brake. Press and release the switch once again toward the arrow ( ) to visualize the options connected to this function. • Auto Apply On (recommended setting); • Auto Apply Off. Driving WARNING! It is advisable to keep the "Auto Apply" function always active (On) so that the vehicle is properly secured with electric parking brake. CAUTION! • Under certain conditions when the "Setting Saved" Selection notification appears as a popup for 2 seconds then the display will show again the modified function. Scroll with the switch toward the arrow or through the programmable options. Press and release the switch toward the arrow ( ) to set the selected option. A check mark will remain next to the previously-selected item until a new selection is made. battery voltage is low, the electric automatic parking brake system may temporarily be deactivated for safety reasons. Therefore, typically upon starting the engine, when the battery voltage drops, a message may temporarily be displayed, indicating that automatic operation is temporarily disabled. • In case of repetitive requests to reset the EPB through the messages shown on the TFT display, please contact the Service Network. Failure Indication 5 In the event of electric parking brake system failure, the warning light on the display will light up and the related message will show for 5 seconds. In order to disable the automatic operation follow the same procedures and select the other option. WARNING! In the event of an EPB failure, take your vehicle to the nearest Service Network Center as soon as possible. 247 Driving 5 Initialize the EPB System after Reconnecting the Vehicle Battery After the detachment and the subsequent connection of the battery, on the instrument cluster display the warning light will be illuminated. To initialize the EPB system, lift, release and lift again the lever located behind the shift lever. Emergency Disengagement In case of brake lock with complete electrical system failure, is necessary to act on the electric actuator to undo the pressure on the pads of rear brake calipers (see "Emergency Release of the Parking Brake" chapter in section "In an Emergency"). EPB Operation with Overheated Brakes Driving on mountain roads with steep slopes or a sports use of the vehicle 248 could overheat the brake system components. In these conditions, parking brake must not be used since the push of the power actuator might not be sufficient to ensure vehicle braking, especially on a slope. Drive normally without braking to allow the brakes to cool down a few minutes before stopping. In this way, the automatic or manual activation of the parking brake will ensure vehicle braking. Parking Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied in automatic or manual and place the transmission lever in the P (Park) position by pressing the "P" button. WARNING! • Always check that the vehicle is locked before leaving it. • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. • Do not park the vehicle on paper, grass, dry leaves or other flammable materials. They could catch fire if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. • Do not leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. CAUTION! When you need to park the vehicle on a steep slope, both with the engine on and off, it is recommended not only to engage the parking brake, but also to shift the transmission lever to P (Park) before leaving the vehicle. When parking on hill roads, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade Driving and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in P (Park), otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of P (Park). In certain conditions, it is however advisable to disengage the parking brake manually and slightly apply the service brake for starting off. This is advisable when there are obstacles very close to the vehicle in the direction in which you intend to move. 5 249 Driving “Drive Away Inhibit” strategy In order to avoid a dangerous condition resulting from leaving the vehicle “not braked” with running engine and without driver on board, "Drive Away Inhibit" strategy alerts the driver with messages on the instrument cluster display and sounding chimes, then puts the transmission in P (Park). The table shows the vehicle condition and the action that the system runs to exit the dangerous condition. 5 250 Vehicle condition Action of the driver • Engine running and speed lower than 3 km/h (1.8 mph). • Transmission in any position other P (Park). • Driver safety belt unlocked. • Driver door opened. • Brake pedal pressed. The driver releases the brake pedal to get out of the vehicle. Warnings Warnings • Slow continuous chime. • The condition of the vehicle not in P (Park) position will be signalled by a message on the display. • Fast chime. • A message which invites to engage the parking brake to prevent vehicle movement will be displayed on the display. The system puts the transmission in P (Park) position. Driving Brake and Stability Control System The vehicle is endowed with an Electronic Stability Control System (ESC), which helps to maintain directional control in the event of loss of grip of the tires. The system is able to detect potentially dangerous situations for the stability of the vehicle and automatically sets the brakes on all four wheels in a differentiated manner, in order to provide a torque settlement of the vehicle. ESC includes the following subsystems: • ABS (Anti-lock Braking System); • EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution); • TCS (Traction Control System); • BAS (Brake Assist System); • BTO (Brake Throttle Override); • HSA (Hill Start Assist). WARNING! • These systems cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from affecting the vehicle, nor can they increase traction, braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires. • These systems cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or aquaplaning. • The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with these systems must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardise the driver’s and the passenger’s safety or the safety of others. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC corrects over steering and under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake to the appropriate wheel. Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the conditions of instability and maintain the right direction. The system is also able to reduce the engine power. Through sensors fitted on the vehicle, the ESC system detects the driver’s chosen direction comparing it to the one maintained while running. In case of discrepancy between the required trajectory and the current one, the ESC system brakes the appropriate wheel to counteract over or under steering. • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position. • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. The ESC system has two available operating modes: ESC On This is the normal ESC operating mode. At each start-up of the vehicle, the ESC system is set in this mode and should be used for most driving conditions. The ESC should only be turned off for specific reasons as pointed out in the following paragraphs. 5 ESC Off The "ESC Off" mode is aimed for a more spirited driving experience but also purposeful for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. The current mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the threshold for ESC activation, allowing higher wheel spin than normally granted by the ESC system. The (ESC Off) button is fitted beside the gear shift lever: to deactivate the system see "Drive Mode" in this section. 251 Driving WARNING! In SPORT mode the ESC control thresholds are higher for maximum performance on dry road surface. To ensure maximum security of the ESC is recommended not to activate SPORT mode on surfaces with medium- and low-grip (e.g., wet, snow, dirt, etc..) with ESC system active (button (ESC Off) not pressed). 5 252 NOTE: • When in "ESC Off" mode, the TCS functionality of ESC is deactivated (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS paragraph of this chapter). All other stability features of ESC function regularly. • To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "ESC Off" mode by pressing the (ESC Off) button and remain in this operational mode no longer than needed. Once the situation requiring "ESC Off" mode is overcome, turn the ESC on again by pressing the (ESC Off) button. This may also be performed while in motion. Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) and Electronic Brake-force Distribution (EBD) The Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically "pumps" the brakes during severe braking to prevent wheel lock-up. The Electronic Brake-force Distribution (EBD) prevents the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle. WARNING! The ABS helps prevent the wheels from locking, but it does not increase the physical grip limits between the tires and the road. Therefore, always keep a safe distance from the vehicle in front of yours and reduce your speed when entering a curve. NOTE: • When the vehicle's speed is higher than 11 km/h (7 mph), you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as other motor noises. The system is performing a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly. • This self-check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 11 km/h (7 mph). ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris. You may also experience the following when the brake system goes into AntiLock: • The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a short time after the vehicle stops). • The clicking sound of solenoid valves. • Brake pedal pulsations. • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop. These are all normal characteristics of ABS functioning. WARNING! The ABS contains sophisticated • electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly-installed or high-output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible Driving loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified Maserati personnel. • Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping brakes makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. Traction Control System (TCS) The current device is an integral part of the ESC system. It operates automatically by reducing the power transmitted by the engine in case of slipping, loss of grip on wet floor (aquaplaning), acceleration on slippery snow-covered or frozen surfaces, etc. Activating under slip conditions different control systems: • if slippage affects both drive wheels, it reduces the power transmitted by the engine; • if slippage only affects one drive wheel, it brakes the slipping wheel automatically. Brake Assist System (BAS) This system completes the ABS system by optimising the vehicle braking capacity during emergency brake manoeuvres. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes in order to help reduce braking distances. The quick brake coupling is optimal for BAS performances. In order to fully exploit the system, apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the entire vehicle stop sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure earlier than required. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. Brake Throttle Override (BTO) To complete the range of systems that assist braking, the vehicle is equipped with BTO, which is designed to stop the vehicle even when it is being accelerated. If the brake pedal is depressed together with the accelerator, the system does not consider as "conflict" the sequence "brake-first-then-accelerator" of pedal application and it will not engage the BTO. When the system recognizes that the accelerator pedal is stuck pressed and the sequence “accelerator-first then- brake-pressed” (this sequence is recognized as a “conflict”), the engine power will be automatically reduced and, if the driver continues to depress the accelerator, the system can make the vehicle to come to a complete stop. Additionally, if the brake pedal is released when the accelerator is still stuck pressed, the corresponding engine torque increase gradually to a safe value. The system exits from this strategy when the accelerator pedal is completely unstuck. Hill Start Assist (HSA) The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle uphill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure applied for a short period of time also after releasing the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will start sloping down. The system will release brake pressure proportionally to the amount of throttle/torque applied as the vehicle starts to move in the chosen direction. By scrolling MTC+ user settings and selecting "Safety & Driving Assistant", the driver can disable the HSA system. 5 253 Driving HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate: • vehicle is stationary. • gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in reverse gear). HSA will work in R (Reverse) and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met. The system will not activate if the transmission is placed in N (Neutral) or P (Park). Using the Brakes CAUTION! To obtain a good performance by brake pads and discs, avoid sudden braking during the first 300 km (190 mi). The pad wear limit is indicated by the illumination of the warning light , on the instrument cluster. In this event, please contact the Service Network. 5 WARNING! Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, 254 excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. In an emergency full braking capacity may be impaired. Note for Diesel Engine (Diesel only) During driving, if the brake pedal and accelerator are pressed at the same time, the latter no longer responds to the driver’s command and the engine system limits the performance of the car until the normal driving conditions is restored. Brake Pads and Brake Discs Wear on the brake pads and brake discs depends to a great extent on the driving style and the conditions of use and therefore cannot be expressed in actual kilometres driven on the road. The brake system is designed for optimal braking effect at all speeds and temperatures. Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, humidity and long outdoor stopping periods) can therefore cause the brakes to "squeal". This is normal and will cease after a few brakings. New Brake Pads and/or Brake Discs New brake pads have to be “bed in”, and therefore only attain optimal Driving friction to the brake disc when the vehicle has covered several hundred km. During this first period, the slightly reduced braking ability must be compensated for by pressing the brake pedal harder. This applies whenever the brake pads and/or brake discs are replaced. Brake Overheating Driving on mountain roads with steep slopes or a sports use of the vehicle could overheat the brake system components. In these conditions, parking brake must not be used since the push of the power actuator might not be sufficient to ensure vehicle braking, especially on a slope. Drive normally without braking to allow the brakes to cool down a few minutes before stopping. In this way, the automatic or manual activation of the parking brake will ensure vehicle braking. Brake overheating could also cause "squeals" and "vibrations". Use of the Engine Breaking-In Today's most modern production methods are designed to provide extremely precise construction and assembly of components. However, moving parts do undergo a settling process, basically in the first hours of vehicle operation. Do not drive keeping at a constant high speed rate for a prolonged time. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, see "Refillings" in section “Features and Specifications”. A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand kilometers of operation. This should be considered as a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of malfunction. Specific Requirements for Gasoline Engines Avoid exceeding 5000 rpm for the first 1000 trip km (620 mi). After starting the vehicle, do not exceed 4000 rpm until the engine has warmed up sufficiently (coolant temperature: 65-70°C /149-158°F). Specific Requirements for Diesel Engine During the first 1500 km (900 mi) avoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle. Do not exceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible engine speed for each gear. In M +/- (Manual) shifting mode, change gear in good time. Do not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. 5 While Driving Never travel with the tachometer indicator approaching the peak rpm, not even downhill. When the tachometer indicator is approaching the peak rpm (red colored zone), take precautions to avoid exceeding that limit. 255 Driving On-Board Diagnostic System Gasoline 5 Diesel Ensure proper operation of different devices checking their respective control telltales. 256 CAUTION! • Under normal conditions, all red warning lights on the instrument cluster display should be off. When they come on, they indicate a malfunction. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls". • Continuing to drive when a red warning light is on could cause serious damage to the vehicle and affect its performance. WARNING! Do not travel downhill with the engine off, as the servo brake will no longer function due to the vacuum decrease and thus after a few braking attempts, the system becomes totally inefficient. The Electric Power Steering will not provide assistance. NOTE for Diesel Engine (Diesel only) During driving, if the brake pedal and accelerator are pressed at the same time, the latter no longer responds to the driver’s command and the engine system limits the performance of the car until the normal driving conditions is restored. Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current local regulations of various countries. If any of these systems require service, the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist which your Service Center will use to service your vehicle. Although the vehicle will still be driveable and not need towing, contact the Service Network for service as soon as possible. Driving CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause further damage to the emissions control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. • If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required at the Service Network. • After the problem has been solved, the Service Network personnel will perform specific tests on the test bench for a complete check of the system and, if necessary, also road tests, even on long distances. Regenerate the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Under conditions of exclusive short duration and low speed driving cycles, the engine and exhaust aftertreatment system may never reach the conditions required to remove the trapped Particulate Matter (PM). This conditions is reported by the messages on TFT display. To restore the exhaust aftertreatment system to normal operating condition it is necessary to regenerate the DPF by following the indications reported in the paragraph "TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Lights of Set Modes/Functions" of the chapter "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls". CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the MIL on inhibits the regeneration process with possible DPF clogged. • Maserati is not responsible for defects occurring due to not performed DPF regeneration process. Gasoline Particulate Filter - GPF (for versions/markets where provided) To reduce the emissions of particulate matter, the exhaust system is equipped with a particulate filter optimized for the back pressure and with a high filtration efficiency. This filter is maintenance-free and self-regulating and therefore does not require a regeneration procedure when using the car. This performance made possible by the improvement of the filtering support between engine and silencer. Electronic Cruise Control The electronic Cruise Control (CC) enables the driver to maintain the desired vehicle speed without pressing the accelerator pedal, reducing driving fatigue on highways, especially long trips, as the set speed is automatically maintained. A firm press on the accelerator pedal or the braking pedal will temporarily deactivate the cruise control function. CAUTION! The device can only be switched on at speeds exceeding 30 km/h (18 mph) and it switches off automatically when the brake pedal or the accelerator pedal is pressed. 5 WARNING! The Cruise Control function must only be activated when traffic and the route permit a constant speed to be maintained safely for a sufficiently long distance. Controls The electronic Cruise Control controls are located on the left side of the steering wheel. 257 Driving Control configuration depends on which driver assist systems are installed to the vehicle. In the standard configuration there is a specific button to enable and disable the CC. Control buttons have the following functions: Standard Configuration ON/OFF button to engage/disengage CC system. Optional Configuration Press ACC Gap button and hold it down for 2 seconds to enable the CC system. Press ACC button to disable the CC system. 5 Standard Configuration In the optional configuration, there is no specific button to enable and disable the CC, since driver uses the ACC control buttons. Shared by All Configurations Multifunction switch: • Press up (indication RES +): increase speed, set current speed or resume previously set speed when system is in "cancelled" status; • Pushed (indication CANC): deletes the set speed; • Press down (indication SET ): set speed/decrease speed. NOTE: • The figures only show the Standard Configuration. • In order to ensure proper operation, the CC system has been designed to shut down if multiple systems Optional Configuration 258 are operated at the same time (example: ACC and FCW). When conditions so allow, the CC system can be reactivated by pushing the CC “ON/OFF” button or the ACC Gap button (in the Optional Configuration) and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. Displayed Information CC conditions are displayed on instrument panel after selecting "Driver Assist" menu (see paragraph "TFT Display: Menus and Settings" under "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). Displayed information depends on system status: ready, disabled, cancelled or set. Apart from the pop-up messages at the centre of the display, CC system status is represented by icons at the top left. These icons remain displayed even when you exit the "Driver Assist" screen. The CC screen can be displayed any time driver changes system status or settings. After 5 seconds of CC inactivity, the display goes back to last screen. Driving Activation To turn the system on, push the ON/OFF button or the ACC Gap button for 2 seconds (in the Optional Configuration). The white light with below 3 dashes on the instrument cluster display will illuminate. WARNING! Never leave the electronic Cruise Control system on when not in use. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. Always leave the system off when you are not using it. Speed Range of Use Speed km/h (mph) Minimum 30 (18) Engaged/activated 30 (18) Maximum 210 (130) Setting Desired Speed To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time or the ACC button (in the Optional Configuration). The white light will turn off. NOTE: The CC system must be turned off when not in use. Turn on the CC function. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed (in the example: 100 km/h), push downward the multifunction switch (SET -) and release. The green light with below the desired speed will illuminate on the instrument cluster display. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. NOTE: The vehicle should be travelling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the switch downward. 5 Pressing the "ON/OFF" button or the ACC Gap button for 2 seconds (in the Optional Configuration) or moving the ignition switch in OFF position erases the set speed memory. Changing Speed Setting Pushing the multifunction switch upward (RES +) or downward (SET -) once, or by holding it down, will enable to increase or decrease the set speed by one unit (1 km/h or 1 mph). If the car is equipped with ADAS Systems, the single press of the multifunction switch will increase or decrease the set speed of 1 km/h or 259 Driving 1 mph; a continuous pressure of the same will increase or decrease the set speed of 10 km/h or 5 mph. Release the switch when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed will be visualized below the green light. Each subsequent tap of the multifunction switch will increase or decrease the speed by 1 km/h or 1 mph. Driver Override If the driver presses the accelerator pedal while the CC is on, such as to overtake another vehicle, and exceeds the set speed limit, the system will temporarily deactivate the CC. During the event, the speed indication below the green light will be blinking. Temporary Deactivation 5 A soft tap on the brake pedal, pressing the multifunction switch (CANC), or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will temporarily deactivate the CC without erasing the set speed memory. The white light with below the set speed will appear on the display. When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed and the green light with below the set speed with steady light will be displayed. Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed, push upward the multifunction switch (RES +) and release. The green light with below the set speed will illuminate on the instrument cluster. Resume can be used at any speed above 30 km/h (18 mph). 260 Using Electronic Cruise Control on Hillsides The transmission may be downshifted on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed. The CC system maintains set speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. On steep slopes, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so we recommend to drive without CC. WARNING! Electronic Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use electronic Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on winding, icy, snowcovered or slippery roads. Driving Adaptive Cruise Control ACC (optional) ADAS Equipments The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is part of ADAS equipments together with: • Lane Keeping Assist (LKA). • Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA). • Forward Collision Warning (FCW). • Highway Assist (HAS) (for versions/markets, where provided). • Traffic Sign Assist (TSA). FCW, HAS and TSA are separate functions that may not be present in the ADAS equipment. For more details see "Forward Collision Warning - FCW", "Highway Assist - HAS" and "Traffic Sign Assist - TSA" in this section. NOTE: LKA and ABSA are described in the relevant chapters of this section. ACC Preview The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) further increases the drive comfort ensured by the Cruise Control when driving on highways and freeways. Always consider that ACC is not a safety system and is not designed to prevent accidents. The ACC allows driver to keep Cruise Control active in limited or moderate traffic conditions with no need to constantly restore the Cruise Control. The ACC uses a radar sensor, located on the front grille behind the trident, and the camera behind the internal rear-view mirror to detect the presence of a vehicle ahead at a close distance and moving in the same direction. This vehicle, in this chapter, will be indicated as "target vehicle" or "vehicle ahead". NOTE: • If the sensor detects no vehicle ahead, the ACC system will maintain set steady speed. • If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, the ACC system automatically kicks in by slightly accelerating or braking (to avoid exceeding the initially set speed) so that the vehicle keeps present distance, trying to adapt to the speed of the detected vehicle ahead. WARNING! • The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is designed to increase vehicle driving comfort. It must not be considered as a means replacing the required attention of the driver. The driver is always required to drive carefully. The driver is always required to pay utmost attention to driving conditions (road, traffic, weather) and style (speed, distance from sensed vehicle ahead, brake use). Driver has the full responsibility of the vehicle therefore his attention is crucial to keeping vehicle control in particular when approaching curves, rounds and situations with heavy traffic. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. • In some driving scenarios, the ACC could have detection problems. In such cases, the ACC could kick in late or unexpectedly. The driver must 5 261 Driving be careful since his/her intervention could be necessary. • It is always driver responsibility to obey to speed limits and to keep minimum legal distance to the preceding vehicle foreseen for the specific country. • ACC system can decelerate only with limited braking, it cannot execute emergency braking. 5 262 The ACC system: • Does not activate/react in the presence of pedestrians, bicycle and not licensable vehicle in general, incoming traffic from opposite direction and steady objects such as a vehicle stuck in a traffic jam or for a fault. • Is meant for the use on highways and well-build roads, not for city traffic or mountain roads. • May not have enough time to react and/or decelerate sufficiently on vehicles when lane is changed too fast or the relative speed is too high. In such cases the driver has to react appropriately also without any acoustic/visual warning. • Cannot consider road, traffic and weather conditions and might prove limited when visibility is poor. • Does not always fully recognise complex driving conditions and this could cause wrong assessment of the required safety distance. It is recommended to disable the ACC system in the following instances: • When driving in the fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, slush, heavy traffic and similar complex situations such as for instance highway sections where there are men at work. • When entering a junction lane or a slip road to leave the highway; when driving on narrow, icy, snowy, slippery roads, or on steep up and downhill roads. • When circumstances do not allow to drive safely at constant speed. Displayed Information Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) condition, as well as the LKA and HAS status, is displayed on instrument cluster after selecting “Driver Assist” menu (see paragraph "TFT Display: Menus and Settings" under "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). Displayed information depends on system status: ready, set, temporarily cancelled or override. Apart from the image at the centre of the display, CC, ACC, LKA and HAS systems status is represented by icons at the top left and right. These icons remain displayed even when you exiting the "Driver Assist" screen. The vehicle(s) and horizontal bars represent the ACC status as ready (white) or with sensed vehicle ahead (green); the white, grey or yellow lines represent the LKA and HAS systems. The ACC screen can be displayed any time driver changes system status or settings. After 5 seconds of ACC inactivity, the display goes back to last screen. ACC Controls and Activation Conditions The buttons on steering wheel RH side control ACC operation and the other functions/driver assist systems installed to this vehicle. Driving 1. 2. 3. 4. Multifunction control shared by all driver assist functions/systems: - Press up (indication "RES +"): increase speed, set current speed or resume previously set speed when system is in "cancelled" status. - Pushed (indication "CANC"): cancel the function if it was in "set" status, going in a ready condition but remembering the previous set speed. - Press down (indication "SET -"): set speed/decrease speed. Two functions button with ACC activated: - ACC Gap: pressed and released; set the distance to sensed vehicle ahead as horizontal bars (setting cycle starts to 3 bars). - CC On: pressed for 2 seconds activates the CC system. - Press it to switch from CC to ACC. ACC ON/OFF button. If enabled, pressing this button will disable CC. HAS ON/OFF button with ACC set only. See "Highway Assist - HAS" in this section for further details. NOTE: Any change made to tire dimensions affects performance of Adaptive Cruise Control and Front Collision Warning (FCW), if equipped. The ACC is not activated in the following conditions: • When braking. • When parking brake is activated. • When automatic transmission is in P (Park), R (Reverse) or N (Neutral). • When vehicle speed is out of preset speed range. • When brakes are overheated. • When driver door is open. • When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled. • When the road is particularly steep (both uphill and downhill) at low speed. • When drive mode (ESC OFF) is selected. • When the door is opened at low speed. • When there has been an ESC event in the last 5 seconds, or is still active. • When there is an object too close in front of the vehicle. It is possible that more than one system is active at the same time such as ACC and ABSA just to mention some. While activation of ACC and CC at the same time is impossible. Speed Range of Use Speed km/h (mph) Minimum 0 (0) Engaged/activated 30 (18) Maximum 210 (130) Activation/Deactivation NOTE: Pictures show status of ACC and LKA systems. Press and release ON/OFF button to activate the ACC. The display will show the white symbol with below 3 dashes will illuminate indicating that system is ready to be set. 5 When in Driver Assist Page 263 Driving 2 seconds to indicate that ACC was disabled. Out of Driver Assist Page 5 If a vehicle is detected as being too close, the display will show a message for 5 seconds and trigger a buzzer to warn the driver that current conditions do not allow enabling of the ACC. At any rate, system will remain in the ready status. Remove foot from accelerator pedal and vehicle will continue at set speed. Driver Override WARNING! Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally activate the system or cause it to go faster than you want. Always leave the system off when you are not using it. Setting the Speed Push the ON/OFF button a second time and release to turn the system off. A pop-up message is displayed for 264 When vehicle reaches required speed, press down and release the multifunction control (SET -). The display will show set speed corresponding to vehicle current one. Speed value will be indicated below the green symbol and above the distance bars, in the center of the display. If driver accelerates beyond the set speed or faster than the car would do autonomously, the set speed below the green light will be blinking and the time gap bars will vanish to remember that in this condition the system cannot control the distance between vehicle and sensed vehicle ahead. Vehicle speed will be determined only by the accelerator pedal position. Changing Speed Setting Once speed is set, driver can increase or decrease it by respectively pressing multifunction control up (RES +) or down (SET -). Speed can be increased or decreased in two ways: Driving • Pressing control once, set speed will increase or decrease by one unit corresponding to 1 km/h (1 mph). • Hold the control to increase or decrease set speed by 10 km/h (5 mph) at a time. NOTE: • When pressing the multifunction control up (RES +) or down (SET -), the new set speed will be the current speed of the vehicle. • When using (SET -) control to decelerate, if the engine braking power does not slow down the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow down the vehicle. • The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two-three seconds the system will not be able to resume driving the car autonomously. As this point it is necessary the intervention of the driver on the multifunction control (press SET- or RES+) or press the accelerator pedal (see "ACC Operation Before and During Stop" in this chapter). • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range. Temporary Deactivation A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the multifunction control (CANC), or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will temporarily deactivate the ACC without erasing the set speed memory. The white light will appear on the display with below the set speed. Conditions for Disabling and Deactivation Besides the cases specified in the previous paragraph, the following conditions will disable the system: • Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) kicks in. • Transmission lever is not in D (Drive). • The Electronic Stability Control and the Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activate. • Vehicle parking brake is operated. • The driver safety belt is unbuckled at low speed. • The driver door is ajar at low speed. • The driver disabled the ESC using the (ESC Off) button on central console. • The road is too steep both uphill and downhill at low speed. The system is deactivated and set speed is deleted from system memory, if the ACC ON/OFF button is pressed or if ignition device is turned to OFF. Resuming Speed If a speed setting is stored in system memory, press the multifunction control (RES +) up and take foot off the accelerator pedal. The last set speed will be displayed. 5 WARNING! The resume function should be used only when road and traffic conditions allow it. Resuming too a high or too a low speed for current traffic and road conditions could cause a harsh vehicle acceleration or deceleration which could jeopardise driving safety and risk to cause severe accidents. 265 Driving Setting the ACC Gap 5 The specified ACC gap can be set by varying the distance setting among the four possible options identified by the number of horizontal bars: • Maximum (longest) distance: 4 bars. • Long distance: 3 bars (default distance). • Medium distance: 2 bars. • Short distance: 1 bar. Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the gap to the vehicle ahead. If system does not detect the presence of any vehicles ahead, only the bars referred to set distance will be displayed. When system detects the presence of a vehicle ahead, it is displayed in front of the bars (see example in the figure). When in Driver Assist Page 266 Out of Driver Assist Page To increase or decrease the number of bars, corresponding to the gap from vehicle ahead, press and release the distance setting button. Each press and release of the button changes the gap starting from 3 bars (default distance) and moving in a sequential way towards the minimum distance: 3→2→1→4→3→2→1→4 and so on. If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane, the system displays the target vehicle icon before the bars. From that moment, the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed. The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until: • The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed. • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor. • The distance setting is changed. • The driver disables the system. The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if necessary. Obviously, any time the ACC system automatically operates the brakes, the stop lights must turn on as if the driver was braking. A Proximity Warning on display will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert will flash on the display and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity. Driving NOTE: The displayed warning is a warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system is applying the brakes autonomously. Overtake Aid When driving with ACC engaged and following a target vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilises the left turn signal to start overtaking. In locations with left hand drive traffic, overtake aid is active only when passing on the left hand side of the target vehicle. When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this condition, overtake aid is active only when passing on the right side of the target vehicle. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilises the right turn signal to start overtaking. In this condition the ACC system will no longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location with left hand drive. While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the driver unbuckles the seatbelt or opens the door, the ESC system will activate the EPB. During standstill, ACC system monitors the occupant detection signals: if the driver's seatbelt becomes unbuckled, the ACC system shall be cancelled when the EPB is applied. ACC Operation Before and During Stop • When the ACC system is resumed, If an ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two-three seconds the system will not be able to resume driving the car autonomously. In this condition, TFT displays an instruction message pop up for 5 seconds. When the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while following a target vehicle, the brakes are released after two-three seconds after the stop and at the same time the system inserts the parking brake. When parking brake engages the ACC deactivates going to ready state. At this point the driver must act on the multifunction control (RES + or SET -) or alternatively on the accelerator pedal. WARNING! the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. • During the automatic stopping behind a vehicle in some rare cases it may happen that the system does not recognize the rearmost point of the vehicle ahead but a target under the vehicle ahead (e.g. the back axis of a truck with a high loading edge or a bumper of a vehicle although overhanging load is hanging over the vehicle’s rear). In these cases the system cannot guarantee the appropriate stopping distance leading to collision in the worst case. For this reason the driver has to be 5 267 Driving attentive and ready to brake during automatic stops. Display Warnings and Maintenance of ACC and FCW Systems 5 268 Wipe Front Radar Sensor Warning This warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance due to sensor poor or failed signal reception. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC and FCW systems may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice on the radar sensor. In these cases, the system will be disabled. This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC and FCW systems will recover operation after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the front grille, behind the Maserati trident. To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items: • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage it. • Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment. • If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to a collision, see your authorised dealer for service. • Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction. When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by simply reactivating it. NOTE: If the radar sensor wipe warning message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at the Service Network. Clean Front Windshield Warning This warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance due to camera poor or failed signal reception. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC and FCW systems may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass or when driving in bad weather. In these cases, the system will have degraded performance. The ACC and FCW systems will recover operation after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the windshield and the camera. They may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer Driving present, the ACC and FCW systems will return to full functionality. NOTE: If the windshield wiper warning message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and forwardfacing camera inspected at the Service Network. Service ACC/FCW Warning If the ACC and FCW systems turn off, and the system displays a service warning, there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits functionality. Although the vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions, ACC and FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC and FCW again later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, contact the Service Network. Precautions while Driving with ACC Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. Turns and Bends When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality. Moreover, the radar sensor might detect a vehicle on a nearby lane or no longer detect the target vehicle. 5 269 Driving Using ACC on Hills When driving on steep hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane when vehicle reaches the crest. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited. 5 Lane Changing ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are travelling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lane and it may not detect the vehicle until it is too late for the driver to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. 270 situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles (like motorcycles) travelling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. Stationary Objects and Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in Radar Device - Regulatory Information The "Regulatory Information" for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section "Services" on the website www.maserati.com. Driving Forward Collision Warning - FCW (for versions/ markets, where provided) The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with braking action uses the same parts already described for Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for sensing vehicle ahead (hereinafter “target vehicle”) as well as part of the warnings/messages on system condition and activation status. Full performance can be reached only when both the sensing parts have detected a vehicle or, if the car is equipped with Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) system, also a pedestrian. The difference between full and reduced performance is not visible for the driver. Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) System (if equipped) The Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is a sub-system of FCW and it provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings on the instrument cluster display, and may apply automatic braking when it detect a potential frontal collision with a pedestrian. NOTE: The PEB function is only active up to 60 km/h (37 mph). WARNING! Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect every type of potential collision with pedestrian. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death. System Limitations PEB may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: • If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow or fog. • If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections from other vehicles. • If the windshield in the area of the camera is dirty, or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or covered. 5 FCW Operation The FCW provides audible and visual warnings when a potential collision is detected. Brake jerk and limited braking may also be applied depending on the specific scenario. FCW monitors the information from the forward looking radar sensor as 271 Driving 5 well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings and may provide a warning brake jerk. If the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help slow down the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required. When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the warning messages will be deactivated. NOTE: • Bad weather conditions, like strong rain, snow, etc., can lead to reduced system performance. Under these conditions relevant objects will not be detected or detected late by the system. 272 • FCW is designed to react in specific situations in typical traffic scenarios with objects in the same lane driving in the same direction, but under certain conditions it can also react on stationary objects in the same lane. It is not designed to react to oncoming traffic or crossing traffic. • The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality. • It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle. The limit of four events applies to the brake jerk too. • FCW will automatically deactivated when (ESC Off) button is pressed (LED light up). WARNING! • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death. The driver is always in charge to safely drive and to avoid critical situations not relying on the support of the system. Driver has to keep in mind that the system and therefore its intervention is always subject to the prevailing physical limits. • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended either to warn or to apply any brake aid/brake intervention in case of collisions with pedestrians (if not equipped with PEB sub-system), bicycles and not licensable vehicles in general. Speed Range of Use Speed km/h (mph) Minimum 0 (0) Engaged/activated 1.8 (1.12) Maximum 250 (155) Driving When the speed is outside the specified limits, the system automatically disables without turning on the corresponding warning light on the instrument cluster. FCW Status The driver can adjust FCW sensitivity or enable/disable the brake jerk with the other emergency brakings by touching "Controls" soft-key on MTC+ display. The current setting is indicated beside to the "Forward Collision Warning" soft-key. If you want to change the setting, touch the soft-key on the side to enter FCW page. This warning light informs the driver that FCW is disabled. This warning light will light even when the activation of another driver assistance feature or drive mode (example: (ESC Off) disables the FCW. This gives you the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision. Changing the sensitivity status to the "Near" setting, allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This setting provides less reaction time than the "Far" sensitivity setting, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience. "Medium" is the intermediate status between the two described above. 5 NOTE: The FCW system setting chosen by the User is kept in memory only for the current ignition cycle. Changing FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking Setting options are described in the following paragraph. When FCW status for some reason changes in off, the corresponding amber warning light on instrument cluster will light on. The default status of FCW Sensitivity is the "Medium" setting. When also the active braking function ("Forward Collision Warning Active Braking") setting is on, the system warns you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away and it applies limited braking. NOTE: • The default values shall appear at every new ignition cycle: Sensitivity = "Medium" and Active Braking = on. • FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as objects not in the path of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, on cross traffic vehicles, or leading (Continued) 273 Driving (Continued) vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed. • The active braking (autonomous braking/braking aid) will not provided in case of potential collision with static object such as guard rails, walls, etc..). • FCW will be disabled like ACC (refer to chapter "Adaptive Cruise Control ACC" in this section. 5 Changing the active braking status to "Off" prevents the system from providing limited autonomous braking or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision. In this state the system disables the brake jerk. Limited Operation and Service Warning The messages indicating on display the limited functionality or service at Service Network required are the same as for the ACC system. For further details, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC" in this section. NOTE: • The adjustment of the sensor could be affected by strong shocks or light collisions. This could affect the system 274 by reducing the systems performance or could increase the false positive rate. The adjustment of the radar system has to be proved or a new adjustment has to be performed by a Service Network. • The radar system requires specific feature to detect objects. The detection could be disturbed/reduced by environment influences, for example by electrical field or the object itself. Object with small radar reflection properties could not be detected or detected late. Radar Device - Regulatory Information The "Regulatory Information" for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section "Services" on the website www.maserati.com. Lane Keeping Assist - LKA (optional, with ACC only) This system was designed especially for highway or freeway driving, to reduce the risk that the vehicle, under particular circumstances, accidentally departs from the lane in use. When this happens, graphic instructions on instrument cluster display together with steering torque application and steering wheel vibration (depending on the distance to the line) warn the driver that the vehicle is going out of the lane initiates a steering manoeuvre to try to prevent the lane exit. To detect lane lines, the system uses the forward-facing camera behind of the rear-view mirror, which is the same one used also by the lighting system to manage automatic high beam. The logic core is in the front radar. LKA system remembers the condition it was in before turning off the vehicle. Refer to "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information. NOTE: In case of wet road or raining conditions the function could be Driving disabled by the system in order to minimize the risks. Speed Range of Use Speed km/h (mph) Minimum 60 (37) Engaged/activated 60 (37) Maximum 180 (112) Customised Settings LKA is configurable by the customer in order to maximize its efficiency based on the driver driving style and his expectation of the system, reducing at the same time the possible invasiveness. Entering "Controls" page on MTC+ display the driver can see the current setting beside the "Lane Keeping Assist" soft-key. Touching "Lane Keeping Assist" softkey can disable or enable the system. Touching the soft-key on the side the driver can change the setting. Driver warnings can be only "Visual" or "Visual & Haptic" (default mode). System response can be set to "Early", "Medium" (default mode) or "Late". System reaction force can be set to "Low", "Medium" (default mode) or "High". Meanings of Settings • "Visual" only: the system will not request any steering torque/vibration to correct the car trajectory. The system will only show on the TFT display when the vehicle is passing the lane. • "Visual & Haptic": the system will apply steering torque when lane departure is detected showing at the same time the proper cluster indication, adding to this steering vibration when the departure is very imminent. When "Visual & Haptic" is selected and of course LKA is enabled then two following menu will be used by the system. • "LKA Sensitivity": it tunes the distance to the lane boundary interested where the system will start to apply steering torque. • "LKA Strength": it tunes the steering torque value increasing or decreasing it to have a stronger or weaker trajectory correction/deviation. 5 275 Driving WARNING! In rare cases, Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) may make an inappropriate steering torque application. LKA may be interrupted at any time counter steering. Lack of attention may lead to serious injury or death. System Availability 5 276 The ADAS systems (LKA, CC, ACC, FCW and HAS) help the driver while driving. These systems can be set and monitored simultaneously on the display, after opening "Driver Assist menu (see paragraph "TFT Display: Menus and Settings" under "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). LKA is designed for an attentive driver therefore the system is available only when his/her hands are on the steering wheel or with hands off for a very limited amount of time. When the system is enabled it will trigger cluster warning in case at least one hand is not detected on the steering wheel. The torque application as well as the vibration are suppressed/inhibited in case of: high driver torque in the steering wheel, high lateral acceleration, hands not on the steering wheel detected for more than a certain time. High dynamic behaviours, driving on the lane boundary, off course will prevent the function from working. FCW braking and stability system interventions (ESC, ABS) will also prevent the system from operating. Changing lane results in system inhibition for a certain time. In addition, the road must respect some characteristics such as minimum maximum width, lane clearly defined by two lane boundaries and only in limited cases for a limited time at least one. NOTE: • In case of wet road or raining conditions the function could be disabled by the system in order to minimize the risks. • With lane boundaries it is mainly referred to painted lines delimiters, nevertheless the system in good conditions might properly recognise as valid lane boundaries also other types (for example road edges, curbs, etc..). Being this function used to prevent unintentional lane change/lane drift, it will be temporary suppressed/ inhibited by a turn indicator activation, therefore, graphic warning, steering torque application and vibration will be terminated. In this condition in case of a vehicle detected by the Blind Spot Assist (BSA) system in the covered area on the proper side, there can be the transition from LKA to Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA) (if this latter is on and properly configured). Function Description and Operating Mode The function intent is to prevent the lane departure by warning the driver through indication on the cluster and, if set, applying steering torque and vibration. Whenever the system is enabled there will be graphic on the dedicated screen in the driver assist page and for the others it will be available in the left top corner of the cluster screen. The graphic which intent is to represent at the glance the system knowledge of the lane in front of the car, the system suppression status and warning. For this reason, a simple colour code has been adopted for each line (of the two presented): • Both grey lines means system enable, not able to operate (suppression condition present or lane detection Driving system not able to properly estimate the lane); • Left/right grey line: the lane detection system is not able to detect that specific lane boundary; • Yellow line: there is a steering torque intervention in progress that tries to prevent a departure on that side, in this situation the warning should increase the driver attention requiring him/her to properly handle the situation; • Yellow flashing line: the graphic is shown whenever the system detects a very imminent lane departure; torque and steering vibration can be added to this warning if configured by the customer. The white lines (one or both) indicates that the corresponding lane boundary is detected and the system is capable to intervene on it. An example of these screens can be found in the following figures: A: with only LKA system activated, steering torque in progress to correct the trajectory towards the lane center; B: with LKA and ACC systems activated, car is crossing the lane boundary, steering torque and vibration if configured are in progress when this graphic is shown. 5 When in Driver Assist Page Out off Driver Assist The icons that represent the status of the ADAS systems remain displayed even when you exit the "Driver Assist" screen. System Limitations Because of physical limits the system to properly operate needs good visibility (it might not work or not properly operate in case of heavy rain, snow, 277 Driving wet roads, fog, direct sun on the camera, etc.). NOTE: The sensors are not able to detect the presence of the hands on the steering wheel areas covered in wood, plastic bezels or carbon inserts (where present). 5 Sharp turns, slopes and change in slopes, poor lane boundaries, as well as construction areas and all the scenario described in this paragraph may challenge the system, therefore be always ready to prevent any unexpected behaviour of the car. Damaged front bumper, windshield replaced without proper technical intervention may also lead to system malfunction or system unavailability. Other conditions such as fault, but not explicitly indicated here may also prevent/interrupt the system intervention. WARNING! If the driver fail to adapt his/her driving style, Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. 278 Active LKA is only an aid. Driver is always responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. System in Fault When the LKA cannot properly operate due to a fault of its components or because the windshield in front of the forward facing camera is dirty, the amber light and/or the corresponding message will be displayed. If message suggestion does not allow fixing the fault, avoid using the system and have the vehicle inspected at the Service Network. Radar Device - Regulatory Information The "Regulatory Information" for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section "Services" on the website www.maserati.com. Driving Blind Spot Assist - BSA (for versions/markets where provided, without ACC) BSA system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear and enters standby mode when the transmission is in (P) Park. BSA System Operation The Blind Spot Assist (BSA) system uses two radar-based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (cars, lorries, motorbikes, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle. The example shown in the figure highlights the blind spots on either side of the vehicle when oncoming traffic is approaching from behind. When the vehicle is started, the BSA warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational and on. The The BSA system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 10 km/h (6 mph) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas. WARNING! • The BSA system does NOT alert the The BSA detection zone shown in figure covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle (approximately 3.3 m or 11 ft). The blind spot area extends from immediately behind the exterior rear-view mirrors up to about 7 m (23 ft) behind the rear bumper. driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones. • The BSA might alert the driver too late especially in case of rapidly approaching vehicles. 5 WARNING! Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist (BSA). BSA does not detect/react to the following: • Overtaking vehicles close on the side, placing them in the blind spot area. As a result, BSA may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. • Always pay attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle. (Continued) 279 Driving NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle at the Service Network to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSA not operating to specification. 5 280 The area on the rear bumper fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSA system can function properly. Do not cover or block the area of the rear bumper fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, spoilers, bicycle racks, etc.). The BSA system notifies the driver of vehicles or objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSA warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume (if the radio is on). Refer to “BSA and RCP Setting” in this chapter for further information. The BSA system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, overtaking traffic) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSA system will issue an alert whenever a vehicle enters any one detection zone as outlined below. Speed Range of Use Speed km/h (mph) Minimum 10 (6) Engaged/activated 10 (6) Maximum – (–) Entering from the Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle. Entering from the Rear The alert will turn on when the vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of more than 43 km/h (27 mph). Overtaking Traffic The figures show the vehicle approaching (A) and passing (O) another vehicle in the overtaking lane. If you pass another vehicle slowly, the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 2 seconds, the BSA warning light in the outside mirror will illuminate after 1.5 seconds. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater, the warning light will not illuminate. Driving opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes. Other Cases The BSA system is not designed to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage heaps, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service. The BSA system will not alert you of objects that are travelling in the WARNING! • The BSA system is only an aid to help detect vehicles in the blind spot zones. • The BSA system is not designed to detect pedestrians, cyclists, or animals. • Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSA system, always check your vehicle’s outside and rear-view mirrors for any vehicles approaching from behind or overtaking. • Use your turn signal before changing lanes. RCP - Rear Cross Path (for versions/markets, where provided) The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the drivers when gear in reverse of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. The RCP system monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle. Using sensors located on either side of the rear bumper, it detects any vehicles or objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 km/h to 3 km/h (1 to 2 mph) to a maximum of approximately 16 km/h (10 mph), such as in parking lot situations. 5 NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is moderately exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic. If an oncoming vehicle is detected, the RCP 281 Driving system will alert the driver using both the visual and audible alarms. If the radio is on, it will also reduce the radio volume. 5 WARNING! RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. More specifically, it is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. BSA and RCP Setting Setting modes can be selected from the MTC+ System. 282 Touch “Controls” soft-key and then “Blind Spot Assist” soft-key to enter the setting page. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is muted (if the radio is on). BSA in Visual and Acoustic Mode When operating in "Visual & Acoustic" mode, the BSA system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected vehicle or object. Refer to chapter "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information. BSA in Visual Mode When operating in "Visual" mode, the BSA system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror when it detects a vehicle or an object in the detection areas monitored by its sensors: depending on the status of the relative turn indicator, the warning light can be fixed or flashing. However, when the system is operating in RCP mode, it will respond with both visual and audible alerts when an oncoming vehicle or an object approaching the rear end side of the vehicle is detected. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded: in the same moment the warning light will start flashing. Whenever a turn signal and detected vehicle or object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert, the radio volume will be reduced (if the radio is on). Driving NOTE: If the hazard flashers are on, the BSA system will issue the appropriate visual alert only. When the system is in RCP mode, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected vehicle or object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio (if on) is also muted. Right/left turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP status always requests the chime. Blind Spot Assist Off When this function is turned off from the MTC+, there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSA or RCP subsystems. (example the areas around radio telescopes). The warning light on the outside rearview mirrors will be lit up and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone. devices can be consulted by accessing the section "Services" on the website www.maserati.com. System in Faulty The BSA system cannot properly operate due to a fault of its components, or because the area on the rear bumper fascia where the radar sensors are located is dirty. In these cases the amber warning light and the related message will be displayed on the instrument cluster. 5 NOTE: The BSA system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started, the previously-stored mode will be recalled and used. System Temporarily Unavailable The blind spot system will become temporarily unavailable and the instrument cluster display will show the message "Blind Spot Alert Temporarily Unavailable" when the vehicle enters a radio quite zone In these cases avoid using the system and have the vehicle inspected at the Service Network. Radar Device - Regulatory Information The "Regulatory Information" for all the radio frequency and radar 283 Driving Active Blind Spot Assist ABSA (optional, with ACC only) 5 284 ABSA system is only available on vehicles equipped with ACC system and represents an addition to the BSA previously described (see chapter "Blind Spot Assist - BSA" of this section). ABSA adds to the BSA the possibility in certain circumstances to avoid and or mitigate side collisions with vehicles proceeding in the adjacent lanes by changing the car trajectory in order to try to keep it inside the detected/ estimated lane. A steering wheel vibration is used as further feedback to warn the driver that the lane change is not safe. The main logic core is the front radar, whereas the sense inputs are the radars on the rear bumper fascia used for sensing the presence of vehicle in the blind spot areas and the forward facing camera placed behind the internal rear-view mirror that instead is used for lane detection and estimation. ABSA is designed to help the driver to avoid mitigate a collision. Torque and vibration application is however available in the 60 - 180 km/h (37 112 mph) speed interval. All the speed thresholds related to the BSA remain still valid, since ABSA as mentioned is BSA extension. ABSA is intended as a "hands-on" function meaning that the driver is required to stay engaged in the driving all the time with his/her hands on the steering wheel, in case hands are not on the steering wheel for a certain time there cannot be any steering torque application vibration included. Highly dynamic behaviours, driving on the lane boundary, off course will prevent the function from working. FCW braking and stability system interventions (ESC, ABS) will also prevent the system from operating. Changing lane results in system inhibition for a certain time. In addition the road must respect some characteristics such as minimum maximum width, lane clearly defined by two lane boundaries and only in limited case for a limited time at least one. System Availability NOTE: • In case of wet road or raining conditions the function could be disabled by the system in order to minimize the risks. • With lane boundaries it is mainly referred to painted lines delimiters, nevertheless the system in good conditions might properly recognise as valid lane boundaries also other types (for example road edges, curbs, etc..). ABSA is designed for an attentive driver therefore the system is available only when his/her hands are on the steering wheel or with hands off for a very limited amount of time. When the system is enabled, it will trigger cluster warning in case at least one hand is not detected on the steering wheel. The torque application as well as the vibration are suppressed/inhibited in case of: high driver torque in the steering wheel, high lateral acceleration, hands not on the steering wheel detected for more than a certain time. Speed Range of Use Speed km/h (mph) Minimum 60 (37) Engaged/activated 60 (37) Driving Speed km/h (mph) Maximum 180 (112) System Limitation Because of physical limits the system to properly operate needs good visibility (it might not work or not properly operate in case of heavy rain, snow, wet roads, fog, direct sun on the camera, dirty windshield, low illumination etc.) Sharp turns, slopes and change in slopes, poor lane boundaries, as well as construction areas and all the scenarios described in this paragraph may challenge the system, therefore be always ready to prevent any unexpected behaviour of the car. Damaged front bumper, windshield replaced without proper technical intervention may also lead to system malfunction or system unavailability. Other conditions such as faults, but not explicitly indicated here may also prevent/interrupt the system intervention. ABSA Setting ABSA is configurable by the customer in order to maximize its efficiency based on the driver driving style and his/her expectation of the system, reducing at the same time the possible invasiveness. Setting modes can be selected from the MTC+ System (see "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information). Touch "Controls" soft-key to display the current status of the ABSA system, if it was in the on state. NOTE: The ABSA system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started, the previously-stored mode will be recalled and used. To change status, touch the "Active Blind Spot Assist" soft-key. To change the system setting, touch the soft-key on the side. Driver warnings can be only "Visual", "Visual & Acoustic" (default mode) or "Visual & Haptic". System sensitivity can be set to "Early", "Medium" (default mode) or "Late". System strength can be set to "Low", "Medium" (default mode) or "High". Meanings of Settings When "Visual & Haptic" is selected and of course ABSA is enabled, then two following menus will be used by the system. • ABSA "Sensitivity": it tunes the distance to the lane boundary concerned where the system will start to apply steering torque. • ABSA "Strength": it tunes the steering torque value increasing or decreasing it to have a stronger or weaker trajectory correction/ deviation. 5 285 Driving 5 Active Blind Spot Assist in "Visual & Haptic" Mode When the system is on and configured "Visual & Haptic" then the real ABSA is enabled because to the conventional visual warnings is added the steering torque and vibration. When operating in this mode, the system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate outside rear-view mirror when it detects a vehicle or an object in the detection areas monitored by its sensors. In case of turn indicator activation on the appropriate side, the system will react with a torque on the steering wheel to try to prevent the lane change and therefore to avoid/mitigate the collision. The torque on the steering is applied when the car is very close to the lane boundary as a further feedback to warn the driver of the unsafe manoeuvre. NOTE: The steering torque is not supplied if the system is not able to estimate a lane and if the turn indicator from the appropriate side is not inserted. 286 WARNING! • Risk of accident despite steering • • • • • torque application of Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA). A course-correcting steering torque application cannot always prevent a collision. The driver is always required to steer, brake or accelerate himself, especially if ABSA warns or makes a course correcting steer intervention. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. In rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate steering torque application. This application may be interrupted at any time by counter steering. Lack of attention may lead to serious injury or death. RCP - Rear Cross Path Operation RCP operation (if equipped) is the same as described in chapter "Blind Spot Assist - BSA". When ABSA is turned off from MTC+ "Controls" page, there will be no visual or audible alerts from RCP subsystem. When ABSA is turned on with any setting,RCP subsystem shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected vehicle or object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio (if on) is also muted. Right/left turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP status always requests the chime. System Temporarily Unavailable The blind spot system will become temporarily unavailable and the instrument cluster display will show the message “Blind Spot Alert Temporarily Unavailable” when the vehicle enters a radio quite zone (example the areas around radio telescopes). The warning light on the outside rearview mirrors will be lit up and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone. System in Faulty The ABSA system cannot properly operate due to a fault of its components, or because the area on windshield where the forward-facing camera is located or on the rear bumper fascia where the radar sensors are located is dirty. In these cases the Driving amber warning light and the related message will be displayed on the instrument cluster. In these cases avoid using the system and have the vehicle inspected at the Service Network. Radar Device - Regulatory Information Highway Assist – HAS (for versions/markets where provided, with ACC only) The Highway Assist (HAS) is a level 2 Autonomy system (in reference to NHTSA standards) that is designed to aid the driver in the steering, acceleration, and braking functions of the vehicle. HAS is designed to only function on highways or limited access freeways. HAS centres the vehicle by controlling the EPS system based off of lane line information from the forward-facing camera and data from the front radar sensor. The “Regulatory Information” for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section "“Services" on the website www.maserati.com. HAS combines ACC and LKA to manage the steering and speed of the vehicle under specific conditions. The conditions to engage HAS are listed in the next paragraph. If a lane line cross is imminent, the steering wheel will vibrate and a graphic will display on the instrument cluster. WARNING! • In case the vehicle approaches a curve that is too tight in relation to the current speed the system will disengage, therefore the driver must be prepared to take over control of the vehicle immediately at any time. To avoid this situation it is important that the vehicle speed is not set higher than the current speed limit of the road. • Highway Assist (HAS) is a hands-on feature! You must keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times. The HAS system will disengage and ACC will cancel if your hands are removed from the steering wheels for a set amount of time. • HAS is intended for use only on highways or limited access freeways with a fully attentive driver. When using HAS, hold the steering wheel and be aware of surrounding traffic and road conditions. Always be prepared to immediately take over control of the vehicle from the HAS system. Failure to follow these 5 287 Driving 5 288 instructions could result in serious injury or death. • The following list does not fully represent all situations in which HAS may not function as intended. Do NOT solely rely on the HAS system to control the vehicle. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert and safely control the vehicle at all times. • If the windshield is replaced, you must have the forward-facing camera remounted and aligned by a Centre of the Service Network. HAS Operation Many factors can impact the performance of HAS causing the system to be unable to function as intended. These include (but are not limited to): • Narrow, winding or curvy roads. • Poor visibility (due to heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.). • Bright light (oncoming headlights or direct sunlight) or shadows. • Damage or obstruction caused by mud, ice, snow, etc. • A damaged or misaligned bumper. • Interference from other equipment that generates electromagnetic waves. • Wet roads, roads covered or partially covered by snow. • Construction zones. The conditions for HAS to engage are as follows: • HAS must be turned on or enabled. With ACC set (see "Adaptive Cruise Control – ACC" in this section), HAS system activates by simply pressing the button on the steering wheel. Once the conditions are met, HAS will engage. WARNING! The Highway Assist (HAS) system may take up to 5 seconds to engage once all conditions are met. NOTE: In case of wet road or raining conditions the function could be disabled by the system in order to minimize the risks. • The vehicle must be on the highway or limited access freeway. • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) must be engaged. • Left and right visible lane lines. • Vehicle speed must be between 0 and 145 km/h (0 to 90 mph). • No faults in the forward facing camera, radar, EPS, or MTC+. • Lane width between 2.8 and 4.2 m (3 to 4.6 yd). • Turn signal not activated. • No faults related to this system. Speed Range of Use Speed km/h (mph) Minimum 0 (0) Engaged/activated (with ACC engaged) 0 (0) Engaged/activated (with ACC not engaged) 30 (18) Maximum 145 (90) • If set above the maximum speed, HAS will not function after the vehicle speed will reach the maximum speed. • If set below the maximum speed and the ACC target speed is increased, HAS will function up to the maximum speed and then the system will turn off automatically. • When the ACC target speed is reduce and speed is lower than the maximum speed, the system will start automatically. • If the ACC target speed is set under the maximum speed, HAS is active and vehicle speed increases above the maximum speed due to slope, HAS will continue to function. Driving HAS Monitoring on Instrument Cluster HAS and the other ADAS systems conditions can be monitored on instrument cluster display by accessing the "Driver Assist" page with the buttons on the steering wheel (see "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). The symbol in grey indicates that the HAS system is active, but not engaged and is shown at the centre of the TFT display when the "Driver Assist" page is displayed. When exiting the "Driver Assist" page, on TFT display top left corner, the grey symbol will appear in the multiple light of active ADAS systems. disabled by pressing the on the steering wheel. Out of Driver Assist Page In addition to these symbols, on the TFT top and bottom edge a coloured glow may appear (further referred to as "attention level colour"). Attention level colour together with the outline of the symbol represent a further indication of the system status. When in Driver Assist Page When in Driver Assist Page button When exiting the "Driver Assist" page, the attention level colour will always be displayed until the system is Out of Driver Assist Page The HAS system uses sensors in the steering wheel outer crown to detect if the driver’s hands are on the steering wheel. If the driver’s hands are not detected on the steering wheel, the instrument cluster will display a series of warnings to alert the driver to return their hands to the steering wheel. There will also be audible chimes. After a set amount of time, HAS will cancel if the driver’s hands are not returned to the steering wheel. When the system does not sense the hands on the steering wheel for a few seconds (3 – 5 seconds) or more (up to 10 seconds), it tries to draw the attention of the driver by showing, even when the display is not in the 5 289 Driving "Driver Assist" page, the symbol with the figure of the hands in the centre of the display. According to such time frames, the system will change the attention level colour, silence the audio in the vehicle (if it is active) and emit audible chimes to invite the driver to take the control of the vehicle again. This is the only way to reengage the system. Hands Detection on Steering Wheel 5 The sensors in the steering wheel outer crown are able to detect the presence of the hands on the steering wheel. In order to be able to use the HAS system, place your hands around the steering wheel outer crown. driver releases his/her grip from the steering wheel up to 3 seconds. Out of Driver Assist Page The yellow attention level colour appears when the driver removes his/her hands from the steering wheel for 3 to 5 seconds and the symbol with the figure of the hands will occupy the whole central area of the display. The red attention level colour appears when the driver releases his/her grip from the steering wheel for 5 and up to 10 seconds: in this case a single audible chime is repeated until he/she will take the control of the vehicle again. NOTE: The sensors are not able to detect the presence of the hands on the steering wheel areas covered in wood, plastic bezels or carbon inserts (where present). HAS is deactivated if the steering wheel is no longer being touched. System Statuses The active status of the HAS system is indicated by the green attention level colour which is maintained even if the 290 When in Driver Assist Page When in Driver Assist Page Driving • Enter an Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB) event (See chapter "Forward Collision Warning - FCW" in this section). • Turn signal activated. System Cancellation Out of Driver Assist Page The red attention level colour remains even when the steering wheel is released for more than 8 to 10 seconds. In this case, if you are travelling at a speed above 40 km/h (25 mph) a sequences of 3 audible chimes will be emitted after 8 seconds and a message will inform the driver that the HAS system has been disengaged, inviting him/her to grip the steering wheel again. The same will happen after 10 seconds if you travel at a speed below 40 km/h (25 mph). Then the symbol on TFT display will become grey. If the driver keeps his/her hands away from the steering wheel (for more than 8 to 10 seconds), also the ACC system is deactivated ( white ACC symbol on the display) and will have to be reset. The aid of LKA system will be disabled as well. In these cases the display will not show the attention level colour anymore and the vehicle will be controlled by the driver only. HAS Disengage To disengage HAS you can do any of the following actions: • Press the HAS enable button on the steering wheel. • Begin steering manually. • Press brake pedal. • Turn off ACC. • Unbuckle the driver’s seat belt. • Press ACC Gap button for two seconds to enable CC system. • Shift out of the (D) Drive gear. The HAS system will cancel (without driver intervention) if either of the following actions occur: • Curve that is too tight. • When leaving the grip of the hands on the steering wheel. • Vehicle exits the highway or limited access freeway. • Lane line markers are not detected by the forward facing camera. • Any ADAS system faults. • ACC cancellation. • Vehicle speed exceeds the maximum limit. • Lateral accelerations exceeds the limits. NOTE: When HAS cancels, the will turn red then grey. 5 symbol System Limitations HAS is unable to guide the vehicle when the following conditions occur. • Lane markings are not clear or visibility is poor (i.e. heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.). 291 Driving • Obstructed, covered or damaged forward-facing camera or sensor. • When driving on hills or sharp curves. • When approaching toll booths. • When the highway entrance or exit is wider than 6 meters (20 ft). • Bright light (ex. direct sunlight or glare) facing the forward camera. 5 WARNING! Many unforeseen conditions can occur that can affect the performance of Highway Assist (HAS). Always keep this in mind and drive attentively. Be prepared to take over control of the vehicle immediately at any time. Radar Device - Regulatory Information The "Regulatory Information" for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section "Services" on the website www.maserati.com. 292 Traffic Sign Assist – TSA (optional) TSA detects traffic signs through the use of a forward-facing digital camera mounted on windshield, behind the rear-view mirror and assists the driver by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the instrument cluster. The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in snow conditions). TSA also uses the data of the navigation system, in order to provide information to the driver in all cases in which the camera is not able to detect the traffic signs that are present on the road where the car is travelling. Some examples of these are: due to low visibility, light reflection, damaged traffic signs, traffic signs in wrong position like rotated or fallen poles. NOTE: • Overtaking restriction sign will be displayed only in markets where this is allowed. • TSA provides a visual warning to the driver when he/she unintentionally reaches the maximum speed limit allowed or when it exceeds the set "Sensitivity" value. • The performance of TSA depends on the update degree of navigation system’s maps. Customised Settings TSA is configurable by the customer regarding the display mode on the instrument cluster and the warning sensitivity. Entering "Controls" page on MTC+ display the driver can see the current setting beside the "Traffic Sign Assist" soft-key. Touching "Traffic Sign Assist" soft-key can disable or enable the system. Touching the soft-key on the side the driver can change the setting. The display of the traffic signs can be blinking or static. Driving The system can be set to display the traffic signs when the speed of the vehicle is equal to the speed limit allowed, or when it is higher than 5 or 10 km/h (5 or 10 mph). Signs Monitoring on Instrument Cluster If TSA feature is set and a sign or a speed limit is detected, the related icons are displayed in the upper area of the instrument cluster beside of the main menu number and scroll arrows. The display area is divided in three different sectors: 1. Conditioned speed limit area. 2. Unconditioned speed limit area. 3. Overtaking restriction area. NOTE: Overtaking restriction sign will be displayed only in markets where this is allowed. If "Blinking On" warning mode is set, when the visual warning is provided only the unconditioned speed limit (in sector 2) will start blinking when the vehicle speed exceeds to the detected unconditioned speed limit (“+0 km/h” or “+0 mph” option) or when it exceeds the set sensitivity value ("+5 km/h" - "+5 mph" or "+10 km/h" "+10 mph" options). If the vehicle speed stays above the unconditioned speed limit for several seconds the unconditioned speed limit sign will stop blinking because the manoeuvre is evaluated as intentional. If the TSA is not able to determine any kind of valid speed limit neither from camera nor from digital maps the following image will be shown in sector 2. Since TSA also uses the data provided by the navigation system, it can update the sector 2 of the display in the following situations without detecting traffic signs: • When the vehicle changes road. • Highway enter/exit. • Urban area stored in the digital map enter/exit. 5 System Limitations TSA may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: • If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow or fog. • If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections from other vehicles. • If the windshield in the area of the camera is dirty, or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or covered. • If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt or snow, or because 293 Driving they are covered or because of insufficient lighting. • If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out-of-date. • If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs on construction sites or in adjacent lanes. • When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker. 5 Tires - General Information Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for safety and best performance of your vehicle. The tire pressure monitoring system “TPMS” setup on the vehicle (see “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in this section) may alert the driver about insufficient tire pressure even though the driver is responsible for checking regularly the tire pressure. Radial tires fitted on the vehicle may look properly inflated even when they actually are under inflated. Do not make a visual judgment when determining proper inflation. Three primary driving aspects are affected by improper tire pressure: Safety WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire overheating and failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the 294 • • • • road and potholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Economy Improper inflation pressures may cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. Ride comfort and vehicle stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Driving Tire Pressure Checkup The proper cold tire inflation pressure is indicated on the table "Tire Inflation Pressure" in section "Features and Specifications". Inflation pressure specified on the table always refers to "cold tire inflation pressure". Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1.6 km (1 mi) after a three hour period. Check tire pressures more often in case of significant outside temperature changes, as tire pressure varies according to temperature changes. The pressure should be checked and if necessary adjusted; tire wear and overall conditions should also be checked monthly. Tire pressures change by approximately 0.07 bar per 7°C of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in winter. Example: If garage temperature = 20°C and the outside temperature = 0°C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 0.21 bar for every 7°C for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 0.13 to 0.4 bar during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build-up or your tire pressure will be too low. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem and the TPMS sensor connected to it. Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you determine when your tires should be replaced. These indicators are moulded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1,6 mm (0.06 in). When the tread is worn to one of the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. WARNING! The wet performance (aquaplaning resistance) will decrease proportionally to the thickness of the tread. Tires Durability The service life of a tire depends on various factors including, but not limited to: • driving style; • tire pressure; • distance driven. WARNING! Tires and the spare tire (if equipped) should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. 5 Replacement Tires NOTE: In order to maintain high performance and safety level under all driving conditions, Maserati strongly recommends to use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. For the size designation of your tire see table "Wheels" in section "Features and Specifications". 295 Driving The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. NOTE: Maserati recommends Maserati Genuine Tires marked with "MGT" logo specifically designed for its models. 5 It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel assembly, make sure that the wheel’s specifications (valve, TPMS sensor and tire) match those of the original wheels. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. The Service Network is available to provide suggestions as to the types of tires most suited to the use foreseen by the Customer. WARNING! • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may 296 • • • • change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in altered steering, handling, and braking operations of the vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings appointed for your vehicle. Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. Always check the maximum speed rating on the tire sidewall on any tire on the vehicle. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tires. Risk of accident and serious personal injury due to excessive speed. Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in tire failure and loss of vehicle control. CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and tachometer readings. Tire Types Before mounting any type of tire, contact the Service Network to receive the technical information necessary to advise you on wheel and tire compatibility. As to the type of tires to use, inflation pressures and tires specifications, carefully follow the indications as reported in the “Technical Data” and “Tire Inflation Pressure” chapters in section “Features and Specifications”. Summer Tires Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 5 °C (40 °F) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact the Service Network. Driving Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/ snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. WARNING! The summer tires profile and rubber mixture are optimised for wet and dry driving conditions. Summer tires may not prove favourable for snow conditions: install snow tires before driving in such conditions to avoid risk of loss of control and damage to the vehicle as well as serious personal injury. All Season Tires (if equipped) All season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring, summer, fall, and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S (Mud + Snow), M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow Tires (if equipped) Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 120 km/h (75 mph). For speeds above 120 km/h (75 mph) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types. Snow Chains Maserati approved traction devices (or snow chains) may be used to improve traction on compacted snow in heavy snow conditions. The use of snow chains is specified by local regulations of each country. Use snow chains of reduced dimensions, with a maximum projection of 6 mm (0.23 in) beyond the tire tread. The snow chains may be fitted only on 19” rear wheel tires. Please, contact your Service for further information. Check the snow chain tension after driving for a distance of about 50 m (55 yd) with the chains fitted. With the snow chains fitted, it is advisable to deactivate the ESC system (see chapter "Drive Mode" in this section). 5 CAUTION! • The use of non-recommended snow chains may damage the vehicle. • Broken snow chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate snow chain breakage. Replace the damaged parts of the snow chain before further use. • Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph). 297 Driving • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. • Avoid holes in the road, do not drive over steps or sidewalks and do not drive on long stretches without snow. This will prevent damage to the vehicle and the roadbed. NOTE: The Maserati Service Network can provide you with all information about the Maserati Snow Chains, available in the "Genuine Accessories" range. 5 298 Compact Spare Tire (if provided) The limited-use spare tire, or compact spare tire, is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label indicating the driving speed limitations to comply with when using the spare tire. Inflate the spare tire to the cold inflation pressure listed on the table "Tire Inflation Pressure" in section "Features and Specifications". Mounting the spare tire affects vehicle handling. Replace (or repair) as soon as possible the original equipment tire and reinstall it on the vehicle. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at a time. CAUTION! With these compact spare tires, do not drive at more than 80 km/h (50 mph). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure according to the vehicle recommended cold pressure indicated on the table "Tire Inflation Pressure" in section "Features and Specifications" and on the label applied on the driver's side rear door pillar (for versions/markets, where provided). The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 0.07 bar for every 7°C (12°F). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1.6 km (1 mi) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Check "Tires – General Information" in section "Driving" for information on how to properly inflate the tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal Driving and there is no adjustment required when this occurs. The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss of the tire. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition persists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is equal or above the recommended cold inflation pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold inflation pressure in order for the TPMS light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the TPMS light will turn off once the system acquires the correct tire pressure. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 24 km/h (15 mph) in order for the TPMS to acquire and process the updated setting. For example: If your vehicle (stationary for more than three hours) may have a recommended cold inflation pressure of 2.1 bar. If the ambient temperature is 20°C (68°F) and the measured tire pressure is 1.8 bar, a temperature drop to 7°C (12°F) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 1.6 bar. This tire pressure is sufficiently low to turn ON the TPMS Light . Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 1.8 bar, but the TPMS light will still lit. In this situation, the TPMS light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold inflation pressure value. WARNING! The TPMS warns the driver that the tire pressure has decreased. This warning does not exempt the driver from periodically checking the tires and from complying with the prescribed tire pressure levels. CAUTION! • The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may occur when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. • The system can temporarily experience radio-electric interference emitted by devices using similar frequencies. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve 5 299 Driving stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem and damage the TPMS internal sensor. 5 NOTE: • Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and may lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS light . • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire. Premium System The TPMS system uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module. 300 The TPMS consists of the following components: • receiver module; • four TPMS sensors; • various TPMS messages, which display on the instrument cluster; • warning light . Tire Pressure Low Warning The TPMS light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an acoustic signal will notify that tire pressure is low in one or more of the four tires. The instrument cluster will also display a screenshot reporting the pressure values of each tire with flashing low pressure value. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tire/s with the low pressure (the one/s flashing in the instrument cluster graphic) to the recommended cold pressure inflation value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressure value, the system will automatically update, the graphic display in the instrument cluster will stop flashing, and the TPMS light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes at a speed between 24 km/h (15 mph) and 130 km/h (80 mph) in order for the TPMS to acquire and process the updated information. In case of replacement of wheel rims and/or the relative valve with TPMS sensor, or if the wheel arrangement is changed, when reusing the vehicle it may be necessary to wait 20 minutes for the TPMS to acquire and process Driving the new components and/or the new configuration. Tire Pressure System Fault If a system fault is detected, the TPMS light will flash for 75 seconds and then remain lit followed by a beeping sound. Therewith, the instrument cluster will display a "Service Tire Pressure System" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is ineffective. If the ignition switch is cycled, the sequence will repeat, in case the system fault still persists. If the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS light will no longer flash, and the "Service Tire Pressure System" message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following: • Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors • Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals. • Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. • Using tire chains on the vehicle. • Using wheels/tires not endowed with TPMS sensors. The instrument cluster will also display a "Service Tire Pressure System" message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected. In this case, the "Service Tire Pressure System" message is then followed by a graphic display with pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPMS sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as the "Service Tire Pressure System" message is displayed. Vehicles with Compact Spare Tire • The compact spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure of the compact spare tire. • If you replace a pneumatic having pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, with the compact spare tire, on the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS light will illuminate followed by a beeping sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still display a flashing pressure value corresponding to the compact tire position. 5 301 Driving 5 302 • After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 24 km/h (15 mph), the TPMS light will flash for 75 seconds and then remain lit. The instrument cluster will then display a "Service Tire Pressure System" message for a minimum of five seconds and then displays dashes (--) in place of the pressure value. • Each subsequent ignition switch cycle, will be followed by a beeping sound, the TPMS light will flash for 75 seconds and then remain lit. The instrument cluster will then display a "Service Tire Pressure System" message for a minimum of five seconds and subsequently displays dashes (--) in place of the pressure value. • Once you repair, replace or reinstall a tire with the compact spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically. The TPMS light will turn OFF and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure is below the lowpressure warning limit in any of the four tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 24 km/h (15 mph) in order for the TPMS to acquire and process the updated information. TPMS Deactivation The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four tire rims with wheel and tire assemblies free of TPMS sensors, such as winter wheel and tire assemblies. After replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not endowed with Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 24 km/h (15 mph). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and the instrument cluster will display the “Service Tire Pressure System” message and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values. Beginning with the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or display the "Service Tire Pressure System" message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure values. To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires endowed with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 24 km/h (15 mph). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS light Driving will flash for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument cluster will then display the "Service Tire Pressure System" message. The instrument cluster will also display pressure values in place of the dashes (--). On the next ignition switch cycle the "Service Tire Pressure System" message will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists. Radio Frequency Transmitter Regulatory Information The "Regulatory Information" for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section "Services" on the website www.maserati.com. Fuel Requirements Requirements of Gasoline The engines are designed to meet all environmental regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline with a minimum octane rating of 95. For vehicle top performance, use unleaded gasoline with no less than 98 minimum octane rating. Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage, and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle at the Service Network. Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. Maserati recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications if they are available. Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasoline that contain detergents, anti-corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasoline that have these additives may help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. CAUTION! Maserati strongly recommends the • use of Premium unleaded fuel ONLY. Use of lesser grade fuel (other than Premium) will lead to reduced engine performance, and poor fuel economy and can lead to the Malfunction Indicator Light illuminating on the instrument cluster. Continued use of lesser grade fuel (other than Premium fuel) can lead to engine misfire problems and possible catalytic converter damage. • The anti-pollution devices of the vehicle require unleaded fuel to be used at all times. Under no circumstance, not even in an emergency, should leaded fuel be supplied to the fuel tank, not even 5 303 Driving a minimum quantity. This would irreparably damage the catalytic converters. An inefficient catalytic converter results in noxious exhaust emissions which damage the environment. 5 Gasoline Containing Alcohol & Ethers (Oxygenated Fuels) Some fuels in some geographical areas, contain "oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or ethers. The fuel station service pumps with oxygenated fuels must be clearly marked indicating use of alcohols or ethers. Please be aware that in some geographic areas fuel stations may have fuelling pumps that are unmarked. If you are not sure if the fuel you will be dispensing into your vehicle contains alcohol or ethers, ask the fuel service station operator or change station. CAUTION! The use of detergent gasoline is effective in minimising fuel injector and intake valve deposits. The use of external fuel injector cleaning systems/fluids is NOT recommended. 304 Some geographic areas, require the use of “oxygenated” fuels to meet seasonal air quality standards. • Alcohol - Ethanol: Fuels containing ONLY up to 10% ethanol by volume may be used (ethanol may also be referred to as Ethyl alcohol, or “Gasohol”. • Ethers - MTBE: Fuel containing ONLY up to 15% MTBE may be used. Do not use any gasoline that contains lead as a knock inhibitor, and DO NOT use lead additives. MMT in Gasoline MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl) is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Maserati recommends that gasoline without MMT to be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask the gasoline station operator whether or not the gasoline contains MMT. Requirements of Diesel Fuel Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier. If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below –7°C/20°F), or is required to operate at colder than normal conditions for prolonged periods, use climatised No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters. This vehicle must only use "Premium Diesel" fuel that meets the requirements of EN 590 (as reported on the label applied inside the fuel filler door). Biodiesel blends that meet EN 590 may also be used. CAUTION! • Maserati strongly recommends the use of Premium diesel fuel ONLY. Use of lesser grade fuel (other than Premium) will lead to reduced engine performance, and poor fuel economy and can lead to the Malfunction Indicator Light illuminating on the instrument cluster. Continued use of lesser grade fuel (other than Premium diesel fuel) can lead to fuel Driving injection system damages and engine operating problems. • The manufacturer requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulphur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulphur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulphur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions control system. WARNING! Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent. They can be unstable under certain conditions and hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel. Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To prevent fuel system trouble, drain the accumulated water from the fuel/water separator using the fuel/water separator drain provided. If you buy good quality fuel and follow the cold weather advice above, fuel conditioners should not be required in your vehicle. If available in your area, a high cetane "Premium Diesel" fuel may offer improved cold-starting and warm-up performance. Refuelling Fuel Filler Neck Access To access the fuel filler neck, the filler door must be unlocked. From outside the vehicle, this can only be done by pressing the unlock or the lock button on the key fob RKE transmitter, in the same way as if opening or closing the doors. If any of the door lock controls is pressed from inside the vehicle, the filler door will still remain open to allow refuelling. • Press the indicated area on the filler door, which is located on the rear left side of the vehicle: the filler door will open completely. Gasoline 5 Diesel The label includes one or two graphic symbols that identifies the type of fuel to be used compliant to EN16942 and reported in the following table. To help the user in the choice of fuel compatible for the car, inside the fuel filler door is present a label shown in the picture. Unleaded fuel containing up to 2,7% (m/m) oxygen and a maximum ethanol content of 5,0% (V/V) EN228 compliant fuel 305 Driving Unleaded fuel containing up to 3,7% (m/m) oxygen and a maximum ethanol content of 10,0% (V/V) EN228 compliant fuel Diesel fuel containing up to 7% (V/V) Fatty Acid Methyl Esters (FAME) EN590 compliant fuel Refill the Tank 5 The fuel filler is sealed by an internal closing tab, which is opened by the fuel nozzle of the service station when refueling. Only a nozzle of the suitable size can open the closing tab. • Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler. NOTE: Only with a correct size nozzle you can refuel. WARNING! • To avoid the risk of fire, do not approach the filler with open flames or cigarettes! • To avoid the risk of inhaling noxious fumes, do not breathe close to the fuel filler door, when opened. 306 • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel filler door is open or the tank is being filled. • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This violates most fireprevention regulations and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on (see "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). • Fill the vehicle with fuel. Fuel tank capacity is indicated in the "Refillings" table in section “Features and Specifications”. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is basically full: it is possible to further ensure refueling by enabling the fuel nozzle additional fuel supply until twofold clicks. After the two additional clicks, the amount of fuel allowed by the system is very low, we recommend therefore not to persist further. • Wait approximately 10 seconds before removing the fuel nozzle in order to ensure completed supply of residual fuel and restrict the risk of fouling the fuel filler door area. • Remove the fuel nozzle. • Close the fuel filler door. CAUTION! To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not "top off" the fuel tank after filling. Emergency Refueling Funnel A funnel is provided in the tool box container (represented in the picture a tool kit of a Gasoline model with compact spare wheel) for emergency refuelling with a gas can (see chapter “Tool Kit” in section “In a Emergency”). Driving light turns on while driving, you shall contact the Service Network as soon as possible to have the fuel filter cleaned. Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release WARNING! A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers outside the vehicle while filling. If you are unable to unlock the fuel filler door using the key fob RKE transmitter, use the fuel filler door emergency release fitted in the boot. • Open the boot lid (see "Open and Close the Power Boot Lid" in section "Before Starting). • Lift the access cover on the left side of the boot compartment. • Then open normally the fuel filler door. 5 NOTE: The funnel is not suitable for refuelling AdBlue® on Diesel model. Presence of Water Inside the Fuel (Diesel only) The presence of water inside the fuel system can damage the injection system and cause engine’s malfunction. If, after a refuelling, the warning light turns on, it may be that some water has entered the fuel tank: in this case, turn off the engine immediately and contact the Service Network. If the warning • Pull the release cable moderately to avoid its possible break. It's not possible to feel or hear the unlocking of the fuel filler door actuator. 307 Driving Driving Conditions Before the Trip Check the following at regular intervals and always before long trips: • tire pressure and condition; • levels of fluids and lubricants; • conditions of the windshield wiper blades; • clean the glass on the external light and all other glass surfaces; • proper operation of the warning lights and of the external lights. 5 CAUTION! It is however advisable to perform these checks at least every 1000 km (600 mi) and always following the maintenance schedule reported in section "Maintenance and Care". Before you drive: • adjust seat position, steering wheel, adjustable pedals (if equipped with) and rear-view mirrors in order to have the best driving position; • ensure that nothing (mat covers, etc.) is obstructing the pedals movement; • carefully arrange and secure any objects in the boot, to prevent them to move forward in case of sudden stops; 308 • avoid heavy meals before a trip. A light snack helps keep your reflexes sharp. In particular, avoid drinking alcohol. WARNING! Beyond being prohibited by law, it is extremely dangerous to ride inside the boot or on the front lid. In the event of an accident, passengers sitting here are more exposed to the risk of serious injury. Passengers must only travel seated in the vehicle seats, with the seat belts fastened. Always check that the driver and all passengers have the seat belts correctly fastened. Safe Driving Although the vehicle is equipped with active and passive safety devices, the driver's conduct is always a decisive factor for road safety. Some simple rules for travelling safely in different conditions are listed below. Some of them will probably already sound familiar but, in any case, it would be useful to read them carefully. Driving at Night The main guidelines to follow when driving at night are set out below. • Drive drive carefully. Night conditions demand more focus and attention. • Reduce your speed, especially on roads with no streetlights. • Stop at early signs of drowsiness. Continuing to drive would be a risk for yourself and for others. Have a rest before continuing your trip. • Keep the vehicle at a greater distance from vehicles in front of you than you would during the day: it is difficult to assess the speed of other vehicles when you only see the lights. • Use the high beams only outside of densely-populated areas and when you are sure that they will not disturb other drivers. • When another vehicle is approaching, switch from high beams (if on) to low beams. • Keep lights and headlights clean. • Outside of densely-populated areas, beware of animals crossing the road. Driving in the Rain Rain and wet roads are dangerous. On a wet road all manoeuvres are more difficult since wheel grip on the asphalt is significantly reduced. This means that the braking distances increase considerably and the road grip decreases. Driving Some advices for driving in the rain are listed below. • Reduce your speed and keep a greater safety distance from the vehicles in front of you. High speed may result in a loss of vehicle control. • When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as aquaplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility: slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. • Heavy rain substantially reduces visibility. In these circumstances, even during the day, turn on the low beams, to be more visible to other drivers. • Set the air conditioning and heating system controls on the demisting function, in order to avoid any visibility problem. • Periodically check the conditions of the windshield wiper blades. • In low grip conditions use "I.C.E." driving mode (see chapters "Drive Mode" in this section). • Avoid driving with ESC OFF as this will likely cause a loss of control of the vehicle. Driving in Fog If the fog is dense, avoid travelling if possible. When driving in mist, blanket fog or when there is the possibility of banks of fog, please consider some advices listed below. • Keep a moderate speed. • Even in daytime, turn on the low beams and rear fog lights. Do not use the high beams. • Remember that fog creates dampness on the asphalt and thus any type of manoeuvre is more difficult and braking distances are extended. • Keep a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. • Avoid sudden changes in speed as much as possible. • Whenever possible, avoid overtaking. • If you are forced to stop the vehicle (breakdowns, impossibility of proceeding due to poor visibility, etc.), first of all, try to stop off of the travel lane. Then turn on the hazard warning lights and, if possible, the low beams. • Sound the horn rhythmically if you hear another vehicle approaching. CAUTION! Be aware that rear fog lights can bother the drivers following your vehicle: when visibility is back to normal, turn off these lights. Driving in the Mountains Mountain roads usually have many narrow turns and curves, tunnels and steep uphill or downhill slopes: please consider some advices listed below. • Drive at a moderate speed, avoid "cutting" corners. • When driving inside a tunnel in daylight turn on the low beams in advance; avoid high beams and be aware of the rapid brightness change. Avoid abrupt manoeuvres that could be dangerous for the following vehicle. • Never coast downhill with the engine off or in neutral. • Remember that passing other vehicles when driving uphill is slower and thus requires more free distance on the road. If you are being overtaken on a hill, slow down and allow the other vehicle to pass. 5 309 Driving 5 310 Driving on Snow or Ice Please consider some general advice for driving in these conditions, listed below. • Maintain a very moderate speed. • Fit snow chains or specific tires if the road is covered with snow: see the paragraphs "Tires – General Information" in this section. • We recommend you to activate the "I.C.E." mode (see chapters "Drive Mode" in this section). • During the winter season, even apparently dry roads can have icy sections. Be careful when crossing bridges, viaducts and roads that have little exposure to the sun and are bordered by trees and rocks. They may be icy. • Keep an ample safe distance from the vehicles in front of you. • Avoid sharp braking, sharp changes in direction and rapid acceleration. Rapid acceleration on snow covered or icy surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving) wheels. WARNING! Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear driving wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.). Driving through Flooded Sections Driving through more than a centimeters deep shallow standing water section will require extra caution to ensure passenger safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. WARNING! Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so. CAUTION! • Always check the depth of the • • • • standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than 150 mm (6 in). Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water. Do not exceed 8 km/h (5 mph) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle drivetrain components. After driving through standing water, do not drive if you are not sure about drivetrain condition. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Warranty. Getting water inside your vehicle engine can cause it to lock up and Driving stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Warranty. • After driving through standing water always have the fluids (engine oil, transmission oil, etc) checked for contaminations at a Service Center. WARNING! • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle traction capabilities. Do not exceed 8 km/h (5 mph) when driving through standing water. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to progressively dry the brakes discs and pads. • Getting water inside your vehicle engine can cause it to lock up and stall out. • Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Adding Reducing Agent AdBlue® (Diesel only) Specifications of Reducing Agent AdBlue® AdBlue® is a registered trademark of VDA (Verband der Automobilindustrie), the German vehicle manufacturers' association. Reducing agent AdBlue® must meet the quality requirements of ISO 222411. CAUTION! • AdBlue® is a non-toxic, colourless solution of pure synthetic urea and de-mineralised water. In the event AdBlue® becomes contaminated due to improper handling or storage, it may lead to the exhaust gas aftertreatment system malfunctioning. • In its sealed container, AdBlue® has a shelf life of at least a year if stored at temperatures between 30°C ° (86°F) ° and -10°C ° (14°F) ° away from direct sunlight. safely, and avoiding damage to the vehicle or the environment. Suitable messages on the TFT display indicate when the AdBlue® tank needs filling (see chapter "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). You can check any time the filling status of the reservoir containing AdBlue® by entering the submenu “Vehicle Info” with the buttons on the right side of the steering wheel (see chapter "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). Under severe operating conditions, sporty use or at temperatures below 5°C (23°F), it may be necessary to top up AdBlue® between two consecutive scheduled maintenance services. Before travelling in countries where it might be difficult to find AdBlue®, check that the reductant level in the tank is sufficient to cover the distance to be travelled. If this is not the case, top up with AdBlue® by yourself or have it done by the Service Network. 5 Have the AdBlue® tank filled or topped up by the Service Network. They have the necessary equipment and skills to perform this operation 311 Driving • If you expect to travel through 5 312 CAUTION! • AdBlue® freezes at outer temperatures of approximately -10°C (14°F) but the vehicle can be used also at lower temperatures since it is equipped with an AdBlue® pre-heating system. • At temperatures below -10°C (14°F), the AdBlue® level sensor may no longer ensure an accurate indication for the instrument cluster. A message on the instrument cluster will invite to refuel Adblue® above -10°C (14°F). Allow the vehicle to reach regular operating conditions before checking level by means of the "AdBlue Level" function in the VEHICLE INFO menu (see chapter "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). • If the vehicle remains several hours at low temperature (below -10°C/14°F), Adblue® in the reservoir could freeze completely. Under these conditions, it could be impossible to top up AdBlue®. Should it be necessary to top up, it is necessary to top up only after using the vehicle for a few hours, or after leaving it parked at a higher temperature. regions where you could find temperatures below -10°C (14°F), we suggest that you check Adblue® level and, if necessary, top up before leaving. Owners may top up reducing agent AdBlue® to proper level after purchasing AdBlue® at service stations that stock it. Important Warnings if You Top Up AdBlue® Level Yourself If a wrong fluid is filled into the AdBlue® tank (for instance Diesel fuel, coolant, etc...), the Malfunction Indicator Light comes on and the message shown in the figure appears on the instrument cluster first time when driving for 10 seconds, accompanied by a single acoustic signal. If so, have the vehicle serviced by the Service Network as soon as possible. A top-up using the nozzle or with canisters or single-use bottles is not a difficult operation provided that you follow the instructions given in the following paragraph and standard safety precautions to avoid direct contact with AdBlue® fluid or prevent possible spills from being released into the environment or damaging vehicle bodywork or covers. WARNING! • Keep AdBlue® away from skin or eyes: in the event of accidental contact, wash the affected area with water and flush eyes with running water, keeping eyelids wide open. In the event product is swallowed, Driving rinse mouth and drink abundant water. • Keep AdBlue® containers out of the reach of children. CAUTION! If AdBlue® is spilled on interior linings or on paint-finished vehicle body parts, wash the affected area with abundant soapy water, if possible before the fluid begins to crystallise. The AdBlue® filler neck with cap is located next the fuel filler neck. To access the AdBlue® cap, open the filler door as indicated in the chapter "Refuelling" in this section. • Turn the AdBlue® cap counter clockwise until releasing it. How To Top Up AdBlue® Level Yourself When the low level indication is displayed, the quantity of AdBlue® left in the tank gives a range of about 2000 km (1200 mi) under normal driving conditions. Maserati recommends refilling at any AdBlue® distributor, through the appropriate nozzle and, in case of emergency, to refill using canisters or single-use bottles to top up AdBlue® level. These bottles contain 2 litres of product approximately, which is enough to extend range by another 2000 km (1200 mi) at least. These bottles are generally available at service stations that sell these products. • Insert the end of the cap into the hole of the filler door hinge. CAUTION! • Do not place the cap removed on paint-finished vehicle body parts or on the luggage compartment lining to avoid damage. • Take the necessary precautions to avoid introducing AdBlue® into the fuel filler neck. Refilling with Nozzles You can fill up at any AdBlue® distributor. Proceed as follows: • Insert the AdBlue® nozzle in the filler neck and start refilling. Fill the AdBlue® tank with a maximum reducing agent amount of 19.6 litres (4.30 UK gallons). • Stop refilling at the first shut-off (the shut-off indicates that the AdBlue® tank is full). Do not proceed with the refilling, to prevent spillage of AdBlue®. • Extract the nozzle from the filler neck. 5 Refilling with Containers Proceed as follows: • Check the expiration date and read the advice for use on the label before pouring the content of the canister 313 Driving 5 314 or of the bottle into the AdBlue® tank. • Refilling by Canister If containers which cannot be screwed into the filler neck are used for refilling, in order to avoid possible overfilling of the AdBlue® tank (it could cause the switching on of the Malfunction Indicator Light to alert the driver) it is necessary to refer to the AdBlue® level information into the section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” and not exceed the maximum AdBlue® tank capacity. In any case, stop the refilling at the first leak of AdBlue® from filler neck. In case the indication of refilling appears on the instrument cluster display (see “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”), fill the AdBlue® tank with at least 5 litres (1.1 UK gallons). • Refilling by Single-use Bottles The refilling by containers which can be screwed into the filler neck is not recommended by Maserati. If bottles are used for refilling, it is necessary to pay attention to not overfill the AdBlue® tank (it could cause the switching on of the Malfunction Indicator Light to alert the driver). It is necessary to refer to the AdBlue® level information into the section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” and not exceed the maximum AdBlue® tank capacity. In case the indication of refilling appears on the instrument cluster display (see “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”), fill the AdBlue® tank with at least 2.5 bottles (5 litres , 1.1 UK gallons) and the maximum quantity of 6 bottles (13 litres, 2.8 UK gallons). CAUTION! To avoid contamination, use AdBlue® from sealed containers or canisters and always clean the extension spout before insert it to the filler neck. NOTE: If the AdBlue® comes out during filling, it is advisable to clean the filler area before reinstalling and close the cap. Once the refilling is finished, insert the AdBlue® cap into the filler neck and turn it clockwise until locking it in place: close the fuel filler door. ENVIRONMENTAL! Empty bottles or containers may be disposed of at the Service Network or into household waste bins where this is allowed by local environmental protection regulations. When the engine is started next after a top-up, the low level message on the display should disappear after a few seconds. If less than 2 litres of AdBlue® have been added upon topup, the message may appear again with a longer range before engine start inhibition. 6 - In an Emergency Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 In the Event of an Accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 In case of a Punctured Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Emergency Release of the Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Freeing the Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Towing a Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 315 In an Emergency Tool Kit The tools and other first aid equipment are located in the boot inside a preformed container and are available by lifting the ground coverage. The tools layout in the container depends on the boot configuration of the vehicle, depending on the destination markets and on customer requirements. A Configuration with tire repair kit. B Configuration with compact spare wheel. The tools inserted in the boot container are the following: 6 Ref. Description 1 Double torx + cross-head screwdriver A, B 2 8 mm Allen wrench A, B 3 Electric compressor complete with pressure gauge for inflating the compact spare wheel B 4 Spanner for unscrewing/tightening the wheel nuts and for operating the jack B 5 Chock to be positioned in front of or behind the wheel B 6 Tow hook A, B 7 Funnel for emergency supply A, B 8 First Aid Kit (*) A 9 Tire repair kit A 10 Jack B (*) For versions/markets where provided. 316 Layout In an Emergency Hazard Warning Flashers The hazard warning flashers switch is located in the central console in front of the transmission lever. Gasoline Gasoline Diesel Diesel Press the switch to turn on the hazard warning flashers to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. When these lights illuminate, the direction indicators, the related warning lights on the instrument cluster and the button start flashing. Press the switch a second time to turn off the hazard warning flashers. This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the hazard warning flashers will continue to operate even 6 317 In an Emergency though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. CAUTION! • When the hazard warning flashers are activated, the direction indicators control is disabled. • The extended use of the hazard warning flashers may wear down your battery. 6 318 In the Event of an Accident It is important always to keep calm. • If not directly involved, stop at a safe distance of at least ten meters away from the accident area. • If on a motorway, stop without obstructing the emergency lane and be especially careful if you need to exit the vehicle. • Turn off the engine and switch on the hazard warning flashers. • At night, illuminate the accident area with the headlights. • Always act with caution to avoid the risk of being crashed into by other drivers. • Indicate that an accident has occurred by placing the emergency triangle (if equipped) in a well visible position and at the prescribed distance. • Call the emergency services, providing as much information as possible. On the motor way, use the special call boxes. • Remove the ignition key (if present) from the vehicles involved. • If fuel or other chemical products can be smelled, do not smoke and ask people around you to put their cigarettes out. • To extinguish fires, even small ones, use a fire extinguisher, blankets, sand or earth. Never use water. • In multiple accidents occurred on motorways, particularly where visibility is poor, there is a high risk of being involved in other collisions. Leave the vehicle immediately and move away from the area. In case of Injured Persons • Never leave the injured person alone. Persons not directly involved in the accident are also required to give assistance. • Do not crowd around injured persons. • Reassure the injured person that help is on the way and stay close to them to assist them to avoid possible panic attacks. • Release or cut the seat belts restraining the injured persons. • Do not give the injured persons anything to drink. • Never move an injured person. • Remove the injured person from the vehicle only in emergency situation, e.g. if there is a risk of fire, sinking in water or falling down into a pit. • When removing an injured person, do not pull his/her limbs, never bend his/her head and, as far as possible, In an Emergency keep his/her body in a horizontal position. Emergency Kit (for versions/markets where provided) The Emergency Kit provides first aid in case of a car breakdown or any other situation. The kit comes in a case on the left side of the boot compartment. The kit includes the following elements: • emergency triangle; • reflective emergency vest; • luminescent pipes providing chemical lights; • dynamo torch; • First Aid Kit; • gloves; • ice scraper. NOTE: The items inside the kit could change according to different countries' regulations. First Aid Kit (for versions/ markets where provided) The First Aid Kit is available in the boot compartment inside the Emergency Kit case (if foreseen) or in the following positions: • on the vehicles with tire repair kit configuration (see "Tool Kit" in this section) this kit is placed in the tools container; • on the vehicles with compact spare wheel this kit is placed in the right side of the boot compartment. This kit contains following: • sterile gauze to cover and clean the wounds; • bandages of various sizes; • treated adhesive bandages of various sizes; • an adhesive bandage strip; • a pair of rounded-end scissors; • gloves; • rescue blanket. Engine Overheating To reduce potentially overheating of the engine in city traffic, while stationary, place the transmission in N (Neutral), but do not increase the engine idle speed. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition: • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. 6 CAUTION! Driving with a hot cooling system could damage the engine. If the temperature gauge is positioned on the red zone "H" (refer to "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"), pull over 319 In an Emergency and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the temperature gauge drops back into the normal range. If the temperature gauge remains on the red zone "H," turn the engine off immediately and contact the Service Network. 6 WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open it until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a coolant bottle pressure cap (refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in section "Maintenance and Care") when the radiator is overheated. In case of a Punctured Tire The vehicle can be equipped with a tire repair kit or with a compact spare wheel, depending on the destination markets and on customer requirements. Using Tire Repair Kit Small punctures up to 6 mm (1⁄4") in the tire tread can be sealed using the tire repair kit, fitted beneath the ground coverage of the boot compartment. The kit consists of two parts: • an electric compressor with pressure gauge and power cable; • a bottle containing sealant with hose to be connected to the punctured tire. Diesel NOTE: For the tire repair procedures with tire repair kit see instructions included in the kit. This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 10 km (6 miles) with a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). CAUTION! • Intruding objects (e.g., screws or Gasoline 320 nails) should not be removed from the tire, which could compromise the repair with the tire repair kit. • Do not use the tire repair kit if the tire shows lateral damages and/or the rim is damaged by driving with flat tire. In an Emergency • Tire repair kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -20°C (-4°F). • Replace the tire repair kit sealant bottle prior to the expiration date (printed on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. NOTE: • The compressor power plug can be inserted either in the 12 V power outlet housed in the boot or inside the passenger compartment (see “Interior Features” in section “Understanding the Vehicle”). • When having the tire serviced, advise the Maserati dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the tire repair kit. Using the Compact Spare Wheel NOTE: The compact spare wheel is supplied in aluminium or steel: the pictures show the one in aluminium. The compact spare wheel is stored in the boot and is supplied deflated in order to limit the amount of space occupied. An electric compressor is also provided for inflating. In the event of a tire puncture, proceed as follows. • Stop the vehicle in a place that does not constitute a danger to traffic and where the wheel can be changed safely. • Select the P (Park) mode and then engage manually the electric parking brake and move the ignition switch to OFF position. • If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle at the required distance. WARNING! • The vehicle must be level and on firm ground during the vehicle lifting operations. The use of chock contained in the tool kit is always mandatory. In case of slight slope (less than 10%), place the chock in front of (downhill) or behind (uphill) the wheel diagonally opposite the one to be replaced. In case of higher slope (more than 10%), call the Assistance Service and avoid any operation. • The jack should be used on level firm ground wherever possible. • It is recommended that the wheels of the vehicle be chocked, and that no person should remain in a vehicle that is being jacked. • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack. • Before placing the chock, it is necessary to open it like a book as shown in the picture. 6 • Lift the ground coverage of the boot compartment. • Take the tools indicated in picture for changing the wheel from the container. 321 In an Emergency this case, the insert must be installed on the kit spanner. Gasoline Gasoline • Place the jack near the wheel to be changed as illustrated. Make sure that the head of the jack is correctly inserted in one of the slots 1 or 2 under the longitudinal member. 6 Diesel • Loosen and remove the spare wheel locking knob. • Take the tool box container and the compact spare wheel out of the boot. 322 Diesel • Using the kit spanner, loosen anticlockwise by approximately one turn the five bolts on the wheel to be changed. In case a “Wheel Security Stud Bolt” is installed, it can only be loosened and removed by using the specific fitting spanner insert provided with the “Wheel Security Stud Bolt Kit”, available in the “Genuine Accessories” range. In In an Emergency • Turn the compressor on by pressing the switch. • Stop the compressor pressing switch again, when the pressure indicated by the gauge reaches the recommended level (see “Tire Inflation Pressure” in section “Features and Specifications”) and screw the cap on the compact spare wheel valve. WARNING! • Never position yourself under a jacked vehicle. • Jack wrong positioning can cause vehicle accidental fall, with consequent severe risk for operator’s safety and damages to vehicle body • Never use the jack to carry out maintenance or repairs under the vehicle. • Insert the kit spanner on the hexagonal end of the jack and turn it clockwise until the jack bracket is firmly inserted in the slot under the longitudinal member. • Turn the jack lever until the wheel is raised a few centimeters off the ground. • Completely unscrew the five bolts and remove the wheel. • Make sure that the contact surfaces between spare wheel and hub are clean and free of impurities. • Fit the compact spare wheel with the valve stem side out and secure it with the five bolts previously removed, without tightening them. • Remove from the compressor case the inflation hose and the cable with a plug for the power outlet. • Unscrew the valve cap of the compact spare wheel and screw the fitting of the inflation hose onto the valve. • Insert the plug inside one of the available power outlets fitted in the boot or passenger compartment. • Set the ignition device on ACC or RUN position. 6 CAUTION! • In order to obtain a more accurate reading, the compressor should be switched off when checking the tire pressure of the compact spare wheel on the pressure gauge. • Do not run the compressor for more than 20 minutes: there is a risk it could overheat. Also, prolonged power absorption may discharge the 323 In an Emergency • For safety reasons, it is absolutely battery, subsequently preventing the engine from starting. • The compressor has been designed exclusively to inflate compact spare wheels; do not use it to inflate air mattresses, dinghies etc. • With the kit spanner, turn anticlockwise the hexagonal end of the jack to lower the vehicle and remove the jack. • Fully tighten clockwise the bolts, alternately tightening diametrically opposite. 6 324 WARNING! FOR ALUMINIUM SPARE WHEEL • Observe the tightening torque for the bolts securing the spare wheel (98 ± 10 Nm/ 72 ± 7 lbf·ft). • FOR STEEL SPARE WHEEL Observe the tightening torque for the bolts securing the spare wheel (86 ± 10 Nm/ 63 ± 7 lbf·ft). • Bolts must be tightened only after vehicle is back to ground, so as to prevent it from falling down due to the force exerted for bolt tightening. Failure to comply with this recommendation can cause operator injuries. forbidden to drive with more than one compact spare wheel fitted on the vehicle. • Snow chains cannot be fitted on the compact spare wheel. • The compact spare wheel can travel a maximum of 3000 km (1800 mi). WARNING! • The compact spare wheel is narrower than standard wheels and must only be used to travel the distance required to reach a service station, where the punctured tire can be repaired or replaced. • Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) when using the compact spare wheel; when this limit is exceeded, the stability, road holding and braking of the vehicle will be compromised. Avoid accelerating to full speed, heavy braking and fast cornering. • The compact spare wheel must be inflated to the recommended tire pressure (see “Tire Inflation Pressure” in section “Features and Specifications”). To Refit the Standard Wheel with Repaired or Replaced Tire • Following the procedure and the caution described above, raise the vehicle and remove the compact spare wheel reusing the supplied spanner. • Fit the standard wheel with repaired or replaced tire. • Tighten the original bolts on the wheel. • Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. • Fully tighten the bolts, alternately tightening diametrically opposite. In an Emergency Gasoline Gasoline WARNING! Observe the tightening torque for the bolts securing the wheels (98 ± 10 Nm / 72 ± 7 lbf·ft). Once finished: • completely deflate the compact spare wheel by pressing on the valve with the overhang of the valve cap; • place the compact spare wheel and tool container in the boot; • fix everything in place with the locking knob; 6 Diesel • wrap the power cable and the inflation hose inside the compressor case; • place the compressor, the spanner and the jack in the container above the compact spare wheel; • remove the chock located in front of or behind the wheel and place it inside the container. Diesel • lower the ground coverage at the bottom of the boot compartment. 325 In an Emergency Emergency Release of the Parking Brake 6 In the event the electric parking brake locks due to a total system failure (see "Parking Brake" in section "Driving"), it is not possible to move the vehicle, since the thrust action of the power actuator that operates on the brake pad inside each rear caliper will lock the rear wheels. After verifying that the battery is sufficiently charged (otherwise use an external power source connected to the vehicle electric system to operate the EPB control lever and try to unlock the parking brake), for moving the vehicle it is necessary to act on the power actuator or caliper in order to release the pressure on the pads of the rear brake calipers. Contact the Service Network to carry out this operation. CAUTION! If the parking brake has been activated in manual or automatic mode and it is not possible to release it by operating on the lever of the central console, do not move the vehicle since rear brake calipers might 326 be damaged. To move the vehicle, load it on a rescue vehicle, avoiding to move it. In case of AWD vehicle, avoid moving it with only the rear axle lifted, since the torque converter of AWD system might be seriously damaged. For more information on vehicle towing, see "Towing a Disabled Vehicle" chapter in this section. Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position The manual disengagement of the shift from P (Park) has the purpose to allow pushing or towing the vehicle if not normally possible using the shift lever (such as in the event of a battery failure with inability to start the engine). The current procedure is exclusively intended for emergency situations, but not for frequent use. WARNING! Before performing the manual release of P (Park) position, if possible, always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake. Performing this operation will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake. Performing the manual release of P (Park) position on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle. The cover that allows the emergency manual park release is located on the left part of the driver’s foot well. In an Emergency • Lift the mat on the driver side to access the lace. • Slip the cover from its seat. • Take strap out of its seat. • With the tip of a screwdriver press the clip shown in the picture box and lift the lace up to release the transmission from the P (Park) position. The new position will allow vehicle moving and towing. • Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle. Freeing the Stuck Vehicle If your vehicle is stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can probably be moved backward and forward by a simple rocking motion. Steer the wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Shift then between D (Drive) or M +/(Manual) and R (Reverse) (see chapter "Automatic Transmission” in section "Driving"). Shifting to M +/- (Manual), try to free the car starting in second gear. At low speed motion of the vehicle, you can switch quickly from D (Drive) to R (Reverse), and vice versa, just by pressing the release button on the shift lever. For more effectiveness press lightly on the accelerator pedal in order to avoid wheel slippage. If unable to release the vehicle in one of the previously described ways, enter the low-grip driving mode, by pressing the "I.C.E." button, and completely exclude the yaw and slip control system, by pressing the button for at least 3 seconds. Moving the shift lever between D (Drive) and R (Reverse) to start. 6 327 In an Emergency Notes for AWD Vehicle Version On these vehicles slippage produced by low grip conditions, automatically activates the AWD mode. Using the shifting mode M +/- (Manual), the insertion of AWD will happen immediately when engaging a forward gear. 6 CAUTION! Racing the engine or spinning the drive wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in N (Neutral) for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimise overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive drive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the drivetrain and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let 328 anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a battery of another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster. It is necessary to have proper jumper cables in order to connect the booster battery to the remote posts of the discharged battery. Booster cables have usually positive and negative terminal clamps and are identified by a different from the sheath color (red = positive, black = negative). Maserati provides on request jumper cables created for its models and content in a pratical case. NOTE: The Maserati Service Network can provide you with information about the "Maserati Jumper Cables Kit", available in the "Genuine Accessories" range. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the battery In an Emergency manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions. WARNING! • Using booster packs that have not CAUTION! • To jump start a vehicle do not use a portable battery, a booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 14 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system of the vehicle with the discharged battery may occur. • Do not use a battery charger for emergency starting under any circumstances. You could damage the electronic systems, particularly the control units managing the ignition and fuel supply functions. • If the battery is completely discharged when the windows are fully raised, open the door with the utmost care; do not close the door again until it is possible to lower the window. been checked, which could therefore release a too high charging voltage (higher than 14 V), in extreme environmental conditions (for example: closed areas or without proper ventilation and temperatures higher than 50°C/122°F or lower than -20°C/-4°F) create the right conditions for ignition which could then cause the battery to explode. Therefore you shall always perform jump-starting operations using the adequate tools and in the best environmental conditions, taking all necessary precautions. • Do not attempt jump-starting if the discharged battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode during jump start and cause personal injury. • Do not carry out this procedure if you have not done it before: incorrect manoeuvres can originate high electrical discharges and even cause the battery to explode. • To avoid the risk of explosion or fire, do not approach the battery with open flames or cigarettes that could generate sparks. NOTE: If you need to disconnect the battery from the vehicle electrical system, see "Maintenance - Free Battery" in section "Maintenance and Care"). Battery Remote Posts Position For easier operation, remote battery posts for jumpstarting are located in the engine compartment while the battery is stored in the boot. Open the hood (see "Open and Close the Hood" in section "Before Starting") the positive remote post (+) and the negative remote post (–) are easily recognizable by the icons labeled on the integrated power module. 6 329 In an Emergency Jump-Start Procedure WARNING! the protection cap of the cable indicated on the external side of the integrated power module. • Stay clear of the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is on. You can be injured by the moving fan blades. • Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. • Do not allow the vehicles involved in the jumpstarting operation to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and cause personal injury. 6 330 • Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. • Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into P (Park) and turn the ignition to OFF. • If using another vehicle to jumpstart the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach and set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is off. • Connect one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive (+) remote post of the vehicle with the discharged battery after lifting • Connect the opposite terminal clamp of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. • Connect one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative (–) post of the booster battery. • Connect the opposite terminal clamp of the negative (–) jumper cable to the remote negative (–) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery as rendered. • Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. If using a portable battery booster, wait a few seconds after connecting the cables, before starting the booster vehicle. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence. • Disconnect the terminal clamp of the negative (–) jumper cable from the remote negative (–) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. • Disconnect the opposite terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable from the negative (–) post of the booster battery. • Disconnect the terminal clamp of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. In an Emergency • Disconnect the terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. NOTE: If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at a Service Network center. Towing a Disabled Vehicle Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only towing bars and other equipment designed for the purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Safety chains are mandatory. Except for the front threaded seat to fix the supplied hook (see "Tool Kit"chapter in this section), the vehicle is not equipped with other connection points for towing operations with tow truck. CAUTION! Any improper manoeuvre and use of unsuitable equipment for recovering vehicle in an emergency from off road location could seriously damage the vehicle. Contact the Service Network or anyone having suitable equipment and the required expertise to safely and properly carry out any required operations. Make sure you comply with local towing regulations. • If the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to the following paragraph on how to shift the automatic transmission out of the P (Park) position and release the parking brake. • If the vehicle battery is still charged, turn off the engine and disengage the parking brake manually (if automatically engaged) by using the command behind the shift lever (see "Parking Brake" chapter in section "Driving"). Shift then manually the transmission out of P (Park) as described in “Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position” chapter of this section. If you need to use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in RUN position, do not use the ACC position. Manual Release of Transmission with Low Battery In order to push or tow the vehicle if unable to shift the transmission out of P (Park) (such as a discharged battery), a manual park release is available. In this case it is necessary to manually release the shift lever and release the parking brake if inserted (see “Emergency Release of the Parking Brake” in this section). Follow the steps as indicated in “Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position” in this section to manually disengage the transmission. 6 331 In an Emergency Vehicle Towing Conditions Maserati only allows vehicle towing either on a flatbed or with all four wheels off the ground. Towing an RWD Vehicle If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is still operable, a RWD vehicle may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions. • The shift lever must be in N (Neutral). • The distance to be traveled must not exceed 50 km (30 mi). • The towing speed must not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph). 6 332 CAUTION! If you have to tow the RWD vehicle with 2 wheels raised, ensure that the ignition switch is in the OFF position. If this is not observed, when the ESC is active, the ECU will store a malfunction and the relative warning light will illuminate on the instrument cluster display. This requires the intervention of the Service Network to reset the system. Towing an AWD Vehicle WARNING! • Single axle towing or use of a tow dolly is not allowed since it will severely damage components of an AWD vehicle. • Use of a tow dolly on front wheels is strictly forbidden since front wheels may still receive a residual amount of torque and disengage the vehicle from the tow dolly and affect safety of both rescuers and other road users. Use the Tow Hook Included in the Tool Kit CAUTION! The tow hook should only be used for towing the car on flat roads. Do not use the tow hook to remove the car that is stuck on off-road stretches. The tow hook can also be used to tow the vehicle on the platform of a tow truck. It is necessary to inform the operators of the rescue vehicle about the vehicle minimum height to avoid, during its loading, any contact of the lower ends of the front or rear bumper with the tow truck loading ramp. The tow hook is contained in the tool kit (see "Tool Kit" in this section) and must be screwed in its seat accessible behind the front grille, right-hand In an Emergency side, after removing the protective cap. • Carefully clean the threaded seat before screwing the hook. • Screw the tow hook into its seat for at least 11 turns. NOTE: Maximum work angle of towing cable or bar: 15°. 6 333 In an Emergency 334 7 - Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Scheduled Service Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 A/C System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Wheels Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Bodywork Maintenance and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Interior Maintenance and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Vehicle Stored for Long Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Restarting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Battery Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 335 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Service Correct maintenance is clearly the best way to guarantee vehicle performance and safety features, ensure respect for the environment and low operating costs. NOTE: Also remember that the scrupulous observance of the maintenance procedures is essential for keeping your vehicle operating properly. Not adhering to the "Scheduled Service Plan" can impact your vehicle’s warranty. Interval Running Coupons 7 336 Maserati has therefore provided for a series of checks and maintenance operations involving the 1st service and subsequent when the vehicle reaches mileage/years reported on the "Scheduled Service Plan" in this section. After the last service, maintenance must be restarted with the operations scheduled for the 1st, 2nd and 3rd service. CAUTION! The Scheduled Maintenance services are prescribed by the Manufacturer. Failure to have the services carried out can affect your warranty. The Scheduled Maintenance service is provided by the whole Service Network. In the event that, when a service is performed, further replacements or repairs are found to be necessary in addition to the scheduled operations, these can be carried out only with the specific consent of the Customer. CAUTION! You are advised to notify the Service Network of any minor operating problem, without waiting for the next scheduled service. NOTE: • Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time or short trips without reaching operation temperature. Even the use of the vehicle with extremely hot or cold ambient temperature may make necessary change engine oil more often. • Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed mileage/years reported on the "Scheduled Service Plan" this section. CAUTION! Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle. Scheduled Maintenance (Service) Indicator The service indicator system will remind you the deadline for the maintenance program. The indicator light on the instrument cluster flashes for approx. 5 seconds displaying the message backed by a beeping sound, indicating that the next scheduled maintenance is due or has already overdue. Maintenance and Care NOTE: The service indicator will not monitor the time elapsed from the last scheduled maintenance. When the scheduled maintenance has overdue, the indicator light and message will be displayed on the instrument cluster. The service indicator and message will illuminate approximately from 1000 km (620 mi) or 30 days to the next scheduled maintenance. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. To check the km/mi and the days that remain at the inspiration of the next scheduled maintenance, consult the "Maintenance" submenu of "VEHICLE INFO" main menu (see paragraph "TFT Display : Warning/Indicator Lights of the Set Modes/ Functions” in chapter "Instrument Cluster" of section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for more details). The Service Network will reset the service indicator message after completing the scheduled maintenance operations. Scheduled Service Plan The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this chapter must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions, such as dusty areas, extremely hot or cold ambient temperature and very short trip driving. Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected. Maserati recommends that these maintenance intervals be performed at the Service Network. The technicians at your dealership know your vehicle best, and have access to factoryapproved information, genuine Maserati parts, and specially designed electronic and mechanical tools that can help prevent future costly repairs. 7 337 Maintenance and Care Main Operations/Service Coupons - Gasoline Engines Service coupons Main operations 1° 2° I 5° 6° I I Check with Maserati Diagnosi I I I I I I Engine oil and filter R R R R R R Engine coolant level I I I I I I Engine check for leaks I I I I I I Cooling system connections and lines (check for leaks) I Air filter Belt for alternator, water pump and air conditioning compressor (1) Intercooler check for leaks Brake fluid I R I I I R I R R I I Replace every time the part is removed Spark plugs R R I I I I I I I I I I I I Replace every 2 years Brake system (lines, calipers, connections) - Instrument cluster warning light efficiency - Parking brake operation I I I I I I Tire wear, tire and spare tire (if equipped) pressure check I I I I I I Joints, rods for front and rear suspensions, front and rear under-chassis 338 4° Interval running coupons: every 20000 km (12500 mi) or 2 years (*) Vehicle road test 7 3° I I I Correct operation and reliability of the seats and seat belts I I I I I I Pollen filter R R R R R R Maintenance and Care Service coupons Main operations 1° 2° 3° 4° 5° 6° Interval running coupons: every 20000 km (12500 mi) or 2 years (*) Windshield fluid level - Windshield washer and headlight cleaner I I I I I I Headlight leveling I I I I I I Controls and adjustment systems in general, hinges, doors, engine compartment lid and luggage compartment I I I Condition of the leather interiors I I I (*) Interval running coupons for India, Australia, Morocco, Lebanon and Jordania markets are every 20000 km (12500 mi) or 1 year, and for Chile, Argentina and Brazil markets are every 10000 km (6200 mi) or 1 year. (1) V6 engine feature two belts. One drives the water pump and the air condition compressor. The other belt drives the alternator. I = Inspect and carry out any other necessary operation R = Replace 7 339 Maintenance and Care Main Operations/Service Coupons - Diesel Engine Service coupons Main operations 1° I 4° 5° 6° I I Check with Maserati Diagnosi I I I I I I Emission control I I I I I I Engine oil and filter R R R R R R AdBlue® level I I I I I I Engine coolant level I I I I I I Engine check for leaks I I I I I I Cooling system connections and lines (check for leaks) I I I Air filter R R R R R R Belt for alternator, water pump and air conditioning compressor I I I I R I Replace every time the part is removed Fuel filter Brake fluid R I I R I I R I I Replace every 2 years Brake system (lines, calipers, connections) - Instrument cluster warning light efficiency - Parking brake operation I I I I I I Tire wear, tire and spare tire (if equipped) pressure check I I I I I I Joints, rods for front and rear suspensions, front and rear under-chassis Correct operation and reliability of the seats and seat belts Pollen filter 340 3° Interval running coupons: every 20000 km (12500 mi) or 1 years (*) Vehicle road test 7 2° I I I R I I I R I I I R Maintenance and Care Service coupons Main operations 1° 2° 3° 4° 5° 6° Interval running coupons: every 20000 km (12500 mi) or 1 years (*) Windshield fluid level - Windshield washer I I I I I I Headlight leveling I I I I I I Controls and adjustment systems in general, hinges, doors, engine compartment lid and luggage compartment I I I Condition of the leather interiors I I I (*) Interval running coupons for India, Chile, Brazil and Argentina market vehicles are every 10000 km (6200 mi) or 1 year. I = Inspect and carry out any other necessary operation R = Replace 7 341 Maintenance and Care Periodic Maintenance Every 1000 km (600 mi) or before long journeys Check: • engine coolant; • brake fluid; • windshield washer fluid level; • tire inflation pressure and condition; • operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.); • operation of windshield washer/wiper system and wear of windshield wiper blades. Every 3000 km (1900 mi) Check and top up, if required, the engine oil level. Heavy-Duty Vehicle Use 7 342 If the car is mainly used under one of the following conditions: • off-road; • short, repeated journeys (less than 7-8 km /4-5 mi) at sub-zero outside temperatures; • engine often idling or driving long distances at low speeds or long periods of idleness; you should perform the following inspections more frequently than recommended on the "Scheduled Service Plan": • check front disc brake pad conditions and wear; • check cleanliness of hood and trunk locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage; • visually inspect conditions of: engine, transmission, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes) and rubber elements (boots - sleeves bushes - etc.); • check battery charge; • visually inspect condition of the accessory drive belts; • check and, if necessary, change engine oil and replace oil filter; • check and, if necessary, replace pollen filter of the A/C system; • check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner filter. out any operation on your own and contact a Service Center. CAUTION! All maintenance operations for the vehicle must be carried out by the Service Network. For routine and minor maintenance operations which you can carry out yourself, make sure that you have the necessary experience and always use suitable equipment, original Maserati spare parts (or equivalent) and the prescribed fluids. Shall this not be the case, do not carry This vehicle is equipped with a state of-the-art engine and exhaust system containing a Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) and an SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) catalytic converter integrated into a system which injects a harmless urea solution (reducing agent AdBlue®) into the exhaust gases. When vaporized, it converts smog forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into harmless nitrogen (N2) and water On Board Diagnostic System Your vehicle is equipped with an on board diagnostic system that monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. See "Use of the Engine" in section "Driving" for further details. If any of these systems require service, the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light on the instrument cluster display (refer to "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). Exhaust Gas After-treatment System Strategies (Diesel only) Maintenance and Care vapor (H2O), two natural components of the air we breathe. This system consists of the following components: • AdBlue® tank with pump; • injector with electronically-heated lines; • NOx sensors; • temperature sensors; • SCR catalyst. The engine and exhaust aftertreatment system work together to meet the Emission standards. The system manages engine combustion to allow the exhaust system’s catalytic converter to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants. The AdBlue® injection system reduce nitrogen oxide (NOx) emissions to a minimum so as to meet Euro VI requirements. The injection of AdBlue® and SCR catalyst as well as help to reduce pollution, do not have effect on consumption, performance and driveability. NOTE: • The AdBlue® injection system may sometimes produce a ticking sound, audible when the vehicle stops. This is normal operation. • The pump will run for a period of time after engine shutdown to purge the AdBlue® the injection system. This is normal operation and may be audible from the rear of the vehicle. The control system visualizes messages on the TFT display to alert the driver when regeneration treatment and /or AdBlue® refilling is necessary or when the vehicle shall be taken to the Service Network. Refer to chapter "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information. Spare Parts Use of genuine parts for normal or scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure excellent performance. Damage or failures caused by non-genuine spare parts used for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty. Maintenance Procedures The following pages contain the "required" maintenance standards determined by Maserati engineers. Besides those maintenance items specified in the "Scheduled Service Plan", there are other components which may require service or replacement in the future. To perform most of the services, it is necessary to open the hood (see "Open and Close the Hood" in section "Before Starting"). The following images show the position of all components involved in the maintenance service. CAUTION! • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions address to the Service Network: please be advised that Maserati recommends to address to the Official Service Network. 7 343 Maintenance and Care • Your vehicle has been equipped with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes for washing as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, electric power steering or air conditioning. Such damages are not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only a specific product for the flushing procedure. 7 344 Maintenance and Care Maintenance Service Components – Gasoline Engines V8 – Engine 1. Inspection cover to access the engine oil level dipstick. 2. Engine oil filler neck. 3. Air cleaner filters. 4. Engine coolant expansion reservoir cap. 5. Coolant reservoir cap for transmission cooling system. 6. Washer fluid reservoir cap. 7. Brake fluid reservoir access cover. 8. A/C pollen filter access cover. 9. Integrated power module (fuses). 7 V8 – Engine 345 Maintenance and Care V6 – Engines 1. Engine oil dipstick. 2. Engine oil filler neck. 3. Air cleaner filters. 4. Engine coolant expansion reservoir cap. 5. Coolant reservoir cap for transmission cooling system. 6. Washer fluid reservoir cap. 7. Brake fluid reservoir access cover. 8. A/C pollen filter access cover. 9. Integrated power module (fuses). 7 V6 – Engines 346 Maintenance and Care Maintenance Service Components – Diesel Engine 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Engine oil dipstick. Engine oil filler neck inspection door. Fuel filter. Engine coolant expansion reservoir cap. Washer fluid reservoir cap. Brake fluid reservoir access cover. A/C pollen filter access cover. Integrated power module (fuses). Air cleaner filter. 7 Diesel 347 Maintenance and Care Level Checks ENVIRONMENTAL! • The engine oils and fluids used contain substances that are dangerous for the environment. For replacement you are advised to contact the Service Network, where all the necessary equipment is available to dispose of the used oil and fluids in compliance with the regulations in force and in an environment-friendly manner. • All equipment used for fluids replacement (gloves, cloths, containers, etc) must be disposed of in compliance with the regulations in force. 7 348 Engine Coolant Level Check - Gasoline Engines Your vehicle has been equipped with an improved engine coolant (antifreeze) that offers high protection against corrosion, freezing and allows extended maintenance intervals. To prevent reducing extended maintenance periods, it is important to use original engine coolant (antifreeze) when adding coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze) use pure water only such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of impure water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. • Mix a minimum solution of 50% engine coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (do not exceed 70%) if temperatures below −37°C (−35°F) are forecasted. Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the circulation area of the vehicle. The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method to determine that the coolant level is adequate. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle only needs to be checked once a month. With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle and inside the filler neck. Gasoline Gasoline • When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle after removing the cap. Do not overfill. • Once the desired level is reached, firmly close cap of the bottle. • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, or if the level in the coolant recovery Maintenance and Care bottle does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks by a Service Center. • Keep the front of the radiator and the condenser clean. WARNING! • Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is hot. Do not loosen or remove the cap of the engine coolant bottle to cool a hot engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. • When adding coolant do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. Engine Coolant Level Check - Diesel Engine Your vehicle has been equipped with an improved engine coolant (antifreeze) that offers high protection against corrosion, freezing and allows extended maintenance intervals. To prevent reducing extended maintenance periods, it is important to use original engine coolant (antifreeze) when adding coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze) use pure water only such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of impure water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. • Mix a minimum solution of 50% engine coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (do not exceed 70%) if temperatures below −37°C (−35°F) are forecasted. Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the circulation area of the vehicle. The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method to determine that the coolant level is adequate. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle only needs to be checked once a month. With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle on the right side of the engine compartment should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle and inside the filler neck. Diesel Diesel 7 • When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle after removing the cap. Do not overfill. • Once the desired level is reached, firmly close cap of the bottle. 349 Maintenance and Care • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks by a Service Center. • Keep the front of the radiator and the condenser clean. 7 WARNING! • Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is hot. Do not loosen or remove the cap of the engine coolant bottle to cool a hot engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. • When adding coolant do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level immediately if the brake system warning light and the related message turn on indicating a low level of brake fluid. • Remove the brakes fluid reservoir access cover. 350 level may be caused by a leak and a requires accurate checkup of the braking system. • Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. • Add fluid to bring the level up to the "MAX" mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir. Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid (see "Refillings" in section "Features and Specifications"). • Once the correct level is reached, firmly close the cap. The brake pads wear could cause the fluid level to fall. However, low fluid CAUTION! The symbol on the tank cap identifies the synthetic type of brake fluid, distinguishing it from the mineral type. Using mineral fluids damages the special rubber linings of the brake system irreparably. WARNING! • To avoid contamination from foreign materials or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in an open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in an accident. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl Maintenance and Care surfaces, make sure it does not spill over these surfaces. • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in an accident. Adding Windshield Washer Fluid The reservoir on the left side of the engine compartment contains the fluid to wash the windshield. During scheduled services or when the message of low level of the washer fluid appears together with the related telltale add more fluid as soon as possible. The fluid reservoir may contain nearly 3,5 litres (0.77 UK gal) of washer fluid. • Remove the reservoir cap in the engine compartment and lift the filler neck. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers. NOTE: The Service Network can provide you with information about the "Maserati recommended Windshield Washer Fluid" with antifreeze, available in the "Genuine Accessories" range. WARNING! • Commercially available windshield • Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (refer to "Refillings" in section "Features and Specifications") and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water. • When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance. washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or when working around the windshield washer system. • Do not drive with the windshield washer reservoir empty: the action of the washer is essential for improving visibility when driving. 7 Engine Oil Level Check - Gasoline Engines To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle's engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. If the warning light illuminates and 351 Maintenance and Care the related message of low oil level displays, or during scheduled services (see "Scheduled Maintenance Service" in this section) it is necessary to check the engine oil level. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. In both cases the vehicle should be parked on level ground to improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. V8 – Engine V6 – Engines • Remove the dipstick and clean it with a dry and clean cloth. • Re-insert the dipstick completely and remove: the oil level should maintain between the MIN and MAX reference ranges (SAFE range). CAUTION! • Do not top up with oil with different 7 characteristics than the engine one (refer to "Refillings" in section "Features and Specifications"). • Overfilling or underfilling the sump will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. • Do not add any supplemental materials to the engine oil, other than leak detection dyes. Engine oil is an engineered product, and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. • Remove the inspection cover on the right engine bank (V8 – Engine). 352 V8 – Engine • If a refilling is necessary: unscrew the filler neck cap. Maintenance and Care fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. In both cases the vehicle should be parked on level ground to improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. CAUTION! • Do not top up with oil with different • Adding 1.4 Litres/0.30 UK gal (V8 – Engine) or 1 Litre/0.22 UK gal (V6 – Engines) of oil when the level is at the bottom of the Safe range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE range. • Return the cap and dipstick to their position and wait for a few minutes to allow the oil to reach the sump. • Check the level again. Engine Oil Level Check - Diesel Engine To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle's engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Every 3000 km (1900 mi), or more often in case of heavy-duty use of the car, and during scheduled services (see “Scheduled Maintenance Service” in this section) it is necessary to check the engine oil level. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a characteristics than the engine one (refer to "Refillings" in section "Features and Specifications"). • Overfilling or underfilling the sump will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. • Do not add any supplemental materials to the engine oil, other than leak detection dyes. Engine oil is an engineered product, and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. • Re-insert the dipstick completely and remove: the oil level should maintain between the MIN and MAX reference ranges (SAFE range). • Remove the dipstick and clean it with a dry and clean cloth. 7 • If a refilling is necessary: open the inspection door and unscrew the filler neck cap. 353 Maintenance and Care Automatic Transmission Oil Check Contact the Service Network for the oil level check. • Adding 1 Litre (0.22 UK gal) of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE range. • Return the cap and dipstick to their position and wait for a few minutes to allow the oil to reach the sump. • Check the level again. • Close the inspection door. 7 Engine Oil Filter Replacement The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every oil change. Contact the Service Network to perform this service. Fuel Filter Service (Diesel only) Contact the Service Network to perform this service. DPF Filter Replacement (Diesel only) Contact the Service Network to perform this service. 354 Fluid Level Check for Transmission Cooling System (Gasoline only) The coolant contained in the bottle of this system is equal to the one used for the cooling system of the engine. For the preparation of the mixture of water and antifreeze and for the control of the level, proceed as shown in the "Engine Coolant Level Check" of this chapter. The filter is located under the hood in the external A/C system air inlet, on the passenger side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. To replace the filter during the scheduled maintenance services or after the vehicle has been heavily used on dusty roads, proceed as follows: • Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips indicated. • Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover. Engine Air Filters Replacement Contact the Service Network to have the air filters replaced. A/C Air Filter Replacement This filter performs mechanic/ electrostatic air filtering, provided that windows and doors are perfectly closed. Maintenance and Care CAUTION! Failure to replace the filter may considerably reduce the air conditioning and heating system efficiency. Windshield Wiper Maintenance and Blades Replacement • Remove the used filter slipping it off from within the air intake. • Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this). • Close the filter access cover and reinstall the access door. When the wiper arms are in rest position it is not possible to check or replace the blades as they remain under the hood. To service the blades it is necessary to move the wiper arms in "Service" position (see chapter "Windshield Wipers and Washers" in section "Understanding the Vehicle"). In this way it is possible to turn and lift the arms for the desired intervention. WARNING! It is dangerous to operate or service the wiper blades with the wipers in an active position (different than "OFF") and with the ignition switch in the RUN position. The rain sensors may suddenly activate the wipers. Always use the "Service" position for any intervention on the wipers blades. Windshield Wiper Maintenance Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on the geographical area’s weather conditions where the car is used and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace if necessary. Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film. Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. Spray nozzles If the jet does not work, first check that there is fluid in the pan (see paragraph "Level checks" in this section) then check that the nozzles are not clogged. 7 Blades Replacement • Move the wiper arms into "Service" position (see chapter "Windshield 355 Maintenance and Care Wipers and Washers" in section "Understanding the Vehicle") and lift them. • Press the indicated button, slip off the blade support from the arm and replace it. 7 • Return the blade to its original position on the windscreen. • Turn the multifunction lever to one of the automatic settings (see chapter "Windshield Wipers and Washers" in section "Understanding the Vehicle") and move the ignition switch to the RUN position: the wiper arms will return to the resting position. NOTE: Due to the difficulty of this operation, we recommend that you contact the Service Network for replacement of the blades. 356 Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, boot lid and hood, sliding parts of power sunroof (if foreseen) and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease. This action is essential to preserve the original operation of these components and to protect them against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing maintenance in the engine compartment, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. The coupling pin of the lock on the rear driver pillar should be lubricated at least twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of high quality lubricant directly on the bolt. Maintenance-Free Battery This vehicle is equipped with a sealed type maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or damage the eyes. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean with the face over a battery. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling the battery. • The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be Maintenance and Care • If the battery needs to be removed replaced with a component of the same type (vented). from its compartment, you must first detach the terminal clamp to the negative post (–) and then the other terminal clamp to the positive post (+), after removing the protective cover. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (–) and are identified on the battery case. NOTE: Remote battery terminals for start are located in the engine compartment for jump starting to be used with an auxiliary battery or a battery from another vehicle (see "Auxiliary JumpStart Procedure" chapter in section "In Emergencies"). To Disconnect the Battery The battery is fitted on the inner right side of the boot compartment. To access the battery it is necessary to lift the ground coverage of the boot compartment and remove the access cover as indicated. CAUTION! • Before disconnecting the battery, open the boot lid and lower the windows a few centimeters, to avoid damaging the seal when opening and closing the door. When the battery is connected, this operation is performed automatically when the door is opened and closed. The boot lid must remain open and the windows lowered until the charged battery is reconnected. • Never disconnect the battery from the electrical system when the engine is running. • To temporarily disconnect the vehicle electrical system from the battery, simply remove the cable end with quick coupling from to the negative post (–) of the battery. 7 357 Maintenance and Care To Reconnect the Battery NOTE: When the battery cables have been disconnected and the boot lid has been locked, it is necessary to pull the emergency release lever in order to re-open it. To access the boot and operate the emergency release fold the rear seatback (see "Cargo Area" chapter in section "Understanding the Vehicle"). CAUTION! • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is precisely attached to the positive post (+) and the negative cable is attached to the negative post (–). • Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. 7 358 After the battery has been disconnected and re-connected and before starting the engine it is necessary to proceed as follows: • Unlock and lock the doors using the Key fob RKE Transmitter. • Close manually the boot lid, unlock it with the key fob RKE transmitter and then lock it manually on more time. If the vehicle is equipped with Power Boot Lid/Hand Free, manually perform the complete closure. Then move the lid automatically, using the buttons on the lid itself, performing a complete cycle of opening and closing. If the limit of maximum power boot lid opening has been set, it is necessary to reset it (see “Open and Close the Boot Lid” in section “Before Starting”). • Initialise the climate control system by activating the system and pressing the "AUTO" control as described in chapter "Air Conditioning Controls" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls". • Turn on the MTC+ and set the date and time (see "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). • Lift, release and lift again the lever located behind the shift lever to inizialize the electric parking brake. • In this way the warning light on the instrument cluster will turn off. • For correct activation of the approach lights on the external mirrors, press at least once the tilt button on the driver's door panel so that the door mode recognizes the mirrors position. • If the car is equipped with power sunshades on rear door windows, carry out the teach-in cycle described on chapter "Power Sunshades on Rear Door Windows" in section "Before Starting". • Start the engine and perform the end-stop learning of EPS, steering fully to the left and then to the right. The EPS failure warning light and message should disappear on the TFT display CAUTION! • Every time the battery is reconnected, wait at least 30 seconds with the ignition switch turned to RUN before starting the engine, in order to allow the electronic system that manages the motor-driven throttles to run a self-learning cycle. At the same time, you can run the date and time set up procedure for the MTC+. • Every time the battery is reconnected the warning lights and flash for about 10 seconds and then go off. Useful Advice to Extend Battery Life When parking the vehicle, make sure that the doors, front, rear lids and flaps are properly closed. All interior lights should be off. Maintenance and Care When the engine is turned off, do not keep the connected devices switched on for a long time (such as radio, hazard warning lights, fan, etc.). CAUTION! If the battery charge remains below 50% for a long period of time, it will be damaged due to sulfation; its performance and starting power will be reduced and it will be more subject to freezing (this can happen even at -10°C/14°F). We recommend you to have the battery charge condition checked, preferably at the beginning of the cold season, to prevent the electrolyte from freezing. This check should be carried out more frequently if the vehicle is used mainly for short trips or if it is equipped with power absorbing devices that remain permanently on even when the ignition switch is off. This applies above all if these devices have been retrofitted ("Aftermarket" services). If the vehicle is not used for long periods of time, please see "Vehicle Stored for Long Periods" in this section Battery Recharge WARNING! The process of charging or recharging the battery produces hydrogen, a flammable gas that can explode and cause serious injuries. When charging or recharging the battery, follow the recommended precautions at all times. • Before using a charger device always check that this tool is suitable for the installed battery, with constant voltage (lower than 14.8 V) and low amperage (maximum limit 15 A). • Recharge the battery in a wellventilated environment. • Never charge or recharge a frozen battery: it can explode due to hydrogen trapped inside the ice crystals. • Ensure that any sparks or open flames are kept well away from the battery while it is charging. • Before using a charger to charge or maintain the battery charge status, carefully follow the instructions provided to ensure the charger is connected to the battery safely and correctly. Is possible to recharge the battery without disconnecting the cables of the vehicle electrical system. • To access the battery lift the ground coverage of the boot compartment and remove the access cover as previously shown (see paragraph "To Disconnect the Battery" in this chapter). • Remove the protection cover and connect the terminal clamp of the charger positive cable (typically in red) to the positive post (+) of the battery. • Connect the terminal clamp of the charger negative cable (typically in black) to the nut located by the negative post (-) on the battery, indicated in the picture. 7 The vehicle is equipped with a IBS (Intelligent Battery Sensor) sensor able to measure charging and discharging currents and to calculate the state of charge and state of health of the battery. This sensor is located in 359 Maintenance and Care correspondence with the negative post (-) of the battery. For a successful charge/recharge operation, the charging current must flow through the IBS sensor as shown in the picture. 7 360 • Turn the charger on and follow the instructions on its user manual to completely recharge the battery. • When the battery is recharged, turn off the battery charger before disconnecting it from the battery. • Disconnect first the terminal clamp of the charger black cable from the battery and then the terminal clamp of the red cable. • Reassemble the protection cover on the battery positive post and the access cover on the battery room. Fuse Replacement Used Fuses Characteristics inside the cover of the rear power distribution center. When an electrical device is not functioning, check that the corresponding fuse is in proper working order (intact). A Fuse intact B Fuse blown The colour identifies the value of the fuses in amperes which is also reported on them. The table shows the match between colour and amperage of mini and maxi fuses. On the vehicle are mainly used with mini-and maxi-fuses with blade engagement. Besides these there are other types of the fuse provided with holes for fixing to the cable connection terminals. For the replacement of these fuses contact the Service Network. Replace the faulty fuse with a new one featuring the same rating, by using appropriate forceps added in the integrated power module and Type Mini Fuse Maxi Fuse Beige - 5 Yellow - 20 Brown - 7,5 Green - 30 Red - 10 Orange - 40 Blue - 15 Red - 50 Yellow - 20 Blue - 60 White - 25 Green - 30 Maintenance and Care CAUTION! • Never replace a blown fuse with anything other than a new and suitable fuse (same rating). • After replacing a fuse, if the fault recurs, contact the Service Network. Position of Fuses The fuses are located in three parts of the vehicle, namely: • inside the integrated power module, on the right hand side of the engine compartment; • on the fuse and relay box located in a covered area, behind the glove compartment on the dashboard left side. Integrated Power Module • inside the rear power distribution center, behind the battery, on the right hand side of the boot compartment; • To access the module it is necessary to lift the hood (see “Open and Close the Hood” in section "Before Starting"). • To access the fuses remove the module cover unhooking the lateral locks as shown in the picture. To recognize the reference number of the fuses in the table below, see the diagram inside the cover just removed. 7 361 Maintenance and Care The table points out the position as featured in the cover, the type and function of the fuses included in the integrated power module. CAUTION! • After replacement, refit the protective cover of the module. • If you need to wash the engine compartment, do not direct the water for too long directly on the module. Ref. 2 3 7 4 5 6 362 Type Maxi – 50A Maxi – 40A Function Secondary air pump relay input (V8 Gasoline only) PTC heater 1 relay input (Diesel only) Maxi – 30A Starter motor relay input Maxi – 40A ABS-ESP pump feed Maxi – 30A AWD module (AWD version only) Ref. Type Ref. Type Function 7 Maxi – 40A PTC heater 2 relay input (Diesel only) 16 Mini – 10A Enable cooling fan relay input (Diesel only) 8 Maxi – 40A ABS-ESP valve feed 18 Maxi – 40A PTC heater 3 relay input (Diesel only) 9 Mini – 25A Urea (AdBlue) system (Diesel only) 19 – 10 – – 20 Maxi – 30A 11 Mini – 20A Horn relay input 21 – – 22 – – 12 Mini – 10A AC compressor feed relay input 23 Maxi – 40A 13 – Fuel heater supply (Diesel only) 14 Mini – 7,5A Alarm siren 24 Maxi – 50A 15 Mini – 10A Washer heated nozzles relay input Glow plug heater unit (Diesel only) 28 Mini – 7,5A Drive Assist System Module (DASM) 29 Mini – 10A PCM module - Starter solenoid relay coil 30 Mini – 5A ORC- Air bag module 16 Mini – 10A Function – Enable cooling fan relay input and enable cooling oil pump relay input (Gasoline only) – Wiper motor relay output Maintenance and Care Ref. Type 31 Mini – 5A ABS-ESP module Mini – 5A SSCU, AWD module (AWD version only), EPS and AQS 32 33 Mini – 10A HDLP Headlights AFLS Mini – 15A Primary load to engine harness LH side (Gasoline only) Mini – 30A Primary load to engine harness (Diesel only) Mini – 15A Primary load to engine harness RH side (Gasoline only) 34 35 Function PCM module primary load (Gasoline only) 36 Mini – 30A PCM module primary load, glow plug control unit (Diesel only) Ref. Type Function Ref. Type 37 Mini – 15A Engine secondary load (Gasoline only) 53 Mini – 10A Mini – 15A Lambda sensor (Gasoline only) Mini – 7,5A Urea (AdBlue) pump (Diesel only) 39 Mini – 7,5A Flow meters, tank lackage, canister, exhaust by-pass valve relay coil and air shutter 48 – 49 Mini – 10A Pedal brake switch - TCM module 50 Mini – 15A +30 PCM module 38 51 52 Function AWD module (AWD version only) Rear Power Distribution Center • To access the center it is necessary to lift the ground coverage of the boot compartment and remove the access cover (refer "MaintenanceFree Battery" in this section). • To access the fuses release the cover latch shown in picture. – Mini – 30A Fuel pump relay input Mini – 5A Starter solenoid signal for PCM and voltage stabilizer 7 • Press the release latch and lift the lid from this side. • Push the lid toward the right side to release the indicated latches on the unit. To recognize the reference number of the fuses in the table below, see the diagram inside the cover just removed. 363 Maintenance and Care Ref. Type 6 Maxi – 20A 7 8 9 10 Ref. Type Sunroof module 17 Maxi – 30A Rear LH door module Maxi – 30A Driver door module 18 Maxi – 30A Rear RH door module Maxi – 30A Passenger door module 19 – Maxi – 40A Start&Stop: voltage stabilizer, dashboard Maxi – 40A Start&Stop: voltage stabilizer, body Maxi – 40A "High Premium" stereo amplifier unit 11 7 364 The table points out the position as featured in the cover, the type and function of the fuses on the rear area distribution control unit. Ref. Type Function 2 Maxi – 40A BCM module 3 Maxi – 40A BCM module 4 Maxi – 30A BCM module 5 Maxi – 30A BCM module 15 16 Function Maxi – 20A "Premium" stereo amplifier unit (1) Maxi – 40A HVAC front blower relay coil Maxi – 40A Rear window defrost relay coil (HVAC module) Function – Maxi – 20A "Premium" stereo amplifier unit (2) 21 Maxi – 40A Urea (AdBlue) heater control unit (Diesel only) 22 Mini – 7,5A Rear HVAC module 23 Mini – 10A Fuel door relay and RF Hub module 24 Mini – 10A ITM module, ceiling light unit (front and rear), rain/lights sensor 25 Mini – 20A Inverter 26 Mini – 20A Motor sound system (Diesel only) 20 Maintenance and Care Ref. Type 27 Mini – 20A LH rear seat movement 31 Mini – 25A LH front seat movement 32 – – 33 Mini – 20A 34 35 36 Function Ref. Type Ref. Type Function 41 – – 56 Mini – 7,5A Blower front HVAC coil relay 42 – – 43 Mini – 20A Seat passenger heater module 57 Mini – 7,5A Blower rear HVAC coil relay 44 – – 58 – RH rear seat movement 45 – – Mini – 20A Soft Door Close latch 46 Mini – 5A Rear camera 47 Mini – 5A Navtrak Mini – 20A Rear doors sunshade 48 Mini – 5A Surround view 49 Mini – 10A Internal temperature sensor, umidity sensor, internal mirror and HALF Mini – 10A Transmission lever, TPMS module, Navtrak, USB/AUX and charger, ASBM control suspension and Hands Free access module 50 – 51 Mini – 25A Rear seat and steering wheel heater module Mini – 10A 60 Mini – 10A SDC module 61 Mini – 25A Front console power outlet and cigar lighter 62 Mini – 7,5A Front HVAC module 63 Mini – 20A Blower rear HVAC 64 Mini – 10A Wi-fi, rear HVAC module 53 Mini – 25A Rear seat vented module 65 Mini – 10A Intelligent battery sensor Blind Spot module 66 Mini – 10A Wi-fi, RSE 67 Mini – 7,5A USB charge outlet, sunroof Mini – 25A 38 Mini – 25A RH front seat movement 54 Mini – 7,5A Boot power outlet 55 – – 59 SDC module, transmission lever, ASBM, rear tunnel stack switch – 37 Maxi – 20A – – 52 Power liftgate/boot lid module 40 Function – 7 365 Maintenance and Care Ref. 68 69 Type Function Mini – 20A Power outlet on central console rear side Mini – 25A Rear console power outlet and cigar lighter Front HVAC module, Parking Aid Module (PAM), ASCM 70 7 Mini – 10A Front HVAC module, Parking Aid Module (PAM), ASCM and ELDOR coil (V8 - Gasoline only) Fuse Box under the Dashboard This box is located in an internal area that can be accessed only by removing the glove compartment on the dashboard left side. Considering the complexity of this operation, we recommend having the fuses replaced by the Service Network. 366 The table points out the position as featured in the figure, the type and function of the fuses in the box under the dashboard. Ref. Type Function 1 Mini – 7,5A Cluster module, USB charger, CSS, SGW and DSRC (Japan version only) 2 Mini – 15A Cluster module, clock 3 Mini – 10A DSRC and DTV system (Japan version only) 4 Mini – 5A E-call 5 Mini – 7,5A Security Gateway 6 Mini – 25A Radio Mini – 10A Column software module, CSS, USB auxiliary port Mini – 10A Start & Stop switch, diagnostic outlet 7 8 Maintenance and Care Bulb Replacement The signal failure of an external light (turn signal, low beam and high beam, number plate light, reverse light and brake light) is communicated to the instrument cluster that displays on the TFT screen in a graphical form and with a text message which light is faulty (see example in the figure). Front Headlights The lights are arranged as follows: 1 Low-beam/high-beam LED. 1 Position light guide LED. 2 Position and DRL light LED. 2 Stop light LED. 3 Direction indicator LED. 3 Side-marker LED. 4 Side-marker light LED. 4 Direction indicator LED. 5 Side reflex-reflector. 5 Reverse LED. 6 Bending light LED. 6 Reflectors. 7 Rear fog LED. CAUTION! It is not possible replace a single LED of the headlight cluster, we recommend that you contact the Service Network for the replacement of the entire cluster. Tail-Light Clusters Light Bulbs The lights of the rear clusters are arranged as follows: CAUTION! It is not possible replace a single LED of the tail-light cluster, we recommend that you contact the Service Network for the replacement of the entire cluster. 7 Light Clusters Bulbs Replacement All lights of front and rear clusters and those integrated in the exterior 367 Maintenance and Care mirrors are LED powered and cannot be replaced individually. Contact the Service Network to locate the correct parts and replace them. Number Plate Lights To replace the number plate light bulb (C 5W): • use a screwdriver positioned at the indicated point to lever out the light fixing frame; Interior Lights • Raise the lens cover. Lamps inside the glove box compartments of the dashboard and on the sun visors are LED powered and cannot be replaced by the owner. Contact the Service Network to replace them. Boot Compartment Light 7 368 • replace the pressure-fitted bulb; • refit the bulb holder inserting first the electrical connector side and then pressing on the other side to hook up the clip. To replace the bulbs (W5W) inside the boot compartment, proceed as follows after boot lid opening. • Remove the light fixing frame by levering it out gently at the indicated point with a screwdriver. • Replace the pressure-fitted bulb. • Refit the lens cover, inserting first the electrical connector side and then pressing on the other side. Maintenance and Care A/C System Maintenance For best performances, the air conditioning system should be checked and serviced by the Service Network at the beginning of the warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. During the winter, the air conditioning system should be operated at least once a month for about 10 minutes. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. WARNING! Use only refrigerants and • compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some refrigerants are flammable and can explode, causing injuries. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. Periodically remove any leaves and insects that may build up and obstruct the inlet of external air in the air conditioning system through the grille present underneath the rear part of the hood. To access the grille, lift the hood as described in "Open and Close the Hood" in section "Before Starting". 7 369 Maintenance and Care Wheels Maintenance Tires Maintenance CAUTION! To obtain the best performances and the longest mileage from the tires, take following precautions during the first 500 km (310 mi): • do not drive at the vehicle’s maximum speed; • drive at low speed on curves; • avoid sudden steering; • avoid sudden braking; • avoid sudden acceleration; • do not drive at high speeds for too long. 7 370 The tires inflation pressure must correspond to the prescribed values (see the chapter "Tire Inflation Pressure" in section "Features and Specifications") and should be checked only when the tires have cooled down. In fact, the pressure increases as the tire temperature progressively increases. Never reduce the pressure if tires are hot (see "Tires – General Information" chapter in section "Driving"). Insufficient tire inflating pressure can cause tire overheating and possible internal damage, which may even lead to the tire destruction. WARNING! • Check the inflating pressure of the CAUTION! After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage it. Impacts with curbs, holes, and obstacles in the road, and prolonged trips on rough roads can cause tire damage which may not be visible to the naked eye. Check your tires regularly for any signs of damage (e.g. scratches, cuts, cracks, bulges, etc.). If sharp objects penetrate the tires, they can cause structural damage which is only visible when the tire is removed. In any case, any possible damage must be inspected by an experienced tire fitter, as it may seriously reduce the tire life. Remember that tires deteriorate with time, even if used little or not at all. Cracks in the tire tread and sides, alongside possible bulging, are a sign of deterioration. • • • • • tires when cold, at least every two weeks and before long trips. Have the old tires inspected by an experienced technician, to make sure they can still be used safely. If the same tire has been on your vehicle for 4 or 5 years, have it inspected anyway by an experienced technician. Never fit tires of uncertain origin. "Directional" tires have an arrow on their side showing the rolling direction. To keep the best performance when replacing a tire, make sure that the rolling direction corresponds to the one shown by the arrow. During the tire life, the rolling direction used for the first fitting shall always be observed, also in case of "nondirectional" tires. Check the depth of the tire tread at regular intervals. The minimum allowed value is 1.6 mm (0.06 in) at that point the wear indicators on the tire will be visible (see “Tires – General Information” in section Maintenance and Care “Driving”). The thinner is the tread, the greater is the risk of skidding. • Drive carefully on wet roads to decrease the risk of aquaplaning. Winter Tires These tires are specially designed for driving on snow and ice and are fitted to replace the ones supplied with the vehicle. The features of these tires are significantly reduced in winter when tread depth is less than 4 mm (0.157 in). In this case, they should be replaced. The specific features of the winter tires lead to lower performance under normal environmental conditions or on long highway trips, compared to the standard tires. Therefore, their use should be limited to the situations and performance for which they have been type-approved. The Service Network can provide all necessary information about fitting winter tires on the vehicle. NOTE: • We recommend fitting winter tires on the vehicle at temperatures 7 °C (45 °F) since the driving performance of summer tires is reduced at low temperatures. Summer tires may be permanently damaged at extremely low temperatures. • Comply with all state and local laws governing snow tire and tread depth requirements. Bodywork Maintenance and Care Wheel Rims Maintenance The main causes of corrosion are: • atmospheric pollution; • salinity and humidity in the atmosphere (marine areas or a damp climate); • seasonal environmental conditions; • salt scattered on the roadbed to melt ice and snow. The abrasive action of wind-carried atmospheric dust and sand, mud and stones should not be underestimated. On this vehicle, Maserati has adopted the best technological solutions to protect the bodywork from corrosion. The main measures are: • paint products and systems that give the vehicle particular resistance to corrosion and abrasion; • use of galvanized (or pre-treated) metal sheets which are highly resistant to corrosion in the most exposed parts; • spraying of the underbody, engine compartment, insides of wheel housings, and other structures with wax products having high protective power; All wheel rims should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water. To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use a nonabrasive, nonacidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner that may involve and damage the brake calipers. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel rim protective finish. Protection from Atmospheric Agents 7 371 Maintenance and Care • spraying of plastic materials, with a protective function, in the most exposed points: underneath the doors, inside part of the mud guards, edges, etc.; • use of ventilated box sections, coated with protective wax products, to avoid condensation and trapped water which could encourage the formation of internal rust. Useful Advice to Keep the Bodywork in Good Condition 7 Paint The paintwork does not only have an aesthetic function but also protects the underlying metal sheets. In the event of abrasions or deep scratches, we recommend to have the necessary touch-ups made immediately, to avoid any rust formation. Touch-ups do not feature particular difficulties, even on metallic and matte finishes. For all paint touch-ups, use only original products indicated on the plate applied on the lower left side of the hood. It is recommended to use water-based products and neutral surfactants. Normal paint maintenance consists in washing, the frequency of which depends on the conditions of use and of the environment. For example, if driving the vehicle in areas where there is high atmospheric pollution or the roads are spread with anti-freeze salt, it is advisable to wash the vehicle more frequently. ENVIRONMENTAL! Detergents pollute water. Therefore the vehicle should be washed in areas equipped for the collection and purification of the fluids used for washing. NOTE: The use of alcohol-based products for cleaning the metal plates in the engine compartment and/or the boot may deteriorate the painted surface. 372 Car Wash For correct washing: • wet the bodywork with a low pressure water jet; • pass a sponge with a light detergent solution over the bodywork, frequently rinsing the sponge; • rinse well with water and dry with an air jet or chamois leather. When drying, take particular care with the parts that are less visible, such as the door and lid bays, headlight edges, in which water can be trapped more easily. You are recommended not to take the vehicle immediately into an enclosed environment, but leave it in the open air so as to allow the water to evaporate. Do not wash the vehicle after it has been left in the sun or when the hood is hot: the paint gloss could be affected. External plastic parts must be cleaned with the same procedure followed for the normal washing of the bodywork. Avoid, as far as possible, parking the vehicle under trees; the resinous substances that very often drop Maintenance and Care from the trees give the paint a dull appearance and increase the possibility of originating corrosive processes. It is important that the drain holes in the lower sides of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk bottom be kept clear and open. CAUTION! • Bird droppings must be washed off immediately and thoroughly, since their acidity is particularly corrosive. • To provide better protection for the paint, polish the vehicle at intervals with a suitable product leaving a protective film on the paint. • If the vehicle is washed using highpressure water jets or cleaners, it is important that the nozzle of the jet be kept at a distance of at least 40 cm (16 in) from the bodywork to avoid damaging it. Washing Vehicles with Matte Finish Paint • It is recommended to hand wash vehicles with matte-finish paint. • Before washing, first remove from the bodywork dust and other particles that could damage the paint. Preferably use an air pressure jet. • When grease spots and fingerprints are present, it is recommended using a special cleaner for matte finish paint. Apply the product using a microfiber cloth. To avoid damaging the paint surface, do not use too much pressure. • Wet the bodywork with plenty of water and clean it using a soft sponge and a neutral wax-free shampoo, starting from the top and working down. Dry the bodywork using an air pressure jet. • Rinse all the parts of the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of water. Keep the sponge or the washing mitt in use always wet and clean. • At last, using a different sponge or washing mitt, clean the wheels, the door sill plates and the other parts that are less visible. CAUTION! • It is recommended not to wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. The little drops of water, acting as small focal lenses, could damage the paint. • Always and only wash the vehicle by hand. Avoid using abrasive sponges or mitts that could damage the matte finish paint. • Never polish and never use polishing agents on the vehicle with matte finish paint or on parts of it. • Hard water (over 30 °f) could leave limestone residues. Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. 7 373 Maintenance and Care To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. 7 Condensation and Fogging on the Light Clusters With cold or humid climate, after a driving rain or after cleaning the car, the surface of the front and rear light clusters could fog and/or form condensate drops on the inside. This is a natural phenomenon due to the temperature and humidity difference between the lens internal and external surface, which nevertheless does not indicate a fault and does not compromise the regular operation of the lights. The fogging/condensate disappear when switching on the lights, starting from the centre of the diffuser and going gradually to the edges. Mouldings and Aluminium Trim • For cleaning mouldings and aluminium trim, avoid the use of acidic or alkanline cleaning agents 374 that can destroy the protecting surface treatment. • After washing aluminium trim with warm water, apply the cleaning agent with a clean tissue or a soft sponge on the surface. Do not use any other equipment such as brushes, steel wool, abrasives or any other equipment for cleaning. • After cleaning, please rinse the aluminium trim with a lot of clear water. • While cleaning in the car wash please make sure that the mouldings and aluminium trim only gets contact with soft brushes or textiles. Engine Compartment At the end of each winter season, carefully wash the engine compartment, remembering to avoid directing the jet of water for too long on the electric parts. To perform this operation, you must contact the Service Network. "Car Wash" Mode (if equipped) To move the vehicle in tunnel washers, or generally move with engine off, you can use the following mode. • Vehicle must be on level ground, stationary or moving up to 1 km/h (0.6 mph). • If enabled, disable the automatic engagement function of electric parking brake (see "Parking Brake" in section "Driving"). • Shift the gearshift lever to N (Neutral). • The brake pedal can be pressed or not pressed. • Turn the engine off by pressing the START/STOP button for 5 seconds. Through these steps, the driver's door must be closed. This condition will persists for about 25 minutes, the shift lever will switch to P (Park) once time has expired. In case of low-battery voltage the shift lever can be placed in P (Park) before this time has expired. NOTE: It is also appropriate to disable the "Passive Entry" function from the MTC+ System so that the "Pre-Short Drop" function will not be activated. This can prevent water from entering in the passenger compartment during car washing. Maintenance and Care WARNING! • Performed this procedure the vehicle will stay in N (Neutral), rather without any brake. To avoid accidental movement, always check that the movement of the vehicle take place only on a flat surface. • DO NOT USE this mode to haul the vehicle because after a period of time the shift lever will be placed automatically in P (Park) position. If this occurs when the vehicle is moving the transmission can be damaged. To haul the vehicle use the emergency manual park release (see "Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position" in section "In an Emergency"). Pre-Short Drop Function When in a car washing, if the driver keeps the RKE Transmitter in his/her pocket, or in any place outside the vehicle within 1 m (3.3 ft) distance, the front windows will perform a pre-short drop. This is a shorter drop compared to the normal short drop performed by the "Passive Entry" function when you grab the door handle to enter the vehicle. In order to prevent water from entering the vehicle between the upper edge of the glass window and the door outline on the bodywork, while the car is being washed, it is advisable to disable the "Passive Entry" from the MTC+ System, for further information refer to chapter "MTC+ Settings" in section "Dashboard Instruments and controls". When deactivating the "Passive Entry", also the "Pre-Short Drop" function will be disabled. Interior Maintenance and Care Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth. Do not use harsh cleaners. The leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils stains can be removed easily with a soft cloth and appropriate products. Avoid soaking the leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition. Check at regular intervals that there is no water trapped under the mats (due to drips off shoes, umbrellas etc.) which may cause the metal parts to oxidize. 7 375 Maintenance and Care CAUTION! Do not use alcohol, petrol or solvents to clean the instrument cluster's transparent dome, the MTC+ display, the analogue clock and the leather upholstery. We recommended the use of "Car Care" products approved by Maserati for the maintenance and care of the interior. Leather Upholstery Treatment Have the leather upholstery only treated, as provided in the Scheduled Service Plan, by the Service Network which has the required specific products. Parts in Premium Quality Wood Remove any dirt with a buckskin leather or damp cloth. 7 NOTE: The Service Network can provide you with any information about the Maserati approved "Car Care" products, available in the "Genuine Accessories" range. MTC+ Touch Screen • Do NOT attach any object to the touch screen, doing so can result in damage to the touch screen. 376 • Do not touch the screen with any hard or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.) which could scratch the touch screen surface. • Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry micro fiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the touch screen. If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol, or an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent manufacturer’s precautions and directions. Vehicle Stored for Long Periods If the vehicle is going to be stored for over a month, follow the below precautions: • Wash and dry the vehicle thoroughly. • Store the vehicle in a covered, dry and, if possible, ventilated area. • Select P (Park) and turn off the engine. • Disconnect the battery (refer "Maintenance-Free Battery" in this section) or connect a battery charger (refer to paragraph "Maintaining Battery Charge" of chapter "Battery Statement" in this section). • Check the battery charge status. During parking, this check must be carried out every three weeks. Recharge the battery if the open circuit voltage is lower than 12.2 V. • Check that the parking brake is NOT engaged. • Do not empty the engine cooling system • Clean and protect the painted parts applying protective wax. • Clean and protect polished metal parts with special products available on the market. • Talc the windshield wiper blades and raise them from the windshield. Maintenance and Care • Cover the vehicle with a long cloth in breathable fabric (available from the Service Network). Do not use thick plastic sheets, which do not allow the humidity on the vehicle surface to evaporate. • Inflate the tires up to a pressure which must be 1 bar (14.5 psi) higher than the normally prescribed one, and check it at regular intervals. NOTE: The Service Network can provide you with any information about the available “Indoor and Outdoor Car Covers”, available in the “Genuine Accessories” range. WARNING! The tire pressure must be brought back to the prescribed value before reusing the vehicle (see "Tire Inflation Pressure" in section "Features and Specifications"). Restarting the Vehicle Before restarting the vehicle after a long period of inactivity, we recommend that you carry out the following operations. • Check the tires for pressure and for any damages, cuts or cracks. If this is the case, have them replaced. • Do not dry-rub the external surface of the vehicle. • Visually inspect if there are any fluid leaks (oil, brake and clutch fluid, engine coolant etc.). • Have the engine oil and filter replaced. • Have the presence of water in fuel filter checked (Diesel only). • Check the fluid levels in the brake system, as well as the engine coolant level. • Check the air filter and have them replaced if necessary. • Reconnect the battery after checking the charge status (refer to "Maintenance-Free Battery" in this section) and perform the initializing procedure if applicable. • With the gearshift in N (Neutral), let the engine idle for several minutes. WARNING! The engine idle must be performed outdoors. Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide which is strongly toxic and potentially lethal. 7 377 Maintenance and Care Battery Statement Battery Statement Status of Charge To avoid problems with ignition and/or the electrical system in general when you are driving, the battery charge status is constantly maintained and guaranteed by the vehicle's recharge circuit; the main component of which is the alternator. This circuit is only able to supply voltage to the battery when the vehicle is travelling. The warning light on the instrument cluster, will indicate any malfunctions in the recharge circuit or an insufficient battery charge status (shown in figure). 7 The vehicle is fitted with advanced electronic systems, such as, for example, the alarm system and various electronic control modules, which 378 consume power even when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the vehicle is not being used. Therefore, it is fundamental that the battery is properly charged to ensure that the engine starts properly and that all the electrical/electronic systems in the vehicle work efficiently. Maintaining Battery Charge If you perform short daily trips (approximately 16 km/10 miles), which correspond to an annual total of 6000 km/4000 miles, or when the vehicle is not going to be used for one week or more, Maserati recommends connecting the vehicle to a battery charger, to save you the trouble of having to recharge the battery. The battery charger will keep the battery charged properly and at the correct voltage levels required by the systems and devices in the vehicle. Before using the battery charger, carefully follow the instructions provided. If you do not use a battery charger to prevent the battery from going flat when you are not going to use the vehicle for long periods of time, you need to check and recharge the battery at least once every three weeks. Make this check if you perform short daily trips (approximately 16 km/10 mi) which correspond to an annual total of 6000 km/4000 miles. Please note that allowing the battery to go flat repeatedly can cause premature wear on the internal cells and greatly reduce their life, leading to problems with the ignition system and other electrical/electronic systems. The Service Network is available to advise you on how to recharge your battery correctly and give you useful information on battery care and maintenance. NOTE: The Maserati Service Network can provide you with any information about the Maserati approved "Battery Charger and Conditioner", available in the "Genuine Accessories" range. WARNING! The process of charging or recharging the battery produces hydrogen, a dangerous gas that can explode and cause serious injuries. When charging or recharging the battery, follow the recommended precautions at all times: • always charge or recharge the battery in a well-ventilated environment; Maintenance and Care • never charge or recharge a battery that has frozen: it can explode due to hydrogen trapped inside the ice crystals; • ensure that any sparks or open flames are nowhere near the battery while it is charging; • before using a charger to charge or maintain the battery charge status, carefully follow the instructions provided to ensure the charger is connected to the battery safely and correctly. 7 379 Maintenance and Care 380 8 - Features and Specifications Refillings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Fuel Consumption and Exhaust Emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Tire Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 381 Features and Specifications Refillings NOTE: Maserati reserves the right to change or revise specifications without prior notification. CAUTION! To guarantee vehicle’s integrity and maintain performance level Maserati recommends to use Maserati genuine products. Refillings and Recommended Products (Gasoline only) Parts to be refilled Fuel tank 8 382 Quantity Product specifications 80 litres/17.5 UK gal Premium unleaded fuel with no less than 95 RON/85 MON (91 (including 16 litres/3.5 UK CLC or AKI). gal of reserve) Engine (V8): oil capacity including filter cartridge 8,3 litres/1.82 UK gal (max) (Difference among MIN and MAX level 1,4 litres/0.31 UK gal) Synthetic multigrade lubricants SAE 5W-40 that meet API SL/CF and ACEA A3, B3, B4 specifications. Recommended oil: SHELL Helix Ultra Maserati 5W-40 (1). Engine (V6): oil capacity including filter cartridge 7,3 litres/1.61 UK gal (max) (Difference among MIN and MAX level 1 litre/0.22 UK gal) Synthetic multigrade lubricants SAE 10W-60 that meet API SN/CF and ACEA A3, B3, B4 specifications. Recommended oil: SHELL Helix Ultra Maserati 10W-60 (2). Engine (AWD version): oil capacity including filter cartridge 8,3 litres/1.82 UK gal (max) (MIN – MAX difference: 1 litre/0.22 UK gal) Features and Specifications Parts to be refilled Quantity Product specifications Windshield washer fluid tank 3,5 litres/0.77 UK gal Mix of water and detergent fluid, in the proportions indicated on the product package. If the temperature is below –20°C (–4°F), use pure detergent fluid. Detergent fluid: Mix of CUNA NC 956-II surfactants and alcohols. Recommended fluid: WUERTH Windshield Washer Fluid with antifreeze or AREXONS DP1. Engine cooling circuit (V8) 14,2 litres/3.13 UK gal (for dual-zone air conditioning system) 15 litres/3.3 UK gal (for four-zone air conditioning system) Engine cooling circuit (V6) 9,2 litres/2.03 UK gal (for dual-zone air conditioning system) 10 litres/2.2 UK gal (for four-zone air conditioning system) Mixture of water and coolant, proportionally 50/50%. Coolant: protective, antifreeze action and ethylene glycol-based with organic inhibitors compatible with regulations: • ASTM D 3306, ASTM D 2570 • ASTM D 4340, ASTM D 2809 • SAE J 1034 • CUNA NC 956/16. Recommended fluid: PETRONAS Paraflu UP or SHELL Long Life OAT. Automatic transmission cooling circuit 2,5 litres/0.55 UK gal (3) Automatic transmission 7,6 litres/1.67 UK gal (3) Differential 1,3 litres/0.28 UK gal (3) Front differential (AWD version) 0,45 litres/0.10 UK gal (3) Transfer case (AWD version) 0,62 litres/0.14 UK gal First equipment oil: SHELL ATF L- 12108 or ZF Lifeguard 8. Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 – FE Hypoid Gear Lubricant. First equipment oil: SHELL TF 0951B. 8 First equipment oil: SHELL TF 0870. 383 Features and Specifications Parts to be refilled Quantity Braking system 0,88 litres/0.19 UK gal +/-4% Air conditioning system dual-zone: 620 g +/-20 g 1.367 lb +/-0.044 lb (r1234yf); 680 g +/-20 g 1.5 lb +/-0.044 lb (r134a) four-zone: 780 g +/-20 g 1.72 lb +/-0.044 lb (r1234yf); 870 g +/-20 g 1.92 lb +/-0.044 lb (r134a) Product specifications Synthetic fluid: FMVSS 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925 Class 4, ENSAYOS INTA-UNE 26-109-88, SAE J1703, SAE J1704, CUNA NC 956-01. Recommended fluid: PETRONAS Tutela TOP 4/S. CAUTION! For each oil refilling and/or replacement, please contact the Service Network. Coolant: r1234yf (for the European market). r134a (for the other markets). (1) In countries where it is not available, recommended oil "SHELL Helix Ultra 5W-40". (2) In countries where it is not available, recommended oil "SHELL Helix Ultra 10W-60". (3) No change and/or topping up expected in scheduled maintenance. Refillings and Recommended Products (Diesel only) Parts to be refilled 8 384 Fuel tank Quantity Product specifications 80 litres/17.5 UK gal Premium diesel fuel that meets the requirements of EN590. (including 16 litres/3.5 UK Biodiesel blends that meet EN590 may also be used. gal of reserve) Features and Specifications Parts to be refilled Quantity Product specifications Tank of reducing agent AdBlue® 19,6 litres/4.30 UK gal Solution of pure urea (32.5%) in de-mineralised water (67.5%) meeting DIN 70070 and ISO 22241 specifications, obtained by synthesis. Recommended fluid: AdBlue®. Engine: oil capacity including filter cartridge 8,2 litres/1.80 UK gal (max) (MIN – MAX difference: 1 litre/0.22 UK gal) Synthetic multigrade lubricants SAE 5W-40 that meet API SL/CF and ACEA A3, B3, B4 specifications. Recommended oil: SHELL Helix Ultra Maserati 5W-40 (1). Windshield washer fluid tank 3,5 litres/0.77 UK gal Synthetic multigrade lubricants SAE 5W-40 that meet API SL/CF and ACEA A3, B3, B4 specifications. Recommended oil: SHELL Helix Ultra Maserati 5W-40 (1). Engine cooling circuit 13 litres/2.86 UK gal (for dual-zone air conditioning system) 13,8 litres/3.03 UK gal (for four-zone air conditioning system) Mixture of water and coolant, proportionally 50/50%. Coolant: protective, antifreeze action and ethylene glycol-based with organic inhibitors compatible with regulations: • ASTM D 3306, ASTM D 2570 • ASTM D 4340, ASTM D 2809 • SAE J 1034 • CUNA NC 956/16. Recommended fluid: PETRONAS Paraflu UP or SHELL Long Life OAT. (2) Automatic transmission 7,7 litres/1.69 UK gal First equipment oil: SHELL ATF L- 12108 or ZF Lifeguard 8. (2) Differential 1,3 litres/0.28 UK gal Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 – FE Hypoid Gear Lubricant. 8 385 Features and Specifications Parts to be refilled Braking system Quantity 0,88 litres/0.19 UK gal +/-4% Product specifications Synthetic fluid: FMVSS 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925 Class 4, ENSAYOS INTA-UNE 26-109-88, SAE J1703, SAE J1704, CUNA NC 956-01. Recommended fluid: PETRONAS Tutela TOP 4/S. CAUTION! For each oil refilling and/or replacement, please contact the Service Network. Air conditioning system dual-zone: 620 g +/-20 g 1.367 lb +/-0.044 lb (r1234yf); 680 g +/-20 g 1.5 lb +/-0.044 lb (r134a) four-zone: 780 g +/-20 g 1.72 lb +/-0.044 lb (r1234yf); 870 g +/-20 g 1.92 lb +/-0.044 lb (r134a) Coolant: r1234yf (for the European market); r134a (for the other markets). (1) In countries where it is not available, recommended oil “SHELL Helix Ultra 5W-40”. (2) No change and/or topping up expected in scheduled maintenance. 8 386 Features and Specifications Fuel Consumption and Exhaust Emission The fuel consumption and CO2 exhaust emission values specified by the manufacturer were established based on homologation tests prescribed by the applicable Directives of the destination market (EU: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain and Sweden - EFTA: Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway and Switzerland). The type of route, traffic and weather conditions, driving style, general condition of the vehicle, equipment/accessories in the vehicle, use of the air conditioning system, vehicle load, presence of roof-racks, other items or situations which may negatively affect the vehicle aerodynamics or wind resistance lead to consumption values differing from the indicated ones. After covering the first 3000 km (1900 mi) it will be possible to obtain a more consistent fuel consumption. NOTE: To read the fuel consumption and CO2 exhaust emission values specific for this car, please refer to the data given in the Certificate Of Conformity and to the related documentation provided at the time of delivery of the vehicle. Fuel Consumption (for other Countries) NOTE: The technical data, values and specifications in this Owner’s Manual are provided as guidance only. The vehicle specific data can deviate from the information provided, for example, as a result of optional or special equipment ordered with the vehicle, vehicle loads, and country specific measurement methods. The test procedures adopted for fuel consumption measuring are the following. • Urban cycle: this test begins with a cold start, followed by a simulation of an urban route. • Extra-urban cycle: this test involves frequent accelerations in all gears, simulating use of the vehicle on routes outside urban areas; the speed varies between 0 and 120 km/h (75 mph). • Combined cycle: this is calculated by considering a route consisting of about 37% urban cycle and 63% extra-urban cycle. 8 387 Features and Specifications CAUTION! The type of route, traffic and weather conditions, driving style, general condition of the vehicle, equipment/accessories in the vehicle, use of the air conditioning system, vehicle load and other items or situations which may negatively affect the vehicle aerodynamics or wind resistance lead to consumption ratios differing from the indicated ones. Fuel Consumption Data - Gasoline Models The fuel consumption values shown (litres per 100 km) were established based on homologation tests prescribed by following European Directives & ECE - ONU Regulation: Directives EC 715/2007, EC 692/2008 and ECE - ONU R101. Urban cycle Quattroporte GTS Quattroporte S Quattroporte S Q4 (AWD version) Quattroporte 15.6 l/100 km 13.8 l/100 km 14.2 l/100 km 13.1 l/100 km Extra urban cycle 7.9 l/100 km 7.2 l/100 km 7.1 l/100 km 6.8 l/100 km Combined cycle 10.7 l/100 km 9.6 l/100 km 9.7 l/100 km 9.1 l/100 km Fuel Consumption Data - Diesel Model The fuel consumption values shown (litres per 100 km) were established based on homologation tests prescribed by following European Directives & ECE - ONU Regulation: Directives EC 715/2007, EC 692/2008 and ECE - ONU R101. Quattroporte Diesel Urban cycle 7.9 l/100 km Extra urban cycle 5.2 l/100 km Combined cycle 6.2 l/100 km Exhaust Emissions (for other Countries) 8 388 NOTE: The technical data, values and specifications in this Owner’s Manual are provided as guidance only. The vehicle specific data can deviate from the information provided, for example, as a result of optional or special equipment ordered with the vehicle, vehicle loads, and country specific measurement methods. Features and Specifications Exhaust Emission Data - Gasoline Models The CO2 exhaust emission ratings shown (grams per km) were established based on homologation tests prescribed by following European Directives & ECE - ONU Regulation: Directives EC 715/2007, EC 692/2008 and ECE - ONU R101. Urban cycle Quattroporte GTS Quattroporte S Quattroporte S Q4 (AWD version) Quattroporte 363 g/km 321 g/km 330 g/km 303 g/km Extra urban cycle 184 g/km 167 g/km 165 g/km 158 g/km Combined cycle 250 g/km 223 g/km 226 g/km 212 g/km Exhaust Emission Data - Diesel Model The CO2 exhaust emission ratings shown (grams per km) were established based on homologation tests prescribed by following European Directives & ECE - ONU Regulation: Directives EC 715/2007, EC 692/2008 and ECE - ONU R101. Quattroporte Diesel Urban cycle 208 g/km Extra urban cycle 137 g/km Combined cycle 163 g/km 8 389 Features and Specifications Technical data NOTE: The technical data, values and specifications in this Owner’s Manual are provided as guidance only. The vehicle specific data can deviate from the information provided, for example, as a result of optional or special equipment ordered with the vehicle, vehicle loads, and country specific measurement methods. Engine Data - Gasoline Models Quattroporte GTS Quattroporte S – Quattroporte S Q4 (AWD version) Quattroporte Cylinder number and position 8 - 90° V 6 - 60° V 6 - 60° V Number of valves per cylinder 4 4 4 86.5 x 80.8 mm 86.5 x 84.5 mm 86.5 x 84.5 mm Total displacement 3799 cu.cm 2979 cu.cm 2979 cu.cm Compression ratio 9.5 : 1 9.7 : 1 9.7 : 1 390 kW - 530 CV 6700 rpm 316 kW - 430 CV 5750 rpm 257 kW - 350 CV 5500 Peak torque (EC) - corresponding RPM 650 Nm - 66.3 kgm 2000 rpm 580 Nm - 59 kgm 1750 - 4500 rpm 500 Nm - 51 kgm 1600 - 4500 rpm Overboost torque (EC) - corresponding RPM 710 Nm - 72.4 kgm 2000 rpm 580 Nm - 59 kgm 1750 - 4500 rpm 500 Nm - 51 kgm 1600 - 4500 rpm Data Bore x stroke Maximum power output (EC) - corresponding RPM Engine Properties 8 390 Timing The timing system uses two overhead camshafts. On the gasoline engines the camshafts are equipped with timing variator. Timing system control Timing chain. Supply Turbocharged with turbocompressor and related intercooler for each bank. Features and Specifications Injection – Ignition High-pressure (200 bar) direct fuel injection system. Static ignition with digital electronic control system included and controlled by a single microprocessor ECU. Engine Data - Diesel Model Data Quattroporte Diesel Cylinder number and position 6 - 60° V Number of valves per cylinder 4 Bore x stroke 83 x 92 mm Total displacement 2987 cu.cm Compression ratio 16.5 : 1 Maximum power output (EC) - corresponding RPM 202 kW – 275 CV (*) 4000 rpm Peak torque (EC) - corresponding RPM 600 Nm – 61.2 kgm 2000 rpm (*) 184 kW – 250 CV for Italian market only. Engine Properties Timing The timing system uses two overhead camshafts. Timing system control Timing chain. Supply Turbocharged with turbocompressor and related intercooler for each bank. Injection – Ignition Common-Rail direct-injection with reduced dwell time-injectors. It features sequential multiple injections with pilot and post injection to deliver highly responsive performance as well as clean raw emissions, assisted by a sophisticated exhaust gas recirculation system. The max injection pressure of the common rail system is 2000 bar. 8 Brakes Self-ventilating disc brakes on the four wheels. The Electric Parking Brake (EPB) acts on the rear wheels. 391 Features and Specifications Braking System Performance Dual Cast Dual Cast Base Front disc diameter Drilled disc: 380 mm (15 in) Drilled disc: 360 mm (14.1 in) 345 mm (13.6 in) Rear disc diameter Drilled disc: 345 mm (13.6 in) Drilled disc: 345 mm (13.6 in) 330 mm (13 in) Transmission ZF automatic transmission with 8 gears, torque converter, lock-up clutch and anti-slip function. Sequential and traditional control type. TRANSAXLE-type transmission. Traction system equipped with rear self-locking differential. Suspension Front suspensions with double wishbone independent wheels. Multilink system rear suspensions on independent wheels. Skyhook active suspensions with electronic controlled dampening. Steering Electric Power Steering (EPS) system, axis parallel type. Steering diameter = 12.4 m (13.5 yd). No. of steering wheel turns = 1.37 (to the left and right). Wheels 8 392 NOTE: • Maserati recommends Maserati Genuine Tires marked with "MGT" logo specifically designed for its models. • In order to maintain high performance and safety level, Maserati recommends to use tires equivalent to the original size. Features and Specifications WARNING! • The maximum speed reachable with the tires is indicated by the tire manufacturer. Always comply with the regulations in force in the Country you are driving in. • Never exceed the maximum speed indicated for the tires: failure to respect the max. speed may damage these tires. Danger: risk of accident! Standard Wheel Dimension - Gasoline Models Allowed tires size Light alloy rims Quattroporte GTS: Basic version -GranLusso (*) GranSport 20” x 8,5J (front) 20” x 10,5J (rear) 21” x 8,5J (front) 21” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 245/40 ZR 20 99Y XL 245/35 ZR 21 96Y XL - Rear tires 285/35 ZR 20 100Y 285/30 ZR 21 100Y XL - Front winter tires 245/40 R 20 99W XL M+S 245/35 R 21 96W XL M+S - Rear winter tires 285/35 R 20 100W M+S Spare rim 285/30 R 21 100W XL M+S 18” x 6J - Spare tire 175/55 18 (*) These wheels are standard also for GranSport version of India market Allowed tires size Quattroporte - Quattroporte S - Quattroporte S Q4: Basic version GranLusso GranSport Light alloy rims 19” x 8,5J (front) 19” x 10J (rear) 20” x 8,5J (front) 20” x 10,5J (rear) 21” x 8,5J (front) 21” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 245/45 ZR 19 98Y 245/40 ZR 20 99Y XL 245/35 ZR 21 96Y XL - Rear tires 275/40 ZR 19 101Y 285/35 ZR 20 100Y 285/30 ZR 21 100Y XL - Front winter tires 245/45 ZR 19 98W M+S 245/40 R 20 99W XL M+S 245/35 R 21 96W XL M+S 8 393 Features and Specifications Allowed tires size - Rear winter tires Quattroporte - Quattroporte S - Quattroporte S Q4: Basic version GranLusso GranSport 275/40 ZR 19 101W M+S 285/35 R 20 100W M+S 285/30 R 21 100W XL M+S Spare rim 18” x 6J - Spare tire 175/55 18 Optional Wheel Dimension - Gasoline Models 8 Allowed tires size All models / versions Light alloy rims 20” x 8,5J (front) 20” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 245/40 ZR 20 99Y XL - Rear tires 285/35 ZR 20 100Y - Front winter tires 245/40 R 20 99W XL M+S - Rear winter tires 285/35 R 20 100W M+S Light alloy rims 21” x 8,5J (front) 21” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 245/35 ZR 21 96Y XL - Rear tires 285/30 ZR 21 100Y XL - Front winter tires 245/35 R 21 96W XL M+S - Rear winter tires 285/30 R 21 100W XL M+S Standard Wheel Dimension - Diesel Model Allowed tires size Light alloy rims 394 Quattroporte: Basic version 19” x 8,5J (front) 19” x 10J (rear) GranLusso 20” x 8,5J (front) 20” x 10,5J (rear) GranSport 21” x 8,5J (front) 21” x 10,5J (rear) Features and Specifications Allowed tires size Quattroporte: Basic version GranLusso GranSport - Front tires 245/45 ZR 19 98Y 245/40 ZR 20 99Y XL 245/35 ZR 21 96Y XL - Rear tires 275/40 ZR 19 101Y 85/35 ZR 20 100Y 285/30 ZR 21 100Y XL - Front winter tires 245/45 ZR 19 98W M+S 245/40 R 20 99W XL M+S 245/35 R 21 96W XL M+S - Rear winter tires 275/40 ZR 19 101W M+S 285/35 R 20 100W M+S 285/30 R 21 100W XL M+S Spare rim 18” x 6J - Spare tire 175/55 18 Optional Wheel Dimension - Diesel Model Allowed tires size All versions Light alloy rims 20” x 8,5J (front) 20” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 245/40 ZR 20 99Y XL - Rear tires 285/35 ZR 20 100Y - Front winter tires 245/40 R 20 99W XL M+S - Rear winter tires 285/35 R 20 100W M+S Light alloy rims 21” x 8,5J (front) 21” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 245/35 ZR 21 96Y XL - Rear tires 285/30 ZR 21 100Y XL - Front winter tires 245/35 R 21 96W XL M+S - Rear winter tires 285/30 R 21 100W XL M+S 8 (Continued) 395 Features and Specifications Performance NOTE: The specifications described can change without prior notification. Performance Data - Gasoline Models Quattroporte GTS Quattroporte S Quattroporte SQ4 (AWD version) Quattroporte Maximum speed 310 km/h (192 mph) 286 km/h (177 mph) 286 km/h (177 mph) 270 km/h (167 mph) Accelerations from 0 to 100 km/h 4.7 seconds 5.1 seconds 4.9 seconds 5.6 seconds Performance Data - Diesel Model Quattroporte Diesel Maximum speed 252 km/h (156 mph) (*) 242 km/h (150 mph) Accelerations from 0 to 100 km/h 6.4 seconds (*) 6.8 seconds (*) For 184 kW - 250 CV version only. Weights NOTE: The specifications described can change without prior notification. 8 396 Features and Specifications Weight Data - Gasoline Models Quattroporte GTS Quattroporte / Quattroporte S Quattroporte S Q4 (AWD version) Unladen vehicle weight (with tanks filled, tools and accessories) 1950 kg / 4299 lb (*) 1900 kg / 4189 lb (*) 1980 kg / 4365 lb (*) Approved gross vehicle weight (GVWR) 2540 kg / 5600 lb (1200 kg / 2646 lb front axle – 1340 kg / 2954 lb rear axle) 2485 kg / 5478 lb (1145 kg / 2524 lb front axle – 1340 kg / 2954 lb rear axle) 2540 kg / 5600 lb (1200 kg / 2646 lb front axle – 1340 kg / 2954 lb rear axle) (*) Base configuration without optionals. Weight Data - Diesel Model Quattroporte Diesel Unladen vehicle weight (with tanks filled, tools and accessories) 1985 kg / 4376 lb (*) Approved gross vehicle weight (GVWR) 2540 kg / 5600 lb (1200 kg / 2646 lb front axle – 1340 kg / 2954 lb rear axle) (*) Base configuration without optionals. Dimensions Wheel base 3171 mm (124.84 in) Total length 5266 mm (207.32 in) Width without mirrors 1948 mm (76.69 in) Width with mirrors 2099 mm (82.63 in) Front track (*) 1629 ÷ 1632 mm (64.13 ÷ 64.25 in) Rear track (*) 1633 ÷ 1648 mm (64.29 ÷ 64.88 in) Front overhang 973 mm (38.30 in) 8 397 Features and Specifications Rear overhang 1122 mm (44.17 in) Height (*) 1470 ÷ 1484 mm (57.87 ÷ 58.42 in) Boot compartment volume 530 l (116.6 UK gal) (*) Variable size according to the motorization, the tire size and the optional installed. 8 398 Features and Specifications Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure value under the following loading conditions listed in the table below: • PLC (Partial Loading Condition): considering 2 passengers + luggage • FLC (Full Loading Condition): considering 4 or 5 passengers + luggage. (*) Speed driving higher than 200 km/h (124 mph) Load PLC Wheel Pressure FLC PLC - FLC Front and rear Front and rear Front and rear 220 kPa – 2,2 bar (32 psi) 260 kPa – 2,6 bar (38 psi) 260 kPa – 2,6 bar (38 psi) Spare tire pressure 350 kPa – 3,5 bar (51 psi) (*) Not for winter and all-season tires. NOTE: • For more information about the pressure check methods, see "Tires – General Information" in section "Driving". • On vehicles of some markets the tire inflation pressure value are also indicated on the driver's side rear door pillar. WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire overheating and failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and potholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. 8 399 Features and Specifications 400 Index Index Abbreviations .............. Active Blind Spot Assist - ABSA . . ABSA Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radar Device - Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCP - Rear Cross Path Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed Range of Use . . . . . . . . System Availability . . . . . . . . . System in Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . System Limitation . . . . . . . . . System Temporarily Unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC ACC Controls and Activation Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACC Operation Before and During Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACC Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADAS Equipments . . . . . . . . . Changing Speed Setting . . . . . Conditions for Disabling and Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displayed Information . . . . . . Driver Override . . . . . . . . . . . Radar Device - Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resuming Speed . . . . . . . . . . Speed Range of Use . . . . . . . . Temporary Deactivation . . . . . .. 7 284 285 287 286 284 284 286 285 286 262 267 261 261 264 265 262 264 270 265 263 265 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . Activation/Deactivation . . . . . Display Warnings and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precautions while Driving with ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Following Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Speed . . . . . . . . . Adding Reducing Agent AdBlue® (Diesel only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How To Top Up AdBlue® Level Yourself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Important Warnings if You Top Up AdBlue® Level Yourself . . . Specifications of Reducing Agent AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . Air Conditioning Control Dual-zone Controls . . . . . . . . Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . A/C Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-Zone Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four-zone Controls . . . . . . . . Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Conditioning Distribution . . . Adjustable Air Vents . . . . . . . Fixed Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . 261 263 268 267 269 266 264 311 313 312 311 108 206 206 216 212 210 213 215 144 146 146 Air Conditioning System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio Controls Audio Controls on Central Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Start&Stop System . . . Automatic Restarting of the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Occupant Safety Function . . . . Start&Stop Deactivated . . . . . Start&Stop Function Disabling Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start&Stop Not Active . . . . . . Start&Stop System Failure . . . . Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . Automatic Transmission Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Transmission Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Shift Lever . . . . . . . . . Transmission Malfunction and Overheating Conditions . . . . . Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure . . Battery Remote Posts Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jump Start Procedure . . . . . . . 369 235 206 186 186 187 199 222 223 224 223 224 223 226 226 227 230 229 234 328 329 330 9 401 Index Battery Statement . . . . . . . . . . . 9 402 Battery Statement Status of Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintaining Battery Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blind Spot Assist - BSA . . . . . . . . BSA and RCP Setting . . . . . . . BSA System Operation . . . . . . Radar Device - Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCP - Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . Bluetooth, Customer settings . . . Bodywork Maintenance and Care Pre-Short Drop Function . . . . . Protection from Atmospheric Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Useful Advice to Keep the Bodywork in Good Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boot Compartment Open and Close the Boot Lid . . Boot Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boot Lid Emergency Release from inside the Boot Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake and Stability Control System Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) and Electronic Brake-force Distribution (EBD) . . . . . . . . . Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . Brake Throttle Override (BTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 378 378 279 282 279 283 281 200 371 375 371 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brakes Performance . . . . . . . . . . Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . Boot Compartment Light . Front Headlights . . . . . . . Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . Light Clusters Bulbs Replacement . . . . . . . . . . Number Plate Lights . . . . . Tail-Light Clusters Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Comfort Luxury" Rear Seats 372 43 48 48 251 252 253 253 ... ... 251 253 ... 253 . . . . . . . . . . 396 367 368 367 368 ... ... 367 368 ... 367 . . . . . ... Central Console Features . . . . Instrument Panel on the Rear Central Console . . . . . . . . . . . Reclining Shelf Rear Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat Setting Devices . . . . . . . . Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading with Rear Seatbacks Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Load Carrying Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . Child Restraint System Group 0 and 0+ Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 105 105 106 104 135 136 135 136 67 Group 1 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Group 2 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Group 3 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Some Tips on getting the most out of your Child Restraint . . . . 68 Suitability of the Passenger Seats for using Universal Child Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . 66 Installing an Isofix Universal Child Restraint System . . . . . . . 71 Installing Child Restraint Systems using the Vehicle Seat Belt equipped with ALR . . . . . . . . . 70 Isofix Universal Child Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Maserati Recommended Child Restraint Systems for this Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Clock, analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Consulting the Manual . . . . . . . . . . 6 Customer Programmable Features (MTC+ Settings). . . . . . . . . . . 192 Dashboard Compartments . . . . . 203 Privacy Lock Features . . . . . . . 204 Doors Automatic Locking Doors . . . . . 30 Index Doors Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child Protection Door Lock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doors Manual Lock . . . . . . . . . Power Doors Locking/Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . Soft Door Close System . . . . . . . Drive Away Inhibit strategy . . . . Drive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls Preview . . . . . . . . . . I.C.E. Mode excluding ESC . . . . Setting the Drive Mode . . . . . Driver Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . Easy Entry/Exit Seats . . . . . . . . Memory Position Recall . . . . . Memory Profiles Setting . . . . . Pairing Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Seats Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . Before the Trip . . . . . . . . . . . Safe Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Cruise Control . Activation . . . . . . . . . . Changing Speed Setting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . Displayed Information . Driver Override . . . . . . Resume Speed . . . . . . . Setting Desired Speed . Speed Range of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 30 29 30 31 250 236 236 245 236 99 101 100 100 100 308 308 308 310 257 259 259 257 258 260 260 259 259 Temporary Deactivation . . . . . Using Electronic Cruise Control on Hillsides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Release of the Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . 260 273 271 273 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . Requirements of Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements of Gasoline . Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . Fuse Box under the Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . Integrated Power Module Position of Fuses . . . . . . . Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used Fuses Characteristics . 274 Hazard Warning Flashers 260 326 319 Forward Collision Warning - FCW Changing FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . FCW Operation . . . . . . . . . . . FCW Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limited Operation and Service Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radar Device - Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed Range of Use . . . . . . . . Forward Collision Warning FCW . Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freeing the Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . Front Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . Front Ventilated Seats . . . . . . . Fuel Consumption and Exhaust Emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust Emission Data - Diesel Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Consumption (for other Countries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 272 271 271 327 96 97 96 98 387 388 387 ... 303 ... ... ... 304 303 360 ... ... ... 366 361 361 ... ... 363 360 ...... Highway Assist – HAS Hands Detection on Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HAS Disengage . . . . . . . . . . . HAS Monitoring on Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HAS Operation . . . . . . . . . . . Radar Device - Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed Range of Use . . . . . . . . System Cancellation . . . . . . . . System Limitations . . . . . . . . . System Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . Highway Assist-HAS . . . . . . . . . . HomeLink ® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HomeLink® Before You Start Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 290 291 289 288 292 288 291 291 290 287 140 140 9 403 Index Radio Frequency Transmitter Regulatory Information . . . . . Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System with Devices Provided with Rolling Codes . . . . . . . . . System with Devices Without Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Entry/Exit 9 404 143 142 141 142 142 142 Light Dimmer Controls . . . . . . . 24 Use of Light Switch for Vehicle Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 In case of a Punctured Tire . . . . . 320 Using the Compact Spare Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Using Tire Repair Kit . . . . . . . 320 In the Event of an Accident . . . . 318 Emergency Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 First Aid Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 In case of Injured Persons . . . . 318 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 178 Customising the Main Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Main Menu Bar on MTC+ Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Manual Controls and Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Use the MTC+ Display as Projection Device . . . . . . . . . . 182 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . Message Concerning the Residual Life of Engine Oil (Diesel only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Display: Example to modify the "Speed Warning" status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Display: Main and Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Display: Main Menu & Submenu Content Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Display: Menus and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Display: Messages on Main Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Lights of Set Modes/Functions . . . . . . . . . . Warning and Indicator Lights on Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . Warning and Indicator Lights on Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Components . . . . . . . . . . Central Console Components/Features . . . . . . . . Components between the Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dashboard Components . . . . . . Front Doors Components . . . . . Rear Dome Console Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Doors Components . . . . . . 150 178 164 156 156 155 157 168 151 152 92 93 94 92 94 95 95 Interior Features . . . . . . . . . . . . Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Power Outlets . . . . . . Handholds and Cloth Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iPad Holder (Genuine Accessories) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iPod ® Connection . . . . . . . . . Map Pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multimedia Ports and Phone Housing Compartment . . . . . . Rear Seats Entertainment . . . . Removable Ashtray and Lighter (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Maintenance and Care . . Leather Upholstery Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MTC+ Touch Screen . . . . . . . . Parts in Premium Quality Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isofix Installing an Isofix Universal Child Restraint System . . . . . . . Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 129 127 133 135 132 134 131 134 133 132 134 375 376 376 376 71 16 Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Keyless Ignition Device . . . . . . . 16 Shift Ignition Device to OFF Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Index Lane Keeping Assist - LKA Customised Settings . . . . . . . . Function Description and Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . Radar Device - Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed Range of Use . . . . . . . . System Availability . . . . . . . . . System in Fault . . . . . . . . . . . System Limitations . . . . . . . . . Lane Keeping Assist-LKA . . . . . . Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Headlights . . . . . . Automatic High Beam . . . . . . Cargo Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . Daytime Running Lights (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dome Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full-LED Headlight with AFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . Headlights On with Wipers . . . High Beam with "Glare Free" Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integrated External Rear View Mirror Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . SmartBeam System . . . . . . . . . Maintenance - Free Battery 275 276 278 275 276 278 277 274 112 114 117 124 115 123 119 115 124 114 114 118 124 121 112 114 . . . . 356 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . A/C System Air Filter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Air Filters Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Service Components – Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Service Components – Gasoline Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield Wiper Maintenance and Blades Replacement . . . . Maintenance-Free Battery Battery Recharge . . . . . . . . . . To Disconnect the Battery . . . . To Reconnect the Battery . . . . Useful Advice to Extend Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MTC+ "Controls" Screen . . . . . . . Features Common to All Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . Features Specific for Vehicle without ADAS . . . . . . . . . . . . Features specific for Vehicles with ADAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MTC+ Settings - Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear Personal Data . . . . . . . . Clock & Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 345 Display . . . . . . . . . Doors & Locks . . . . Engine Off Options Lights . . . . . . . . . . Phone/Bluetooth . . Radio Setup . . . . . . Restore Settings . . . Safety and Driving Assistance . . . . . . . Voice Commands . . MTC+ System Audio Controls . . . ........ 186 355 Normal Starting of the Engine . . 220 222 221 222 354 354 348 347 359 357 358 358 188 189 189 189 192 199 202 195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 197 199 197 200 202 202 ........ ........ 196 194 "Panic Stop" Strategy . . . . . . . Engine Start Failure . . . . . . . . Engine Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . Occupant Restraint System ..... Occupants Restraint Systems Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert ®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passenger Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . Seat Belts and Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat Belts Pretensioners . . . . . . Three-Point Seat Belts . . . . . . . Three-Point Seat Belts Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . Using the Seat Belt in Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 55 53 55 54 51 53 54 9 405 Index Open and Close the Boot Lid Boot Lid Emergency Release . . . 48 Power Boot Lid/Hands Free . . . . 44 Open and Close the Hood . . . . . . . 49 Park Assist 9 406 ................. Cleaning the Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling and Disabling Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . Park Assist System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Park Assist Volume . . . . . . . . . . Park Assist Warning Messages Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service the Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deactivating Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPB Operation with Overheated Brakes . . . . . . . . . Failure Indication . . . . . . . . . . Manual Engagement/ Disengagement . . . . . . . . . . . Passive Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Door Lock from Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preventing Inadvertent Locking of key fob RKE Transmitter Inside the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 78 82 81 78 82 82 78 81 248 245 246 248 247 245 32 35 33 Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Release the Lid and enter the Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Unlock Door from the Driver Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Unlock Door from the Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Phone and Voice Controls on Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Phone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . 217 Phone/Bluetooth, Customer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Power Sunroof with Sunshade . . 138 Closing and Opening the Power Sunroof with RKE Transmitter and Ignition Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . 139 Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . 139 Slide Opening Sunroof . . . . . . 138 Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . 139 Venting Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . 139 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Power Sunshade on Rear Door Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . 107 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Auto Down Feature . . . . . . . . . 37 Auto-Up Feature with AntiPinch Protection . . . . . . . . . Open and Close the Windows and Sunroof with RKE Transmitter and Ignition Off . Rear Window and Sunshade Lockout Button . . . . . . . . . . Reset Auto-Up/Down . . . . . . Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . Rear Parking Camera . . 37 . . 37 . . 37 . . 37 . . 38 . . . . . . . . . . 83 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Rear Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Rear Head Restraints . . . . . . . 101 Rear Side Heated Seats . . . . . . 103 Rear View Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Power Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . 41 Rear-View Mirrors External Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Internal Rear-View Mirror . . . . 111 Refillings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Refillings and Recommended Products (Diesel only) . . . . . . . 384 Refillings and Recommended Products (Gasoline only) . . . . . 382 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Fuel Filler Neck Access . . . . . . 305 Presence of Water Inside the Fuel (Diesel only) . . . . . . . . . . 307 Index Refill the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Remote Start System . . . . . . . . . . 27 Requiring and setting Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Key Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Restarting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . 377 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Transporting Passengers . . . . . . 87 Vehicle Safety Checks . . . . . . . . 87 Scheduled Maintenance Service . 336 Interval Running Coupons . . . 336 Scheduled Maintenance (Service) Indicator . . . . . . . . . 336 Scheduled Service Plan . . . . . . . . 337 Exhaust Gas After-treatment System Strategies (Diesel only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Heavy-Duty Vehicle Use . . . . . 342 Main Operations/Service Coupons - Diesel Engine . . . . . 340 Main Operations/Service Coupons - Gasoline Engines . . 338 On Board Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . 342 Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Sentry Key Immobilizer System . . . 18 Sentry Key® Immobilizer System Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Replacement Key fobs . . . . . . . 19 Service and Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Siri Smart Personal Assistant . . . . 218 Spare Parts Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Advanced Front Air bag Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Air bag Deployment Sensors and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Air bag System Components . . . 57 Passenger's Air bag Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Supplemental Air bags . . . . . . . 60 Transport of persons with disability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Surround View Camera System . . . 84 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Danger Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Symbols of Prohibitions and Compulsory Measures . . . . . . . . 9 Warning Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Technical Data ....... Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . Engine Data - Gasoline Models . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... 390 391 397 ...... 390 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Premium System . . . . . . . . . . Radio Frequency Transmitter Regulatory Information . . . . . TPMS Deactivation . . . . . . . . . Tires - General Information . . . . . Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . Snow Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire Pressure Checkup . . . . . . Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires Durability . . . . . . . . . . . Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing a Disabled Vehicle . . . . . Manual Release of Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use the Tow Hook Included in the Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Towing Conditions . . . Traffic Sign Assist - TSA . . . . . . . Traffic Sign Assist – TSA Customised Settings . . . . . . . . Signs Monitoring on Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . 392 392 392 396 392 399 298 300 303 302 294 298 295 297 294 295 296 295 295 316 331 331 332 332 292 292 293 9 407 Index System Limitations . . . . . . . . . 293 Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Unlock the Vehicle with Key Fob . 25 Unlatch the Boot Lid . . . . . . . . 25 Unlock the Doors, Fuel Filler Door and Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Use of the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Breaking-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Gasoline Particulate Filter GPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 On Board Diagnostics . . . . . . . 256 Regenerate the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) . . . . . . 257 While Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Using the Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Brake Overheating . . . . . . . . . 255 Brake Pads and Brake Discs . . . 254 New Brake Pads and/or Brake Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Vehicle Identification Data 9 408 .. Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning and Identification Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . Arming the System . . . . . . . Rearming the System . . . . . To disarm the System . . . . . . . . 11 . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 19 20 20 21 Vehicle Stored for Long Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Warnings when Driving ...... Wheels Maintenance . . . . . . . . . Tires Maintenance . . . . . . . . . Wheel Rims Maintenance . . . . Windshield Wipers and Washers . Headlight On with Wipers . . . Rain Sensing Wipers . . . . . . . . Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . Wipers Blades Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 370 370 371 125 126 125 127 125 126 9 409 Because of the evolutions of the MASERATI products, which are continually developed and perfected, MASERATI S.p.A. reserves the right to make modifications to this manual as well as to the technical contents, functions and equipment of the vehicles delivered. Therefore, the user is not entitled to any claims based on the contents (texts, data, illustrations, explanations and regulations) in this manual, which are based on the data known at the time of going to print. Publication no. 910042611 - 1st Edition - 05/2019 This document may not be reproduced, printed or translated, even partially, without the written consent of MASERATI S.p.A. *1750790* *1750790*